604285
6
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/880
Pagina verder
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
1
Before driving
Adjusting and operating features such as door locks,
mirrors, and steering column.
2
When driving
Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.
3
Interior features
Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other in-
terior features for a comfortable driving experience.
4
Maintenance and
care
Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-
yourself maintenance, and maintenance information.
5
When trouble
arises
What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat
tire, or is involved in an accident.
6
Vehicle specifi-
cations
Detailed vehicle information.
Index
Alphabetical listing of information contained in this man-
ual.
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
2
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
1-1. Key information
Keys...................................... 34
1-2. Opening, closing and locking
the doors
Smart entry & start
system ................................ 39
Wireless remote control ........ 66
Side doors............................. 74
Back door.............................. 81
Glass hatch........................... 88
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors, steering
wheel)
Front seats............................ 93
Rear seats ............................ 97
Driving position memory
(driver’s seat).................... 115
Head restraints ................... 119
Seat belts............................ 122
Steering wheel .................... 129
Inside rear view mirror ........ 132
Outside rear view
mirrors .............................. 134
1-4. Opening and closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows .................. 137
Moon roof ........................... 141
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank
cap ................................... 146
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer
system.............................. 152
Double locking system ....... 158
Alarm.................................. 160
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture....... 168
SRS airbags ....................... 170
Child restraint systems....... 185
Installing child restraints..... 197
Airbag manual on-off
system.............................. 213
1
Before driving
For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s
Manual” for information regarding the equipment listed below.
Navigation system
Air conditioning
Hands-free system (for cellular
phone)
Toyota parking assist monitor
Rear view monitor system
Rear seat entertainment system
Audio/video system
Toyota parking assist-sensor
Wide view front & side monitor
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle .............. 218
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles without a smart
entry & start system)......... 235
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles with a smart
entry & start system)......... 239
Automatic transmission....... 249
Manual transmission........... 258
Turn signal lever ................. 263
Parking brake...................... 264
Horn .................................... 265
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters ............ 266
Indicators and warning
lights ................................. 270
Multi-information display
(Non-Optitron type
meters) ............................. 276
Multi-information display
(Optitron type meters)....... 282
Multi-information display
(Accessory meters)........... 292
2-3. Operating the lights and
wipers
Headlight switch ................. 300
Fog light switch .................. 312
Windshield wipers and
washer ............................. 314
Rear window wiper and
washer ............................. 320
Headlight cleaner switch .... 322
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control ..................... 324
Dynamic radar cruise
control .............................. 328
Toyota parking
assist-sensor.................... 345
Rear view monitor
system (vehicles with
an accessory meter) ........ 356
Wide view front & side
monitor (vehicles with
an accessory meter) ........ 361
Driving assist systems........ 373
PCS (Pre-Crash Safety
system) ............................ 380
Diesel Particulate
Filter system
(diesel engine only).......... 389
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage............. 392
Winter driving tips............... 396
Trailer towing...................... 400
2
When driving
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
4
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
3-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Front manual air
conditioning system .......... 418
Front automatic air
conditioning system .......... 425
Rear manual air
conditioning system .......... 435
Rear automatic air
conditioning system .......... 438
Heater idle up switch .......... 442
Power heater ...................... 443
Rear window defogger
switch................................ 444
Windshield wiper
de-icer............................... 447
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system types............. 449
Using the radio.................... 453
Using the CD player............ 458
Playing MP3 and
WMA discs........................ 468
Operating an iPod............... 477
Operating a
USB memory .................... 486
Optimal use of the
audio system .................... 496
Using the AUX port ............. 499
Using the steering wheel
audio switches .................. 501
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio
system
Bluetooth
®
audio
system.............................. 504
Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system.................... 511
Operating a Bluetooth
®
enabled portable
player ............................... 514
Setting up a Bluetooth
®
enabled portable
player ............................... 518
Bluetooth
®
audio system
setup ................................ 522
3-4. Using the hands-free system
(for mobile phone)
Hands-free system
(for mobile phone)............ 523
Using the hands-free system
(for mobile phone)............ 532
Making a phone call ........... 539
Setting a mobile phone ...... 543
Security and system
setup ................................ 546
Using the phone book ........ 551
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ................. 557
Personal/interior light
main switch ...................... 558
Personal/interior lights ..... 559
Lounge illumination
control switches ............... 560
3
Interior features
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
3-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features ....... 562
Glove box ......................... 563
Card holder....................... 564
Console box...................... 565
Bottle holders/door
pockets ............................. 567
Cup holders ...................... 569
Auxiliary boxes ................. 573
3-7. Other interior features
Cool box.............................. 576
Sun visors ........................... 579
Vanity mirror ....................... 580
Clock................................... 581
Outside temperature
display .............................. 582
Ashtray................................ 584
Conversation mirror ............ 585
Power outlet........................ 586
Seat heaters ....................... 590
Armrest ............................... 593
Coat hooks.......................... 594
Assist grips ......................... 595
Floor mat............................. 596
Luggage compartment
features............................. 598
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior ........... 606
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior ............ 610
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements .................... 613
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions ...................... 617
Hood................................... 622
Engine compartment .......... 623
Tires ................................... 645
Tire inflation pressure......... 649
Wheels ............................... 652
Air conditioning filter........... 654
Wireless remote
control/electronic key
battery .............................. 656
Checking and replacing
fuses ................................ 661
Light bulbs.......................... 675
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers ........... 692
If your vehicle needs
to be towed ...................... 694
If you think something
is wrong............................ 701
Fuel pump shut off system
(gasoline engine only)...... 702
4
Maintenance and care
5
When trouble arises
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
6
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds... ........................... 703
If a warning message is
displayed .......................... 718
If you have a flat tire
(vehicles with a standard
spare tire) ......................... 743
If you have a flat tire
(vehicles with an
emergency tire puncture
repair kit)........................... 765
If the engine will
not start............................. 786
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P .............. 789
If you lose your
keys/wireless remote
control transmitter............. 790
If the electronic key does
not operate properly ......... 791
If the vehicle battery is
discharged ........................ 795
If your vehicle
overheats.......................... 803
If you run out of fuel and
the engine stalls
(diesel engine only) .......... 806
If the vehicle becomes
stuck ................................. 807
If your vehicle has
to be stopped in an
emergency........................ 809
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) ........... 812
Fuel information ................. 844
6-2. Customization
Customizable features ....... 849
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize................. 862
Abbreviation list ............... 864
Alphabetical index ........... 865
What to do if... ................. 875
6
Vehicle specifications
Index
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
8
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Headlights (low beam)
P. 300
Headlights (high beam)
P. 300
Pictorial index
Exterior
Front fog lights
P. 312
Hood
P. 622
Windshield wipers
P. 314
Moon roof
P. 141
Outside rear view mirrors
P. 134
Front turn signal lights
P. 263
Side turn signal lights
P. 263
Front position lights
P. 300
9
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Vehicles with back door mounted
spare tire
Spare tire
P. 743
License
plate lights
P. 300
Tires
Rotation
Replacement
Inflation pressure
P. 645
P. 840
: If equipped
Back door
P. 81
Fuel filler door
P. 146
Rear turn signal lights
P. 263
Rear fog lights
P. 312
Side doors
P. 74
Rear window defogger
Glass hatch
P. 444
P. 88
License plate lights
P. 300
Stop/tail lights
P. 300
Roof luggage carrier
P. 392
Rear window
wiper
P. 320
10
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Cup holders
P. 569
Pictorial index
Interior
(Left-hand drive vehicles)
Seat belts
P. 122
SRS front passenger
airbag
P. 170
SRS driver airbag
P. 170
Head restraints
P. 119
Console box
Cool box
P. 565
P. 576
Armrest
Cup holders
P. 593
P. 569
Glove box
P. 563
Rear air conditioning system
P. 435, 438
SRS side airbags
P. 170
Power outlet
P. 586
Floor mat
P. 596
Front seats
P. 93
Rear seats
P. 97
11
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Moon roof switch
Intrusion sensor cancel switch
P. 141
P. 162
Vanity mirrors
Sun visors
*
3
P. 580
P. 579
SRS curtain shield airbags
P. 170
A
Auxiliary box
Conversation mirror
P. 573
P. 585
Personal/interior lights
P. 559
Rear seat entertainment system*
2
Personal/interior lights
P. 559
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
P. 132
Assist grips
P. 595
: If equipped
*
2
: Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
*
3
: NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint
on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in
front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur. (P. 209)
12
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Window lock switch
P. 137
Power window switches
P. 137
Pictorial index
Interior
(Left-hand drive vehicles)
B
Door lock switch
P. 75
Driving position memory switches
P. 115
Inside door lock button
P. 75
13
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
C
: If equipped
Cup holders
P. 569
Parking brake lever
P. 264
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Vehicles with a manual transmission
Shift lever
P. 249
Auxiliary box
P. 573
AUX port
P. 499
Power outlet
P. 586
Seat heater switches
P. 590
Shift lock override button
P. 789
Cup holders
P. 569
Parking brake lever
P. 264
Shift lever
P. 258
Auxiliary box
P. 573
AUX port
P. 499
Power outlet
P. 586
14
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
(Left-hand drive vehicles)
Headlight switch
Turn signal lever
Fog light switch
P. 300
P. 263
P. 312
Windshield wipers and washer switch
Rear window wiper and washer switch
P. 314
P. 320
Gauge and meters
P. 266
SRS driver knee airbag
P. 170
Fuel filler door opener
P. 146
Emergency flasher switch
P. 692
Accessory meter
Audio system
Navigation system
*
2
P. 292
P. 449
Audio system*
2
Auxiliary box
P. 449
P. 573
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles with a
smart entry & start system)
P. 239
Hood release lever
P. 622
Tilt and telescopic steering control switch
Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever
P. 129
P. 129
Pre-crash braking off switch
P. 381
15
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
A
Outside rear view mirror switches
P. 134
Headlight leveling dial
P. 301
Windshield wiper de-icer switch
P. 447
Headlight cleaner switch
P. 322
Lounge illumination control
switches
P. 560
Power heater switch
P. 443
Heater idle up switch
P. 442
: If equipped
*
2
: Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
16
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Horn
P. 265
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
(Left-hand drive vehicles)
B
Telephone switch*
2
P. 533
Cruise control switch
P. 324, 328
Audio remote control switches
P. 501
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance button
P. 328
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles without a
smart entry & start system)
P. 235
AVS switches*
1
Toyota parking assist-sensor switch (4 sensor type)
P. 345
VSC OFF switch*
1
P. 373
Menu switch
P. 283
“ENTER” switch
P. 283
Height control OFF
button
*
1
Height control
button*
1
“2nd STRT” button
(Non-Optitron type me-
ters)
P. 252
Talk switch*
2
P. 533
Wide view front &
side monitor switch
P. 361
17
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
C
Vehicles with a front manual air conditioning system
Vehicles with a front automatic air conditioning system
Clock
P. 581
Rear window defogger switch
P. 444
Air conditioning system
P. 418
Clock
P. 581
Rear window defogger switch
P. 444
Air conditioning system
P. 425
: If equipped
*
1
: Refer to the “Off-road Driving Owner’s Manual”.
*
2
: Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
18
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
(Left-hand drive vehicles)
D
Auxiliary box
P. 573
Vehicles with a standard type automatic transmission or 5-speed manual
transmission
Vehicles with a multi-mode type automatic transmission
Vehicles with a 6-speed manual transmission
Four-wheel drive control switch
*
1
Four-wheel drive control switch*
1
Crawl Control switch*
1
Rear differential lock/unlock switch*
1
Center differential
lock/unlock switch
*
1
Seat heater switches
P. 590
Center differential
lock/unlock switch*
1
Four-wheel drive control switch*
1
DAC switch*
1
19
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Rear seats
P. 97
Cup holders
P. 569
Seat belts
P. 122
SRS front passenger
airbag
P. 170
SRS driver airbag
P. 170
Head restraints
P. 119
Console box
Cool box
P. 565
P. 576
Armrest
Cup holders
P. 593
P. 569
Glove box
P. 563
Rear air conditioning system
P. 435, 438
SRS side airbags
P. 170
Power outlet
P. 586
Floor mat
P. 596
Front seats
P. 93
Pictorial index
Interior
(Right-hand drive vehicles)
: If equipped
*
1
: Refer to the “Off-road Driving Owner’s Manual”.
20
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Pictorial index
Interior
(Right-hand drive vehicles)
A
Moon roof switch
Intrusion sensor and tilt sensor cancel switch
P. 141
P. 162
Vanity mirrors
Sun visors
*
3
P. 580
P. 579
SRS curtain shield airbags
P. 170
Auxiliary box
Conversation mirror
P. 573
P. 585
Personal/interior lights
P. 559
Rear seat entertainment system*
2
Personal/interior lights
P. 559
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
P. 132
Assist grips
P. 595
21
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
B
Window lock switch
P. 137
Power window switches
P. 137
Door lock switch
P. 75
Driving position memory switches
P. 115
Inside door lock button
P. 75
: If equipped
*
2
: Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
*
3
: NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint
on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in
front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur. (P. 209)
22
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
C
Pictorial index
Interior
(Right-hand drive vehicles)
Cup holders
P. 569
Parking brake lever
P. 264
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Vehicles with a manual transmission
Shift lever
P. 249
Auxiliary box
P. 573
AUX port
P. 499
Power outlet
P. 586
Seat heater switches
P. 590
Shift lock override
button
P. 789
Parking brake lever
P. 264
Shift lever
P. 258
Auxiliary box
P. 573
AUX port
P. 499
Power outlet
P. 586
Cup holders
P. 569
23
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Headlight switch
Turn signal lever
Fog light switch
P. 300
P. 263
P. 312
Windshield wipers and washer
switch
Rear window wiper and washer
switch
P. 314
P. 320
Gauge and meters
P. 266
SRS driver knee airbag
P. 170
Fuel filler door opener
P. 146
Emergency flasher switch
P. 692
Accessory meter
Audio system
Navigation system
*
2
P. 292
P. 449
Hood release lever
P. 622
Audio system*
2
Auxiliary box
P. 449
P. 573
Tilt and telescopic steering
control switch
Tilt and telescopic steering
lock release lever
P. 129
P. 129
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
(Right-hand drive vehicles)
: If equipped
*
2
: Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
Pre-crash braking off switch
P. 381
24
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
A
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
(Right-hand drive vehicles)
Engine (ignition) switch
P. 239
Outside rear view mirror switches
P. 134
Headlight cleaner
switch
P. 322
Headlight leveling dial
P. 301
Power heater switch
P. 443
Heater idle up switch
P. 442
Lounge illumination control
switches
P. 560
Windshield wiper
de-icer switch
P. 447
25
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
B
: If equipped
*
1
: Refer to the “Off-road Driving Owner’s Manual”.
*
2
: Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
Wide view front &
side monitor switch
P. 361
VSC OFF
switch
*
1
P. 373
Telephone switch*
2
P. 533
Audio remote control switches
P. 501
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance button
P. 328
Menu switch
P. 283
Cruise control
switch
P. 324, 328
“2nd STRT” button
(Non-Optitron type meters)
P. 252
Toyota parking assist-sensor
switch
(4 sensor type)
P. 345
Height control button*
1
AVS switches*
1
Horn
P. 265
Talk switch*
2
P. 533
Height control OFF button*
1
“ENTER”
switch
P. 283
26
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
(Right-hand drive vehicles)
C
Vehicles with a front manual air conditioning system
Vehicles with a front automatic air conditioning system
Clock
P. 581
Rear window defogger switch
P. 444
Air conditioning system
P. 418
Clock
P. 581
Rear window defogger switch
P. 444
Air conditioning system
P. 425
27
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
D
Vehicles with a multi-mode type automatic transmission
Vehicles with a 6-speed manual transmission
Seat heater switches
P. 590
Center differential lock/unlock switch*
1
Four-wheel drive control switch*
1
Four-wheel drive control switch*
1
Crawl Control switch*
1
DAC switch*
1
Rear differential lock/unlock switch*
1
Center differential lock/unlock switch*
1
: If equipped
*
1
: Refer to the “Off-road Driving Owner’s Manual”.
28
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
For your information
Main Owners Manual
Please note that this manual applies to all models and all equipment, includ-
ing options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not
installed on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.
However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we
reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ
from your vehicle in terms of equipment.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota
Both genuine Toyota and a wide variety of other spare parts and accessories
for Toyota vehicles are currently available on the market. Should it be deter-
mined that any of the genuine Toyota parts or accessories supplied with the
vehicle need to be replaced, Toyota recommends that genuine Toyota parts
or accessories, be used to replace them. Other parts or accessories of
matching quality can also be used. Toyota cannot accept any liability or guar-
antee spare parts and accessories which are not genuine Toyota products,
nor for replacement or installation involving such parts. In addition, damage
or performance problems resulting from the use of non-genuine Toyota spare
parts or accessories may not be covered under warranty.
29
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Installation of an RF-transmitter system
As the installation of an RF-transmitter system in your vehicle could affect
electronic systems such as the multi-port fuel injection system/sequential
multi-port fuel injection system, cruise control system, anti-lock brake sys-
tem, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check
with any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional for precautionary measures or special instructions
regarding installation.
Further information regarding frequency bands, power levels, antenna posi-
tions and installation provisions for the installation of RF-transmitters, is
available on request at any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional.
Scrapping of your Toyota
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain
explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt
pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be
sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner
removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional, before you scrap your vehicle.
30
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influ-
ence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehi-
cle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and
reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other
drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that dis-
tracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or
reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you,
your occupants or others.
Your vehicle contains batteries and/or accumulators. Do not discard them
into the environment but cooperate with separate collection (Directive
2006/66/EC).
31
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to
have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.
There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with
the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat
build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to
children.
32
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Symbols used throughout this manual
Cautions & Notices
Symbols used in illustrations
CAUTION
This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause death or
serious injury to people. You are informed about what you must or must not do
in order to reduce the risk of death or serious injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause damage to
the vehicle or its equipment. You are informed about what you must or must
not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Toyota and its
equipment.
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”,
“Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”.
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turn-
ing, etc.) used to operate switches
and other devices.
Indicates the outcome of an opera-
tion (e.g. a lid opens).
1
Before driving
33
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
1-1. Key information
Keys.................................... 34
1-2. Opening, closing and locking
the doors
Smart entry & start
system .............................. 39
Wireless remote
control............................... 66
Side doors .......................... 74
Back door ........................... 81
Glass hatch......................... 88
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors, steering
wheel)
Front seats.......................... 93
Rear seats .......................... 97
Driving position memory
(driver’s seat).................. 115
Head restraints ................. 119
Seat belts.......................... 122
Steering wheel.................. 129
Inside rear view
mirror .............................. 132
Outside rear view
mirrors ............................ 134
1-4. Opening and closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows................. 137
Moon roof.......................... 141
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank
cap.................................. 146
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer
system ............................ 152
Double locking
system ............................ 158
Alarm ................................ 160
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving
posture............................ 168
SRS airbags...................... 170
Child restraint systems ..... 185
Installing child
restraints......................... 197
Airbag manual on-off
system ............................ 213
34
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
1-1. Key information
Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Vehicles with wireless remote control transmitter
Master keys
Valet key
Wireless remote controls
Operating the wireless remote control function (P. 66)
Key number plate
35
1-1. Key information
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
Master keys
Operating the wireless remote
control function (P. 66)
Valet key
Key number plate
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
Electronic keys
Operating the smart entry &
start system (P. 39)
Operating the wireless
remote control function
(P. 66)
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
36
1-1. Key information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Using the mechanical key (vehicles with a smart entry & start
system)
To take out the mechanical key,
push the release button and take
the key out.
After using the mechanical key,
store it in the electronic key. Carry
the mechanical key together with
the electronic key. If the electronic
key battery depleted or the entry
function does not operate prop-
erly, you will need the mechanical
key. (P. 791)
When required to leave the vehicle’s key to the vehicle with a parking
attendant
Lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (P. 563)
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
Carry the master key for your own use and provide the attendant with the
valet key.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with
the electronic key only.
37
1-1. Key information
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Key number plate
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the
event that a key (without a smart entry & start system) or mechanical key
(with a smart entry & start system) is lost, a new key can be made by any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional using the key number plate. (P. 790)
When riding in an aircraft
When bringing a key with wireless remote control function onto an aircraft,
make sure you do not press any buttons on the key while inside the aircraft
cabin. If you are carrying the key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons
are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the
key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
NOTICE
To prevent key damage
Observe the following:
Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for a long period of time.
Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys
close to such materials.
Do not disassemble the keys.
Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key.
Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as
TVs, audio systems, induction cookers, or medical electrical equipment,
such as low-frequency therapy equipment.
38
1-1. Key information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
NOTICE
Carrying the electronic key on your person
Carry the electronic key 10 cm (3.9 in.) or more away from electric appli-
ances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances
within 10 cm (3.9 in.) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing
the key to not function properly.
In case of a smart entry & start system malfunction or other key-related
problems
Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle to
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
When a vehicle key is lost
If the key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional immediately with all remaining keys that was provided
with your vehicle.
39
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Smart entry & start system
: If equipped
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the
electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.
(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)
Locks and unlocks the
doors (P. 41)
Starts the engine (P. 239)
40
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Locks and unlocks the back
door (P. 4 2 )
Opens the glass hatch
(vehicles with a glass hatch)
(P. 43)
41
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Unlocking and locking the doors (front door handles only)
Grip the handle to unlock the
doors.
Make sure to touch the sensor on
the back of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked for
3 seconds after the doors are
locked.
Touch the lock sensor (the
indentation on the upper or lower
part of the door handle) to lock
the doors.
42
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Unlocking and locking the back door
Vehicles with back door mounted spare tire
Locks the all doors
Unlocks the all doors
The doors cannot be unlocked for
3 seconds after the doors are
locked.
Vehicles without back door mounted spare tire
Locks the all doors
Unlocks the all doors
The doors cannot be unlocked for
3 seconds after the doors are
locked.
43
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Opening the glass hatch
Press the button to open the
glass hatch. The glass hatch will
pop up.
The glass hatch can be opened
only when the back door is
closed.
Antenna location and effective range
Antenna location
Antennas outside cabin
Antennas inside cabin
Antenna outside luggage com-
partment
44
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is
detected)
When locking or unlocking
the doors
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 0.7 m (2.3 ft.) of
either of the outside front
door handle.
When starting the engine
or changing “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
modes
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
inside the vehicle.
Vehicles for U.K.: The sys-
tem may not operate when
the back door or the glass
hatch are open, even if the
electronic key is in the rear of
the vehicle.
When opening the glass
hatch (if equipped) and
locking or unlocking the
back door.
This system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 0.7 m (2.3 ft.) of
the back door handle.
45
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Operation signals
A buzzer
* sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the
doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)
*:For Kazakhstan, Azerbaijan and Georgia
When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the upper part
of the door handle
Touch both lock sensors on the upper and
lower part of the door handle simultane-
ously.
46
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Alarms and warning indicators
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning lights and
warning messages shown on the multi-information display is used to prevent
theft of the vehicle and accidents resulting from erroneous operation.
When any warning lights come on
Take appropriate measures depending on which warning light comes on.
(P. 712)
When a warning message is shown on the multi-information display
Take appropriate measures in response to the warning message on the
multi-information display. (P. 730)
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Interior alarm
pings once and
exterior alarm
sounds once for
5 seconds
*
1
An attempt was made to
lock the doors using the
entry function while the
electronic key was still
inside the passenger com-
partment
Retrieve the elec-
tronic key from the
passenger compart-
ment and lock the
doors again
An attempt was made to
exit the vehicle and lock
the doors without first turn-
ing the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF
Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and lock the
doors again
Exterior alarm
sounds once for
5 seconds
An attempt was made to
lock the vehicle while a
door is open
Close all of the doors
and lock the doors
again
An attempt was made to
close the glass hatch while
the electronic key was still
inside the passenger com-
partment
Open the glass hatch
again and retrieve the
electronic key from
the passenger com-
partment
47
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Interior alarm
pings continu-
ously
The “ENGINE START
STOP” switch was turned
to ACCESSORY mode
while the driver’s door was
open (or the driver’s door
was opened while the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch was in ACCES-
SORY mode)
Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and close the
driver’s door
Interior alarm
sounds continu-
ously
*
1
When the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is in
IGNITION ON or ACCES-
SORY mode, an attempt
was made to open the
door and exit the vehicle,
and the shift lever was not
in “P”
Shift the shift lever to
“P” and turn the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF
Interior and exte-
rior alarms sound
continuously
*
1
When the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is in
IGNITION ON or ACCES-
SORY mode, the driver’s
door was closed after the
key was carried outside
the vehicle, and the shift
lever not in “P”
Shift the shift lever to
“P”, turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and close the
driver’s door again
48
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
*
1
: A message will be shown on the multi-information display in the instru-
ment cluster.
*
2
: If the engine does not start when the electronic key is inside the vehicle,
the electronic key battery may be depleted or there may be difficulties
receiving signal from the key. (P. 792)
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Interior alarm
pings once
*
1
The electronic key has a
low battery
Replace the electronic
key battery
An attempt was made to
start the engine without the
electronic key being pres-
ent, or the electronic key
was not functioning nor-
mally
Start the engine with
the electronic key
present
*
2
Interior alarm
pings once and
exterior alarm
sounds 3 times
*
1
The driver’s door was
closed after the key was
carried outside the vehicle,
and the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch was not
turned OFF
Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and close the
driver’s door again
An occupant carried the
electronic key outside the
vehicle and closed the
door while the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch was
not OFF
Bring the electronic
key back into the vehi-
cle
49
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 30 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
Switching the door unlock function
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
Cancel the intrusion sensor and tilt sensor of the alarm system to
prevent unintended triggering of the alarm during the setting
change. (P. 162)
When the indicator on the key surface is turned off, press and hold
or (if equipped) for approximately 5 seconds while press-
ing on the key.
The setting changes each time an operation is preformed, as shown below.
(When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at
least 5 seconds, and repeat .)
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
3
50
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Vehicles with alarm system: Unlock the doors using the wireless
remote control and open one of the doors.
If a door is not opened within 30 seconds after is pressed,
the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be
set. In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm.
(P. 160)
Multi-information
display
Unlocking function Beep
(Left-hand drive
vehicles)
(Right-hand drive
vehicles)
Hold the driver’s door han-
dle to unlock only the
driver’s door.
Exterior: Beeps three
times
Interior: Pings once
Hold the front passenger’s
door handle to unlock all
doors.
Hold either door handle to
unlock all doors.
Exterior: Beeps twice
Interior: Pings once
STEP
4
51
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Battery-saving function
In the following circumstances, the entry function is disabled in order to pre-
vent the vehicle battery from discharging and the electronic key battery from
depleting.
When the entry function has not been used for 5 days or more
When the electronic key has been left within approximately 2 m (6 ft.) of
the vehicle for 10 minutes or more
If the entry function has not been used for 14 days or more, the vehicle
cannot be unlocked by a door other than the driver’s door. To unlock the
vehicle, grip the driver’s door handle or use the wireless remote control
or the mechanical key.
The system will resume operation when:
The vehicle is locked using the lock sensor when carrying the electronic
key on your person.
The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control.
(P. 66)
The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the mechanical key. (P. 791)
Conditions affecting operation
The smart entry & start system uses weak radio waves. In the following situ-
ations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may
be affected, preventing the smart entry & start system, wireless remote con-
trol and immobilizer system from operating properly.
(Ways of coping: P. 791)
52
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
When the electronic key battery is depleted
Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large dis-
play, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electri-
cal noise
When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other
wireless communication devices
When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following
metallic objects
Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
Metallic wallets or bags
Coins
Hand warmers made of metal
Media such as CDs and DVDs
When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity
When another wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby
When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that
emit radio waves
Another vehicle’s electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio
waves
Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
Digital audio players
Portable game systems
If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to
the rear window
53
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Note for the entry function
Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection
areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases:
The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle,
near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or
unlocked.
The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to
the rear bumper center when the glass hatch is opened.
The electronic key is on the instrument panel, luggage cover or floor, or
in the glove box.
Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the
door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave
reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin
and the door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the
electronic key inside the vehicle.
As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may
be locked or unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the
electronic key can be used to unlock the vehicle.
The doors may lock or unlock if the electronic key is within the effective
range and a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as
in the rain or in a car wash. The doors will automatically be locked after
approximately 30 seconds if a door is not opened and closed.
If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the elec-
tronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not
be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to
unlock the doors.)
54
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Note for locking the doors
Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent
lock operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor again.
If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the
effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. Place the key
in a position 2 m (6 ft.) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehi-
cle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet
during a car wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information
display and a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm,
lock all the doors.
The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice,
snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again, or
use the lock sensor on the lower part of the door handle.
Fingernails may scrape against the door during operation of the door
handle.
Be careful not to injure fingernails or damage the surface of the door.
55
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Note for the unlocking function
Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the
doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the
original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door
handle again.
If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly
longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.
When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 2 m
(6 ft.) of the vehicle.
The smart entry & start system can be deactivated in advance. (P. 849)
To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get
the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from
the outside of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the
key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly.
(The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not func-
tion.)
If the smart entry & start system does not operate properly
Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 791)
Starting the engine: P. 792
56
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Electronic key battery depletion
The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the
engine stops. (P. 46)
As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will
become depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following
symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted.
Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 656)
The smart entry & start system or the wireless remote control does not
operate.
The detection area becomes smaller.
The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.
To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 1 m
(3 ft.) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
•TVs
Personal computers
Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
Induction cookers
Table lamps
When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 656
Customization
Settings (e.g. smart entry & start system) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 849)
57
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Certification for the smart entry & start system
Hereby, Toyota Motor Corporation, declares that this TMLF8-15 is in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant pro-
visions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
58
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
59
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
60
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Hereby, Tokai Rika Co., Ltd., declares that this Electronic Key,
model B74EA, is in compliance with the essential requirements and
other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
61
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Hereby, Tokai Rika Co., Ltd., declares that this Tuner, model
B72UA, is in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
62
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Hereby, Toyota Motor Corporation, declares that this TMIMB-2 is in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant pro-
visions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
63
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
64
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
65
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should main-
tain a reasonable distance between themselves and the smart entry &
start system antennas. (P. 44)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary,
the entry function can be disabled. Ask any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional for details,
such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio
waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry
function.
User of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers
and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the
device for information about its operation under the influence of radio
waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such
medical devices.
Ask any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional for details on disabling the entry function.
66
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Wireless remote control
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehi-
cle.
Vehicles with wireless remote control transmitter
Locks all the doors
Closes the windows and
moon roof (press and hold)
*
Unlocks all the doors
Opens the windows and
moon roof (press and hold)
*
Opens the glass hatch
(press and hold)
The glass hatch can be
opened only when the back
door is closed.
*: This setting must be cus-
tomized at any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
67
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system (type A)
Locks all the doors
Closes the windows and
moon roof (press and hold)
*
Unlocks all the doors
Opens the windows and
moon roof (press and hold)
*
*
: This setting must be cus-
tomized at any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system (type B)
Locks all the doors
Closes the windows and
moon roof (press and hold)
*
Unlocks all the doors
Opens the windows and
moon roof (press and hold)
*
Opens the glass hatch
(press and hold)
The glass hatch can be
opened only when the back
door is closed.
*: This setting must be cus-
tomized at any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
68
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
Locks all the doors
Closes the windows and
moon roof (press and hold)
*
Unlocks all the doors
Opens the windows and
moon roof (press and hold)
*
Opens the glass hatch
(press and hold) (vehicles
with a glass hatch)
The glass hatch can be
opened only when the back
door is closed.
*: This setting must be cus-
tomized at any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
69
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Operation signals
Doors: A buzzer
* sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that
the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
Windows and moon roof: A buzzer
* sounds to indicate that the windows and
moon roof are operating.
Glass hatch: A buzzer
* sounds once to indicate that the glass hatch have
been opened.
*: For Ukraine (2TR-FE engines), Kazakhstan, Azerbaijan and Georgia
Door lock buzzer
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a
buzzer sounds continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close the door to stop the
buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.
Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 30 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
Alarm (if equipped)
Using the wireless remote control to lock the doors will set the alarm system.
(P. 160)
70
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Conditions affecting operation
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the follow-
ing situations:
Near a TV tower, radio station, electric power plant, airport or other facil-
ity that generates strong radio waves
When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless commu-
nication device
When multiple wireless keys are in the vicinity
When the wireless key is in contact with, or is covered by a metallic
object
When a wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby
When the wireless key has been left near an electrical appliance such as
a personal computer
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
P. 5 1
If the wireless remote control does not operate properly (vehicles with
a smart entry & start system)
Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 791)
71
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Key battery depletion
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
If the wireless remote control function does not operate, the battery may be
depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 656)
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
P. 5 6
When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 656
Customization
Settings (e.g. wireless remote control system) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 849)
Certification for wireless remote control
Hereby, DENSO CORPORATION declares that this 12BBY/13BDD is in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of
Directive 1999/5/EC.
72
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Hereby, Tokai Rika Co., Ltd., declares that this Electronic Key,
model B74EA, is in compliance with the essential requirements and
other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
73
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When closing the windows or moon roof using wireless remote control
Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught when a window or moon roof is
being operated.
To prevent inadvertent power windows and moon roof operation, never let
a small child have and use the wireless remote control.
Jam protection function
Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection
function intentionally.
The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the window or moon roof fully closes.
74
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Side doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function,
wireless remote control, key or door lock switch.
Entry function (if equipped)
P. 4 1
Wireless remote control
P. 6 6
Key
Turning the key operates the doors as follows:
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
Locks all the doors
Closes the windows and
moon roof (turn and hold)
*
Unlocks all the doors
Open the windows and
moon roof (turn and hold)
*
*
: This setting must be cus-
tomized at any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical
key. (P. 791)
75
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Door lock switch
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors
Inside lock button
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
The driver’s door and front
passenger’s door
* can be
opened by pulling the inside
handle even if the lock button
is in the lock position.
*:Except for Ukraine (2TR-FE
engines), Kazakhstan, Azer-
baijan and Georgia
76
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Locking the front door from the outside without a key
Move the inside lock button to the lock position.
Close the door.
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The door cannot be locked if the key is in the engine switch.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The door cannot be locked if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left
inside the vehicle.
The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.
Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the lock
is set.
Unlock
Lock
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear
doors.
STEP
1
STEP
2
77
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems (if equipped)
The following functions can be set or canceled:
*
1
: GRJ150L-GKAEKW, KDJ150R-GKAEYW, KDJ150L-GKAEYW,
KDJ155R-GJAEYW and KDJ155L-GJAEYW models
*
3
*
2
: KDJ150R-GKFEYW, KDJ150L-GKFEYW, KDJ155R-GJFEYW and
KDJ155L-GJFEYW models
*
3
*
3
: The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label. (P. 815)
Function Operation
Shift position linked
door locking function
*
1
Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all the
doors.
Shift position linked
door unlocking
function
*
1
Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all the
doors.
Speed linked door
locking function
*
1, 2
All the doors are locked when the vehicle
speed is approximately 20 km/h (12 mph) or
higher.
Driver’s door linked
door unlocking
function
*
1, 2
All the doors are unlocked when the driver’s
door is opened within 43 seconds after turn-
ing the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
78
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Setting and canceling the functions
To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure
below.
Close all the doors and turn the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch to IGNITION ON mode. (Perform step 2 within 20 sec-
onds.)
Shift the shift lever to P or N, and
press and hold the drivers door
lock switch ( or ) for
approximately 5 seconds and
then release.
The shift lever and switch posi-
tions corresponding to the
desired function to be set are
shown in the following table.
Use the same procedure to can-
cel the function.
STEP
1
STEP
2
79
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
*
1
: GRJ150L-GKAEKW, KDJ150R-GKAEYW, KDJ150L-GKAEYW,
KDJ155R-GJAEYW and KDJ155L-GJAEYW models
*
3
*
2
: KDJ150R-GKFEYW, KDJ150L-GKFEYW, KDJ155R-GJFEYW and
KDJ155L-GJFEYW models
*
3
*
3
: The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label. (P. 815)
When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all the doors are
locked and then unlocked.
Function
Shift lever
position
Driver’s door lock
switch position
Shift position linked door
locking function
*
1
P
Shift position linked door
unlocking function
*
1
Speed linked door locking
function
*
1, 2
N
Driver’s door linked door
unlocking function
*
1, 2
80
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Impact detection door lock release system (if equipped)
In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are
unlocked. Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, how-
ever, the system may not operate.
Using the mechanical key (vehicles with a smart entry & start system)
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key.
(P. 791)
Customization
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 849)
CAUTION
To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out,
resulting in death or serious injury.
Always use a seat belt.
Ensure that all the doors are properly closed.
Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehi-
cle and it may result in death or serious injury.
Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even
if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.
Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the sec-
ond seat.
81
1
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Back door
The back door can be locked/unlocked and opened the following
procedures.
Locking and unlocking the back door
Entry function (if equipped)
P. 4 2
Wireless remote control
P. 6 6
Door lock switch
P. 7 5
Inside lock button (vehicles with longitudinal type third seats)
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
82
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Opening the back door from outside the vehicle
Vehicles with back door mounted spare tire
Pull the handle
Open the back door
The back door can be kept
open at a desired position.
Vehicles without back door mounted spare tire
Pull the handle
Open the back door
The back door can be kept
open at a desired position.
Keeping the back door open
Unlocks the back door stop-
per
Locks the back door stop-
per
The back door stopper can
only be operated when the
back door is fully open.
When closing the back door,
check that the back door stop-
per is unlocked.
STEP
1
83
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Back door child-protector lock (vehicles with longitudinal type
third seats)
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the lock
is set.
Unlock
Lock
This lock can be set to prevent
children from opening the back
door. Push down on back door
switch to lock back door.
Rear step bumper
The rear step bumper is for rear
end protection and easier step-
up loading.
84
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
While driving
Keep the back door closed while driving.
If the back door is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or lug-
gage may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a seri-
ous health hazard. Make sure to close the back door before driving.
Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the back door is fully closed. If
the back door is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving,
causing an accident.
Never let anyone sit in the luggage compartment. In the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or a collision, they are susceptible to death or
serious injury.
When children are in the vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
Do not leave children alone in the luggage compartment.
If a child is accidentally locked in the luggage compartment, they could
have heat exhaustion.
Do not allow a child to open or close the back door.
Doing so may cause the back door to operate unexpectedly, or cause the
child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing back door.
85
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Operating the back door
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in seri-
ous injury.
When opening or closing the back door, thoroughly check to make sure
the surrounding area is safe.
If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that
the back door is about to open or close.
Use caution when opening or closing the back door in windy weather as it
may move abruptly in strong wind.
The back door may close if the back
door stopper is not locked (specifically,
when using the luggage compartment
with the back door kept open at your
desired position). It is more difficult to
open or close the back door on an
incline than on a level surface, so
beware of the back door unexpectedly
opening or closing by itself. Make sure
that the back door stopper is locked
and secure when using the luggage
compartment.
86
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Operating the back door
Do not pull on the back door damper stay to close the back door, and do
not hang on the back door damper stay.
Doing so may cause hands to be caught or the back door damper stay to
break, causing an accident.
Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the back
door. Such additional weight on the back door may cause the back door to
fall closed again after it is opened.
When closing the back door, take extra
care to prevent your fingers etc. from
being caught.
When closing the back door, make sure
to press it lightly on its outer surface. If
the back door handle is used to fully
close the back door, it may result in
hands or arms being caught.
87
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
NOTICE
Back door damper stay
The back door is equipped with damper stay that hold the back door in
place.
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the back door damper stay, resulting
in malfunction.
Do not attach any accessories other
than genuine Toyota parts to the back
door.
Do not lean against, climb on or place
luggage on the damper stay, or apply
lateral forces to it.
Damper stay
88
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Glass hatch
: If equipped
The glass hatch can be opened using the glass hatch opener or wire-
less remote control.
Entry function (vehicles with a smart entry & start system)
P. 4 3
Wireless remote control
P. 6 6
Glass hatch opener
Press the button to pop up
the glass hatch.
Raise
The glass hatch can be
opened only when the back
door is closed.
The glass hatch cannot be
opened when the back door is
locked. Unlock the back door
to open the glass hatch.
(P. 81)
89
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
When opening the glass hatch
Open the glass hatch slowly and carefully.
Use the glass hatch opener when the back door is closed.
Opening the glass hatch while the rear window wiper is in operation
Rear window wiper operation will stop moving. Operation will recommence
after the glass hatch has been closed.
Function to prevent the glass hatch being locked with the electronic
key inside (vehicles with a smart entry & start system)
When all doors are being locked, closing the glass hatch with the elec-
tronic key left inside the luggage compartment will sound an alarm.
In this case, the glass hatch can be opened using the entry function.
Even when the spare electronic key is put in the luggage compartment
with all the doors locked, the key confinement prevention function can be
activated so the glass hatch can be opened. In order to prevent theft,
take all electronic keys with you when leaving the vehicle.
Even when the electronic key is put in the luggage compartment with all
the doors are locked, the key may not be detected depending on the
places and the surrounding radio wave conditions. In this case, the key
confinement prevention function cannot be activated, causing the doors
to lock when the glass hatch is closed. Make sure to check where the key
is before closing the glass hatch.
After closing the glass hatch
Check that the glass hatch is firmly closed. If it is not firmly closed, the rear
window wiper and washer will not operate correctly.
90
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
While driving
Keep the glass hatch closed while driving.
If the glass hatch is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or
luggage may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a seri-
ous health hazard. Make sure to close the glass hatch before driving.
Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the glass hatch is fully closed. If
the glass hatch is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving,
causing an accident.
When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow a child to open or close the glass hatch.
Doing so may cause the glass hatch to operate unexpectedly, or cause the
child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing glass hatch.
Operating the glass hatch
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in seri-
ous injury.
Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the glass hatch
before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the glass hatch fall closed
again after it is opened.
When opening or closing the glass hatch, thoroughly check to make sure
the surrounding area is safe.
If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that
the glass hatch is about to open or close.
Use caution when opening or closing the glass hatch in windy weather as
it may move abruptly in strong wind.
91
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Operating the glass hatch
Do not pull on the glass hatch damper stay to close the glass hatch, and
do not hang on the glass hatch damper stay.
Doing so may cause hands to be caught or the glass hatch damper stay to
break, causing an accident.
Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the
glass hatch. Such additional weight on the glass hatch may cause the
glass hatch to fall closed again after it is opened.
The glass hatch may fall if it is not
opened fully. It is more difficult to open
or close the glass hatch on an incline
than on a level surface, so beware of
the glass hatch unexpectedly opening
or closing by itself. Make sure that the
glass hatch is fully open and secure
when using the luggage compartment.
When closing the glass hatch, take
extra care to prevent your fingers etc.
from being caught.
When closing the glass hatch, make
sure to press it lightly on its outer sur-
face.
92
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
NOTICE
Glass hatch damper stays
The glass hatch is equipped with damper stays that hold the glass hatch in
place.
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the glass hatch damper stay, result-
ing in malfunction.
Do not attach any foreign objects, such
as strikers, plastic sheets, or adhesives
to the damper stay rod.
Do not touch the damper stay rod with
gloves or other fabric items.
Do not attach any accessories other
than genuine Toyota parts to the glass
hatch.
Do not place your hand or foot on the
damper stay or apply lateral forces to it.
Damper stays
93
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats
Manual seat
Seat position adjustment
lever
Seatback angle adjustment
lever
Vertical height adjustment
lever (driver’s side only)
Lumbar support adjustment
switch (drivers side only)
94
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Active head restraints
When the occupant’s lower back
presses against the seatback
during a rear-end collision, the
head restraint moves slightly for-
ward and upward to help reduce
the risk of whiplash on the seat
occupant.
Power seat
Seat position adjustment
switch
Seatback angle adjustment
switch
Seat cushion (front) angle
adjustment switch (driver’s
side only)
Vertical height adjustment
switch (drivers side only)
Lumber support adjustment
switch (drivers side only)
95
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Moving a front passenger’s seat for second seat access (3-door
models)
Getting in the vehicle
Pull the seatback angle adjust-
ment lever and fold down the
seatback. The seat will slide for-
ward.
Move the seat to the front-most
position
Getting out of the vehicle
Depress the release pedal and
fold down the seatback. The seat
will slide forward.
Move the seat to the front-most
position
Make sure that no passenger is
seated on the front passenger
seat before depressing the
release pedal.
After passengers have entered/exited the vehicle
Lift up the seatback and slide the seat backward until it locks.
96
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Active head restraints
Even small forces applied to the seatback may cause the head restraint to
move. Pushing up a locked head restraint forcibly may appear the head
restraint inner structure. These do not indicate problems.
CAUTION
Seat adjustment
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not
recline the seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply
restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the
shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of
an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpect-
edly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position.
(manual seat only)
During
rear-end
collision
Inner
structure
97
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Rear seats
: If equipped
Second seats (3-door models)
Seatback angle adjustment
lever
Second seats (5-door models without third seats and vehicles
with longitudinal type seats)
Seatback angle adjustment
lever
Second seats (5-door models with third manual/power seats)
Seatback angle adjustment
lever
Seat position adjustment
lever
98
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Third seats (longitudinal type seat)
Third seats (manual seat)
Third seats (power seat)
Seatback angle adjustment
switch
99
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Moving a second seat for third seat access (5-door models with
third manual/power seats)
Getting in the vehicle (right side only [left-hand drive vehicles]
or left side only [right-hand drive vehicles])
Pull the seatback angle adjust-
ment lever and fold down the
seatback. The seat will slide for-
ward.
Move the seat to the front-most
position
Getting out of the vehicle
Pull the release lever and fold
down the seatback. The seat will
slide forward.
Move the seat to the front-most
position
Make sure that no passenger is
seated on the second seat before
pulling the release lever.
After passengers have entered/exited the vehicle
Lift up the seatback and slide the seat backward until it locks.
100
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Tumbling the second seats (3-door models)
Before tumbling the second seats
Lower the head restraints to the
lowest position.
Use the seat belt hangers to pre-
vent the belts from being tan-
gled.
101
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Tumbling the second seats
Pull the seatback angle lever
and fold them down.
Pull the seat lock release lever
on the back and swing the whole
seat up and forward.
Returning the second seats
Push the knob to unlock the
seat, swing the whole seat down
and swing the seatback up.
STEP
1
STEP
2
102
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Folding down the second seatbacks (5-door models without
third seats and vehicles with longitudinal type seats)
Before folding down the second seatbacks
Stow the center seat belt buckle
with the hook-and-loop fastener
and lower the head restraints to
the lowest position.
Folding down second seatbacks
Swing the bottom cushion up by
pulling the lock release strap.
Push the seatback lock release
button and fold them down.
To return the second seatbacks to
their original positions, lift them
up until they lock.
STEP
1
STEP
2
103
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Folding down the second seatbacks (5-door models with third
manual/power seats)
Before folding down the second seatbacks
Lower the head restraints to the
lowest position.
Folding down second seatbacks
Pull the seatback lock release
lever and fold them down.
To return the second seatbacks to
their original positions, lift them
up until they lock.
104
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Folding down second center seatback only (5-door models)
If you cannot raise the second seatback
Pull the center seatback lock release
lever behind the seatback and fold it
down.
To return the center seatback to its origi-
nal position, lift it up until it locks.
Release the seat belt lock by:
Pushing on the lower front edge of the
seatback to slacken the seat belt.
Let the seat belt retract a little.
105
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Fold down the third seats (longitudinal type seat)
Folding the third seats
Swing the seat cushion fully up.
Take the holding strap of its
pocket on the back of the seat-
back and secure the seat hook-
ing the strap onto the hook in the
back of the seat cushion.
Returning the third seats
Reverse the steps above.
STEP
1
STEP
2
106
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Folding down the third seats (manual seat)
Before folding down the third seats
Lower the head restraints to the
lowest position.
Use the seat belt hangers to pre-
vent the belts from being tan-
gled.
107
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Folding down the third seats
From back door side
Pull the seat cushion/seatback
lock release lever and fold seat-
back down.
The seat cushion is stowed auto-
matically.
From rear door side
Pull the seat cushion lock
release lever.
The seat cushion is stowed auto-
matically.
Pull the seatback lock release
lever and fold them down.
STEP
1
ITN13M096
STEP
2
108
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Returning the third seats
While inside the vehicle, unlock
the seatbacks by pulling the lock
release lever, and lift them up
until they lock.
Pull the grip and carry the seat
cushions out.
STEP
1
STEP
2
109
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Folding down the third seats (power seat)
Left-hand drive vehicles
R: Right seat return switch
R: Right seat fold switch
L: Left seat return switch
L: Left seat fold switch
The switches can be operated
from both the rear door side and
the back door side.
Right-hand drive vehicles
R: Right seat return switch
R: Right seat fold switch
L: Left seat return switch
L: Left seat fold switch
The switches can be operated
from both the rear door side and
the back door side.
110
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Before folding down the third seats
Use the seat belt hangers to pre-
vent the belts from being tan-
gled.
Folding down the third seats
Press and hold . Two
beeps sound and the seatback
will rise.
When operating is completed,
two beeps sound again.
Press and hold again.
Two beeps sound, the head
restraints will fold forward, and
the seat will be stowed.
When operating is completed,
two beeps sound again.
ITN13M132
STEP
1
ITN13M134
STEP
2
111
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Returning the third seats
Press and hold . Two
beeps sound and seatback and
seat cushion begin to move.
When operating is completed,
two beeps sound again.
Lift the head restraints up until
they lock.
STEP
1
STEP
2
The third power seats can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is off.
The shift lever is in P position (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
or the parking brake is applied (vehicles with a manual transmission) with
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in IGNITION ON mode.
During third power seat stowing operation
Do not remove your hand from the switch until the operation stops automati-
cally. If you remove your hand from the switch, the operation will stop and
the buzzer will sound continuously. The buzzer will stop when the switch is
pressed again.
112
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Enlarging the luggage compartment (vehicles with third power seats)
The third seat can be used for sitting when it is in the position shown in
of the folding down the third seats. (P. 109)
This can be convenient for enlarging the luggage compartment, for instance
when the luggage is against the back of the seatback.
If the warning buzzer sounds continuously (vehicles with third power
seats)
If there is an abnormality in the system, the warning buzzer will sound con-
tinuously while the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON
mode. In this case, perform the following operations:
Press and hold to return the seat.
Press and hold to stow the seat.
For each step, wait until the seat movement stops automatically and the two
beeps sound twice before removing your hand from the switch.
If the warning buzzer does not stop even after performing the above proce-
dure correctly, perform the following operations:
Press and hold on the rear door side.
While holding , press forward on 5 times within 10 sec-
onds and keep holding until 3 beeps sound. The beep will
then sound continuously again.
Repeat and .
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
1
STEP
2
113
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When folding the seatbacks down
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
Do not fold the seatbacks down while driving.
Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift
lever to P (automatic transmission) or 1 (manual transmission).
Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the luggage compart-
ment while driving.
Do not allow children to enter the luggage compartment.
Seat adjustment
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not
recline the seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply
restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the
shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of
an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpect-
edly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Be careful not to get hands or feet pinched between the rear console box
and the second seat when folding down the rear seatback.
114
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When stowing the third seats
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
Check that there is no luggage and that there are no other people around
the seat before stowing operation.
Conduct the procedure slowly and carefully (vehicles with manual third
seats).
Do not insert hands or feet into the moving parts of the seat.
Do not allow children to operate the seat.
Do not use the seat if only the seat cushion has been stowed (vehicles
with manual third seats).
After returning the seatbacks to the upright position
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pushing it forward and rear-
ward on the top.
Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.
NOTICE
When returning the third seat (vehicles with a luggage cover)
If the luggage cover is installed in the luggage compartment, make sure you
remove it before returning the third seat. (P. 603) The luggage cover may
be damaged by the seat.
115
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Driving position memory (driver’s seat)
: If equipped
Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver’s seat and
steering wheel) can be memorized and recalled with the touch of a
button. It is also possible to set this function to activate automati-
cally when the drivers door is unlocked. (vehicles with a smart entry
& start system)
Two different driving positions can be entered into memory.
Entering a position to memory
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Check that the shift lever is in P.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
Check that the parking brake is set.
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
Turn the engine switch to the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
Adjust the driver’s seat and steering wheel to the desired
positions.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
116
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
While pressing the “SET” but-
ton, or within 3 seconds after
the “SET” button is pressed,
press button 1 or 2 until the
signal beeps.
If the selected button has
already been preset, the previ-
ously recorded position will be
overwritten.
Recalling the memorized position
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Check that the shift lever is in P.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
Check that the parking brake is set.
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
Turn the engine switch to the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
Press button 1 or 2 to recall
the desired position.
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
117
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation
(vehicles with a smart entry & start system)
Record your driving position to button 1 or 2 before performing the
following:
Carry only the key to which you want to link the driving position. If 2 or
more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be linked
properly.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch IGNITION ON mode
and close the driver’s door.
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Check that the shift lever is in P.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
Check that the parking brake is set.
While pressing the desired but-
ton (1 or 2), press the driver’s
door lock switches (either lock or
unlock) until the signal beeps.
The driving position is recalled
when the driver’s door is
unlocked using the entry function
or wireless remote control and the
driver’s door is opened.
STEP
1
STEP
2
118
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Operating the driving position memory after turning the engine off
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
Memorized positions (except the steering wheel position) can be activated
up to 180 seconds after the driver’s door is opened and another 60 seconds
after it is closed again, even if the key is removed from the engine switch.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
Memorized positions (except the steering wheel position) can be activated
up to 180 seconds after the driver’s door is opened and another 60 seconds
after it is closed again, even after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
off.
Canceling the linked door unlock operation
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch IGNITION ON mode and
close the driver’s door.
While pressing “SET” button, press driver’s door lock switches
(either lock or unlock) until the signal beeps.
Stopping seat position operation part-way through
Perform any of the following operations:
Press the “SET” button.
Press button 1 or 2.
Adjust the seat using the switches (only cancels seat position recall).
CAUTION
Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear
passenger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.
STEP
1
STEP
2
119
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Head restraints
Front, second and third manual seats (if equipped)
Vertical adjustment
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down
while pushing the lock release
button.
Third power seats (if equipped)
To fo l d
Pull the lock release strap to
fold the head restraint.
To return the head restraints,
lift them up until they lock.
Lock
release
button
120
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Removing the head restraints (front, second and third manual seats)
Adjusting the height of the head restraints
Using the second center, second outer (5-door models without third
seats and vehicles with longitudinal type seats) and third manual seat
head restraints.
Pull the head restraint up while pressing
the lock release button.
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
Always raise the head restraint one level
from the stowed position when using.
121
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Using the third power seats
Always lift the head restraints up until they lock when using.
Installing the head restraints
Align the head restraint with the installation holes.
Push down the head restraint to the lock position.
CAUTION
Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to
do so may result in death or serious injury.
Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure
they are locked in position.
Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
122
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driv-
ing the vehicle.
Correct use of the seat belts
Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not
come into contact with the
neck or slide off the shoul-
der.
Position the lap belt as low
as possible over the hips.
Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight
and well back in the seat.
Do not twist the seat belt.
123
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Fastening and releasing the seat belt
To fasten the seat belt, push
the plate into the buckle
until a click sound is heard.
To release the seat belt,
press the release button.
Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front and
outer second [5-door models] seats)
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor down while pressing
the release button.
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor up.
Move the height adjuster up
and down as needed until you
hear a click.
Release button
124
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat
belt to quickly restrain the occu-
pant by retracting the seat belt
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal
collision or side collision (vehi-
cles with SRS side airbags and
curtain shield airbags).
The pretensioner may not acti-
vate in the event of a minor frontal
or side impact, or a rear impact.
Pre-crash seat belts (front seats of vehicles with pre-crash safety
system)
If the pre-crash sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the pre-
crash safety system will retract the seat belt, thus enhancing the
effectiveness of the seat belt pretensioner in a crash.
The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or loses
control of the vehicle. (P. 380)
125
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend so that you can move around fully.
Automatic locking retractor (ALR) (if equipped)
When an outer second seat passenger’s shoulder belt is completely
extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position
and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint sys-
tem (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the
belt out once more. (P. 197)
Pregnant women
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat
belt in the proper way. (P. 122)
Women who are pregnant should position
the lap belt as low as possible over the
hips in the same manner as other occu-
pants. Extend the shoulder belt com-
pletely over the shoulder and position the
belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact
over the rounding of the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not
only the pregnant woman, but also the
fetus could suffer death or serious injury
as a result of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or a collision.
126
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P. 122)
Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult
size.
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 185)
When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s
seat belt, follow the instructions on P. 122 regarding seat belt usage.
Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate
for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent colli-
sions.
Seat belt regulations
If seat belt regulations exist in the country where you reside, please contact
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional for seat belt replacement or installation.
127
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
Wearing a seat belt
Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
Always wear a seat belt properly.
Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt
for more than one person at once, including children.
Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always
use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than
necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting
up straight and well back in the seats.
Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your
shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off
your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an
accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop,
sudden swerve or accident. (P. 123)
Seat belt pretensioners
If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that
case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional.
128
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
Seat belt damage and wear
Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be
jammed in the door.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat
belt cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional.
Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been
involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the
seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional. Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it
from operating properly, resulting in death or serious injury.
129
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Steering wheel
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.
Manual adjustment
Hold the steering wheel and
pull the lever down.
Adjust to the ideal position by
moving the steering wheel
horizontally and vertically.
After adjustment, pull the lever
up to secure the steering
wheel.
STEP
1
STEP
2
130
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Auto tilt away (power adjustment type)
When the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned off, the
steering wheel returns to its
stowed position by moving up
and away to enable easier driver
entry and exit.
Turning the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch to ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode will return
the steering wheel to the original
position.
Power adjustment
Operating the switch moves the steering wheel in the following
directions:
Up
Down
Away from the driver
Toward the driver
131
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
The power adjustment type steering wheel can be adjusted when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode
*.
*: If the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the steering wheel can be adjusted
regardless of “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode.
Automatic adjustment of the steering position
A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automat-
ically by the driving position memory system. (P. 115)
CAUTION
Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury.
After adjusting the steering wheel (manual adjustment type)
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an
accident, and resulting in death or serious injury.
132
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Inside rear view mirror
Glare from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by
using the following functions.
Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Normal position
Anti-glare position
Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror
In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of
vehicles behind and the reflected light is automatically reduced.
Turns automatic mode on/off
The indicator comes on when
automatic mode is turned on.
The mirror will revert to the
automatic mode each time the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch is turned to IGNITION
ON mode.
Indicator
133
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
Adjust the height of the rear view
mirror by moving it up and down.
To prevent sensor error (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view
mirror)
CAUTION
Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
To ensure that the sensors operate prop-
erly, do not touch or cover them.
134
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Outside rear view mirrors
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch.
To select a mirror to adjust,
press the switch.
Left
Right
To adjust the mirror, press the
switch.
Up
Right
Down
Left
STEP
1
STEP
2
135
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Folding the mirrors
Manual type
Push the mirror back in the direc-
tion of the vehicle’s rear.
Auto type
Press the switch to fold the mir-
rors.
Press it again to extend them to
the original position.
Mirror angle can be adjusted when
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with mirror defoggers)
Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (P. 444)
136
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When driving the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury.
Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly
adjusted before driving.
When a mirror is moving
To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your
hand caught by the moving mirror.
When the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with mirror defog-
gers)
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and
burn you.
NOTICE
If ice should jam the mirror
Do not operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de-icer to
free the mirror.
137
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows
Window lock switch
Press the switch down to lock
the passenger window switches.
Use this switch to prevent chil-
dren from accidentally opening or
closing a passenger window.
The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.
Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:
Closing
One-touch closing
*
Opening
One-touch opening
*
*
: To stop the window partway,
operate the switch in the oppo-
site direction.
138
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
The power windows can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Operating the power windows after turning the engine off
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even
after the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. They can-
not, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even
after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or
turned off. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is
opened.
Jam protection function
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame,
window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
139
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
When the power window does not close normally
If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot
be closed, perform the following operations using the power window switch
on the relevant door.
After stopping the vehicle, the window can be closed by holding the
power window switch in the one-touch closing position while the engine
switch is in the “ON” position. (vehicles without a smart entry & start sys-
tem), the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON
mode (vehicles with a smart entry & start system).
If the window still cannot be closed even by carrying out the operation
explained above, initialize the function by performing the following proce-
dure.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position.
Continue holding the switch for a further 6 seconds after the win-
dow has closed.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position.
Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the win-
dow has opened completely.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position
once again. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds
after the window has closed.
If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the
beginning. If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even
after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected
by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
140
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Door lock linked window operation
The power windows can be opened and closed using the wireless remote
control or key if customized at any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional. (P. 66, 74)
Customization
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 849)
CAUTION
Closing the windows
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
Do not allow children to operate the power windows.
Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in
some instances, even death.
Jam protection function
Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection
function.
The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the window fully closes.
141
1
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Moon roof
: If equipped
Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt
it up and down.
Opening and closing
Opens the moon roof
*
The moon roof stops slightly
before the fully open position
to reduce wind noise.
Press the switch again to fully
open the moon roof.
Closes the moon roof*
*
:Lightly press either of the
moon roof switches to stop
the moon roof partway.
Tilting up and down
Tilts the moon roof up
*
Tilts the moon roof down*
*
:Lightly press either of the
moon roof switches to stop
the moon roof partway.
142
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
The moon roof can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Operating the moon roof after turning the engine off
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the
engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. It cannot, however,
be operated once either front door is opened.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned
off. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon
roof is closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens
slightly.
Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade
will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
Door lock linked moon roof operation
The moon roof can be opened and closed using the wireless remote control
or key if customized at any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional. (P. 66,74)
143
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Moon roof open reminder function
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
An alarm will sound when the driver’s door is opened with the moon roof not
fully closed and the engine switch off.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
An alarm will sound when the driver’s door is opened with the moon roof not
fully closed and the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
When the moon roof does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold “” on the .
*
1
The moon roof will close, re-open and pause for approximately 10
seconds.
*
2
Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approxi-
mately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and
then release the switch.
If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold “” on the
*
1
until the moon roof moves into
the tilt up position and stops.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
144
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Release “” on the once and then press and hold “” on the
again.
*
1
The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up
position.
*
2
Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1
second.
Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and
then release the switch.
*
1
: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will
have to be performed again from the beginning.
*
2
: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second
pause, automatic operation will be disabled. In that case, press
and hold “” on the or “” on the and the moon roof
will tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt
down, open and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is
completely closed and then release the switch.
If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above proce-
dure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
Customization
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 849)
STEP
3
STEP
4
145
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Opening the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehi-
cle while it is moving.
Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bod-
ies in a position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being
operated.
Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.
Jam protection function
Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection
function.
The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the moon roof fully closes.
146
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.
Before refueling the vehicle
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
Turn the engine switch off and ensure that all the doors and win-
dows are closed.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off and ensure that all
the doors and windows are closed.
Opening the fuel tank cap
Pull up the opener to open the
fuel filler door.
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly
to open.
STEP
1
STEP
2
147
1-5. Refueling
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Closing the fuel tank cap
After refueling, turn the fuel tank
cap until you hear a click. Once
the cap is released, it will turn
slightly in the opposite direction.
Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler door.
STEP
3
148
1-5. Refueling
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Fuel types
1GR-FE engine
EU area:
Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline conforming to European
standard EN228.
For optimum engine performance, select unleaded gasoline with a Research
Octane Number of 95 or higher.
If this premium type cannot be obtained, you can temporarily use unleaded
gasoline with a Research Octane Number as low as 91.
Except EU area:
Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.
For optimum engine performance, select unleaded gasoline with a Research
Octane Number of 95 or higher.
If this premium type cannot be obtained, you can temporarily use unleaded
gasoline with a Research Octane Number as low as 91.
2TR-FE engine
EU area:
Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline conforming to European
standard EN228.
For optimum engine performance, select unleaded gasoline with a Research
Octane Number of 91 or higher.
Except EU area:
Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.
For optimum engine performance, select unleaded gasoline with a Research
Octane Number of 91 or higher.
149
1-5. Refueling
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
1KD-FTV engine
EU area:
Your vehicle must use only diesel fuel conforming to European standard
EN590.
Except EU area:
Without DPF catalytic converter
*
1
Your vehicle must use only diesel fuel that contains 350 ppm or less of sulfur
and has a cetane number of 48 or higher.
With DPF catalytic converter
*
2
Your vehicle must use only diesel fuel that contains 50 ppm or less of sulfur
and has a cetane number of 48 or higher.
*
1
: Vehicles for Russia, Ukraine, Serbia, Montenegro, Macedonia and Croa-
tia or KDJ150L-GKFEY and KDJ150L-GKAEY models
*
3
*
2
: KDJ150R-GKFEYW, KDJ150R-GKAEYW, KDJ150L-GKFEYW,
KDJ150L-GKAEYW, KDJ155R-GJFEYW, KDJ155R-GJAEYW,
KDJ155L-GJFEYW and KDJ155L-GJAEYW models
*
3
except for
Russia, Ukraine, Serbia, Montenegro, Macedonia and Croatia
*
3
: The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label. (P. 815)
Use of ethanol blended gasoline in a gasoline engine (1GR-FE engine)
Toyota allows the use of ethanol blended gasoline where the ethanol content
is up to 10 %. Make sure that the ethanol blended gasoline to be used has a
Research octane number that follows the above.
Fuel tank capacity
Vehicles without sub fuel tank system
Approximately 87 L (23.0 gal., 19.1 Imp.gal.)
Vehicles with sub fuel tank system
Approximately 150 L (39.6 gal., 33.0 Imp.gal)
150
1-5. Refueling
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do
so may result in death or serious injury.
After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an
unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to
discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from
static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.
Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.
Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot
weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause injury.
Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their
body to come close to an open fuel tank.
Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition
hazard.
151
1-5. Refueling
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When refueling
Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck. If fuel is added with
the nozzle slightly lifted away from the fuel filler neck, the automatic shut off
function may not operate, resulting in fuel overflowing from the tank.
When replacing the fuel cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your
vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in
death or serious injury.
NOTICE
Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control
systems to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the
vehicle’s painted surface.
152
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system
The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the
engine from starting if a key has not been previously registered in
the vehicle’s on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
Vehicles without a smart
entry & start system
The indicator light flashes after
the key has been removed
from the engine switch to indi-
cate that the system is operat-
ing.
The indicator light stops flash-
ing after the registered key
has been inserted into the
engine switch to indicate that
the system has been can-
celed.
Vehicles with a smart entry
& start system
The indicator light flashes after
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch has been turned off to
indicate that the system is
operating.
The indicator light stops flash-
ing after the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch has been turned
to ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode to indicate that the
system has been canceled.
153
1-6. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.
Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
If the key is in contact with a metallic object
If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system
(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
154
1-6. Theft deterrent system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Certification for the engine immobilizer system
Hereby, Tokai Rika Co., Ltd., declares that this RI-33BTY is in compliance
with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive
1999/5/EC.
155
1-6. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
156
1-6. Theft deterrent system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
157
1-6. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
NOTICE
To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper
operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
158
1-6. Theft deterrent system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Double locking system
: If equipped
Unauthorized access to the vehicle is prevented by disabling the
door unlocking function from both the interior and exterior of the
vehicle.
Vehicles employing this sys-
tem have labels on the win-
dow glass of both front doors.
159
1-6. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Setting the double locking system
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off, have all the passengers
exit the vehicle and ensure that all the doors are closed.
Using the entry function:
Touch the sensor area on the front outside door handles twice within
5 seconds.
Using the wireless remote control:
Press
twice within 5 seconds.
Canceling the double locking system
Using the entry function:
Hold the outside door handle on the driver’s side.
Using the wireless remote control: Press .
CAUTION
Double locking system precaution
Never activate the double locking system when there are people in the vehi-
cle, because all the doors cannot be opened from inside the vehicle.
160
1-6. Theft deterrent system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Alarm
: If equipped
The system sounds the alarm and flashes lights when forcible entry
is detected.
Triggering of the alarm
The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm
is set:
A locked door or glass hatch (if equipped) is unlocked or
opened in any way other than using the entry function (vehi-
cles with a smart entry & start system) or the wireless remote
control. (The doors will lock again automatically.)
The hood is opened.
The intrusion sensor detects something moving inside the
vehicle. (An intruder gets in the vehicle.) (if equipped)
The tilt sensor detects a change of vehicle inclination. (vehi-
cles for U.K.)
The quarter windows (5-door models) or back door window
are broken. (if equipped)
161
1-6. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Setting the alarm system
Close the doors, glass hatch
and hood, and lock all the
doors using the entry function
or wireless remote control.
The system will be set auto-
matically after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes
from being on to flashing when
the system is set.
Deactivating or stopping the alarm
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm.
Unlock the doors using the entry function or the wireless
remote control.
Start the engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped
after a few seconds.)
162
1-6. Theft deterrent system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Intrusion sensor and tilt sensor (if equipped)
The intrusion sensor detects an intruder or movement in the vehi-
cle.
The tilt sensor detects changes in vehicle inclination, such as when
the vehicle is towed away.
This system is designed to deter and prevent vehicle theft but does
not guarantee absolute security against all intrusions.
The intrusion sensor and tilt sensor can be canceled using the cancel
switch.
Canceling the intrusion sensor and tilt sensor
Turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch off and press the
intrusion sensor and tilt sensor
cancel switch.
When the system is canceled, the
indicator flashes rapidly.
System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.
163
1-6. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure
of the following.
Nobody is in the vehicle.
The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.
No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations:
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)
The doors are unlocked using the key.
A person inside the vehicle opens a
door or hood.
The battery is disconnected.
164
1-6. Theft deterrent system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Alarm-operated door lock
When the alarm is operating, the doors are locked automatically to pre-
vent intruders.
Do not leave the key inside the vehicle when the alarm is operating, and
make sure the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing
the battery.
Canceling and automatic re-enabling of the intrusion sensor and tilt
sensor
The alarm will still be set even when the intrusion sensor and tilt sensor
are canceled.
After the intrusion sensor and tilt sensor are canceled, pressing the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch or unlocking the doors using the entry
function or wireless remote control will re-enable the intrusion sensor and
tilt sensor.
When the alarm system is set again, the intrusion sensor and tilt sensor
will be set.
165
1-6. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Intrusion sensor considerations
The sensor may trigger the alarm in the following situations:
People or pets are in the vehicle.
A window or the moon roof is open.
(The sensor may detect the movement
of people outside the vehicle and the
movement of objects such as leaves
and insects entering the vehicle.)
Unstable items, such as dangling
accessories or clothes hanging on the
coat hooks, are in the vehicle.
166
1-6. Theft deterrent system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
The vehicle is inside an automatic or high-pressure car wash.
The vehicle experiences impacts, such as hail, lightning strikes, and
other kinds of repeated impacts or vibrations.
Tilt sensor detection considerations
The sensor may trigger the alarm in the following situations:
The vehicle is transported by a ferry, trailer, train, etc.
The vehicle is parked in a parking garage.
The vehicle is inside a car wash that moves the vehicle.
Any of the tires loses air pressure.
The vehicle is jacked up.
An earthquake occurs or the road caves in.
Cargo is loaded onto or unloaded from the roof luggage carrier.
The vehicle is parked in a place where
extreme vibrations or noises occur,
such as in a parking garage.
Ice or snow is removed from the vehi-
cle, causing the vehicle to receive
repeated impacts or vibrations.
167
1-6. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
NOTICE
To ensure the intrusion sensor and tilt sensor functions correctly
To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper
operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
To ensure that the sensors operate
properly, do not touch or cover them.
Do not spray air fresheners or other
products directly into the sensor holes.
168
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture
Drive with a good posture as follows:
Sit upright and well back in
the seat. (P. 9 3 )
Adjust the position of the
seat forward or backward to
ensure the pedals can be
reached and easily
depressed to the extent
required. (P. 93)
Adjust the seatback so that
the controls are easily oper-
able.
Adjust the tilt and telescopic
positions of the steering
wheel downward so the air-
bag is facing your chest.
(P. 129)
Lock the head restraint in
place with the center of the
head restraint closest to the
top of your ears. (P. 119)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(P. 122)
169
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
While driving
Do not adjust the position of the drivers seat.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce
the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of
death or serious injury to the driver or passenger.
Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat
tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury. The adjustment mechanism may
also be damaged.
Adjusting the seat position
Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passen-
gers are not injured by the moving seat.
Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid
injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
170
1-7. Safety information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain
types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the
occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the
risk of death or serious injury.
171
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
SRS front airbags
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front pas-
senger from impact with interior components
SRS driver knee airbag (if equipped)
Can help provide driver protection
SRS side and curtain shield airbags
SRS side airbags (if equipped)
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
SRS curtain shield airbags (if equipped)
Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer
seats
172
1-7. Safety information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Airbag system components
Front airbag sensors
Side and curtain shield air-
bag sensors (if equipped)
Airbag manual on-off switch
(if equipped)
Curtain shield airbags
(if equipped)
Front passenger airbag
Side airbags (if equipped)
SRS warning light
Curtain shield airbag
sensors (if equipped)
Driver airbag
Floor sensor (if equipped)
Driver’s seat belt buckle
switch
Driver knee airbag
(if equipped)
Airbag manual off indicator
(if equipped)
Airbag sensor assembly
Seat belt pretensioners
173
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The
SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. As
the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the
airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occu-
pants.
If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying
(inflating) SRS airbag.
A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
Vehicles with SRS curtain shield airbags
Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator)
as well as the front seats, parts of the front, center and rear pillars and
roof side rail, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also
be hot.
Vehicles without SRS curtain shield airbags
Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator)
as well as the front seats may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself
may also be hot.
The windshield may crack.
174
1-7. Safety information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)
The SRS front airbag will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds
the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approxi-
mately 20 - 30 km/h [12 - 18 mph] frontal collision with a fixed wall that
does not move or deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle
strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or
deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g.
a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the
bed of a truck, etc.).
Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt
pretensioners will activate.
SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags)
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact
that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the
impact force produced by an approximately 1500 kg [3307 lb.] vehicle collid-
ing with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orien-
tation at an approximate speed of 20 - 30 km/h [12 -18 mph]).
175
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other
than a collision
The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the
underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front air-
bags)
The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is
involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-
speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes suffi-
cient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front air-
bags may occur.
Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or
hard surface
Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
Landing hard or falling
Collision from the side
Collision from the rear
Vehicle rollover
176
1-7. Safety information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags
(SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the
vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a colli-
sion to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are not generally designed
to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over,
or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.
Collision from the side to the vehicle
body other than the passenger com-
partment
Collision from the side at an angle
Collision from the front
Collision from the rear
Vehicle rollover
177
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
When to contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional
In the following cases, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional, as soon as possible.
Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an acci-
dent that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS airbags to inflate.
A portion of a door is damaged or
deformed, or the vehicle was involved
in an accident that was not severe
enough to cause the SRS side airbags
and curtain shield airbags to inflate.
178
1-7. Safety information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Vehicles without an SRS knee airbag
The pad section of the steering wheel
or dashboard near the front passenger
airbag is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
Vehicles with an SRS knee airbag
The pad section of the steering wheel,
dashboard near the front passenger air-
bag cover or lower portion of the instru-
ment panel is scratched, cracked, or
otherwise damaged.
The surface of the seats with the side
airbag is scratched, cracked or other-
wise damaged.
The portion of the front pillars, center
pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail gar-
nishes (padding) containing the curtain
shield airbags inside is scratched,
cracked or otherwise damaged.
179
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.
Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 50 - 75 mm (2 - 3 in.)
of inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10 in.) from your driver airbag pro-
vides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the
center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 250
mm (10 in.) away now, you can change your driving position in several
ways:
Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary,
many drivers can achieve the 250 mm (10 in.) distance, even with the
driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat
somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the
road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the
seat if your vehicle has that feature.
If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the air-
bag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended above, while still maintain-
ing control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instru-
ment panel controls.
180
1-7. Safety information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
SRS airbag precautions
The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very
close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the air-
bag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits
upright.
Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or
seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small
to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint sys-
tem. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in
the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are
safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (P. 185)
Do not sit on the edge of the seat or
lean against the dashboard.
Do not allow a child to stand in front of
the SRS front passenger airbag unit or
sit on the knees of a front passenger.
Do not allow the front seat occupants to
hold items on their knees.
181
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
SRS airbag precautions
Vehicles without SRS curtain shield
airbags
Do not lean against the front door.
Vehicles with SRS curtain shield air-
bags
Do not lean against the door, the roof
side rail or the front, center and rear pil-
lars.
Do not allow anyone to kneel on the
passenger seats toward the door or put
their head or hands outside the vehicle.
Do not attach anything to or lean any-
thing against areas such as the dash-
board, steering wheel pad and lower
portion of the instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles
when the SRS driver, front passenger
and knee airbags deploy.
182
1-7. Safety information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
SRS airbag precautions
Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of
these items could become projectiles and may cause death or serious
injury, should the SRS curtain shield airbag deploy.
If the vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy,
be sure to remove it.
Do not attach anything to areas such as
the door, windshield glass, side door
glass, front, center or rear pillars, roof
side rail and assist grip. (Except for the
speed limit label P. 781)
Vehicles without a smart entry &
start system
Do not attach any heavy, sharp or hard
objects such as keys or accessories to
the key. The objects may restrict the
SRS knee airbag inflation or be thrust
into the driver’s seat area by the force
of the deploying airbag, thus causing a
danger.
183
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
SRS airbag precautions
Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side
airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such
accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable
the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in
death or serious injury.
Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS air-
bag components.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS air-
bags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a
door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do
so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel
pad and front, center and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked,
have them replaced by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional.
184
1-7. Safety information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications
without consulting any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional. The SRS airbags may malfunction or
deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.
Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel,
instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, center and
rear pillars or roof side rail
Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the
occupant compartment
Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kan-
garoo bar etc.)
Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system
Installation of electronic devices such as an RF-transmitter and CD play-
ers
Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability
185
1
1-7. Safety information
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Child restraint systems
Points to remember
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is
much safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.
Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is
appropriate to the age and size of the child.
For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the
child restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual.
(P. 197)
If child restraint system regulations exist in the country where you
reside, please contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional for the child
restraint system installation.
Toyota recommends that you use a child restraint system which
conforms to the regulation ECE No.44.
Toyota strongly urges the use of child restraint systems.
186
1-7. Safety information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 5 groups
according to the regulation ECE No.44.
Group 0: Up to 10 kg (22 lb.) (0 - 9 months)
Group 0
+
: Up to 13 kg (28 lb.) (0 - 2 years)
Group I: 9 to 18 kg (20 to 39 lb.) (9 months - 4 years)
Group II: 15 to 25 kg (34 to 55 lb.) (4 years - 7 years)
Group III: 22 to 36 kg (49 to 79 lb.) (6 years - 12 years)
In this owners manual, the following 3 types of popular child restraint
systems that can be secured with the seat belts are explained:
187
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Baby seat
Equal to Group 0 and 0
+
of ECE
No.44
Child seat
Equal to Group 0
+
and I of ECE
No.44
Junior seat
Equal to Group II and III of ECE
No.44
188
1-7. Safety information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Child restraint system suitability for various seating positions
Information provided in the table shows your child restraint system
suitability for various seating positions.
3-door models
Front passenger seat
Second seat
Standard
Airbag manual
on-off switch
ON
OFF
Outside Center
0
Up to 10 kg
(22 lb.)
(0 - 9 months)
X
Never
put
X
Never
put
UUU
0
+
Up to 13 kg
(28 lb.)
(0 - 2 years)
X
Never
put
X
Never
put
UUU
I
9 to 18 kg
(20 to 39 lb.)
(9 months -
4 years)
Rear-
facing
— X
Never put
Rear-
facing
— X
Never put
UUU
Forward-
facing
— UF
*
Forward-
facing
— UF
*
II, III
15 to 36 kg
(34 to 79 lb.)
(4 - 12 years)
UF
* UF* UUU
Mass groups
Seating
position
189
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Key of letters inserted in the above table:
U: Suitable for “universal” category child restraint system approved
for the use in this mass group.
UF: Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category child restraint
system approved for the use in this mass group.
X: Not suitable seat position for children in this mass group.
NOTE:
*: Move the seatback to the most upright position.
The child restraint system mentioned in the table may not be avail-
able outside of the EU area.
Other child restraint system which is different from the system men-
tioned in the table can be used, but the suitability of the systems must
be carefully checked with the child restraint system manufacturer
concerned and the seller of those seats.
190
1-7. Safety information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
5-door models
Front passenger
seat
Second seat
Third
seat (if
equipp
ed)
Stan-
dard
Airbag manual
on-off switch
ON
OFF
Outside Center
0
Up to 10 kg
(22 lb.)
(0 - 9 months)
X
Never
put
X
Never
put
U U L1 L1
0
+
Up to 13 kg
(28 lb.)
(0 - 2 years)
X
Never
put
X
Never
put
U U L1 L1
I
9 to 18 kg
(20 to 39 lb.)
(9 months -
4 years)
Rear-
facing
— X
Never
put
Rear-
facing
— X
Never
put
UUL2
*
2
L2*
3
For-
ward-
facing
— UF
*
1
For-
ward-
facing
— UF
*
1
II, III
15 to 36 kg
(34 to 79 lb.)
(4 - 12 years)
UF
*
1
UF*
1
UUL3*
2
L3*
4
Mass groups
Seating
position
191
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Key of letters inserted in the above table:
U: Suitable for “universal” category child restraint system approved
for the use in this mass group.
UF: Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category child restraint
system approved for the use in this mass group.
L1: Suitable for “TOYOTA G0
+
, BABYSAFE PLUS (0 to 13 kg [0 to
28 lb.])” approved for the use in this mass group
L2: Suitable for “TOYOTA DUO+ (without ISOFIX, 9 to 18 kg [20 to
39 lb.])” approved for the use in this mass group
L3: Suitable for “TOYOTA KID (15 to 36 kg [34 to 79 lb.])” approved
for the use in this mass group
X: Not suitable seat position for children in this mass group.
NOTE:
*
1
: When you use a child restraint system in this position, move the
seatback to the most upright position.
*
2
: When you use a child restraint system in this position, move the
head restraint to the lowest position.
*
3
: When you use a child restraint system in this position, move the
head restraint to the upmost position. (vehicles with third manual
seats)
*
4
: When you use a child restraint system in this position, remove the
head restraint. (vehicles with third manual seats)
The child restraint system mentioned in the table may not be avail-
able outside of the EU area.
Other child restraint system which is different from the system men-
tioned in the table can be used, but the suitability of the systems must
be carefully checked with the child restraint system manufacturer
concerned and the seller of those seats.
192
1-7. Safety information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Child restraint system suitability for various seating positions
(with ISOFIX rigid anchors)
Information provided in the table shows your child restraint system
suitability for various seating positions.
Mass groups Size class Fixture
Vehicle ISOFIX
positions
Second seat
Outside
Carrycot
F
ISO/L1
X
G
ISO/L2
X
(1) X
0
Up to 10 kg (22 lb.)
(0 - 9 months)
E
ISO/R1
X
(1) X
0
+
Up to 13 kg (28 lb.)
(0 - 2 years)
E
ISO/R1
X
D
ISO/R2
X
C
ISO/R3
X
(1) X
I
9 to 18 kg
(20 to 39 lb.)
(9 months - 4 years)
D
ISO/R2
X
C
ISO/R3
X
B
ISO/F2
IUF
B1
ISO/F2X
IUF
A
ISO/F3
IUF
(1) X
II, III
15 to 36 kg
(34 to 79 lb.)
(4 - 12 years)
(1) X
193
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
(1) For the child restraint system which do not carry the ISO/XX
size class identification (A to G), for the applicable mass group,
the car manufacturer shall indicate the vehicle specific ISOFIX
child restraint system(s) recommended for each position
Key of letters inserted in the above table:
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward-facing child restraint systems of
universal category approved for use in this mass group
X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems
in this mass group and/or this size class.
The child restraint system mentioned in the table may not be avail-
able outside of the EU area.
Other child restraint systems different from the systems mentioned in
the table can be used, but the suitability of the systems must be care-
fully checked with the child restraint system manufacturer and
retailer.
194
1-7. Safety information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat or
second seat (5-door models with third manual/power seats)
Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear
seat and use the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 122)
When you have to use a child restraint
system, adjust the seat cushion to the
fully rearward.
195
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Using a child restraint system
The use of a child restraint system not suitable for the vehicle may not prop-
erly secure the infant or child. It may result in death or serious injury (in the
event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident).
Child restraint precautions
For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child
must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system
depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is
not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be
crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.
Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that con-
forms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to acci-
dent statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat
than in the front seat.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger
seat when the airbag manual on-off switch is on. (P. 213)
In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front pas-
senger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child.
A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front pas-
senger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back
as possible, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with consid-
erable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously
injured.
196
1-7. Safety information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Child restraint precautions
Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body
against the door or the area of the seat, front, center and rear pillars or
roof side rail from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield air-
bags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is
dangerous if the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and
the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by
the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If
it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child
in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.
Child restraint lock function belt precaution
Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the
belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it will not be possible to pull the
belt out leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
When the child restraint system is not in use
Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is
not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the pas-
senger compartment.
If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the
vehicle or store it securely in the luggage compartment. This will prevent it
from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or
an accident.
197
1
1-7. Safety information
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions. Firmly
secure child restraints to the seats using a seat belt or ISOFIX rigid
anchors. Attach the top strap when installing a child restraint.
Seat belts (An ELR belt
requires a locking clip)
Vehicles for Ukraine, Kazakh-
stan, Azerbaijan and Georgia:
Seat belts equipped with a
child restraint locking mecha-
nism (ALR/ELR belts on the
outer second seats)
198
1-7. Safety information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
ISOFIX rigid anchors (ISOFIX
child restraint system)
Lower anchors are provided for
the outer second seats. (Tags
displaying the location of the
anchors are attached to the
seats.)
Anchor brackets (for the top
strap)
An anchor bracket is provided
for each second seat.
199
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock
function belt)
Rear-facing Baby seat/child seat
3-door models
1st lock position
5th lock position
Fold the seatback forward and
then back to the 1st lock position
(most upright position) until it
locks into place. Adjust the seat-
back to the 5th lock position.
5-door models
Fold the seatback forward. Then
return the seatback and secure it
at the first lock position (most
upright position). (P. 9 7 )
Place the child restraint system
on the second seat facing the
rear of the vehicle.
STEP
1
STEP
1
STEP
2
200
1-7. Safety information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and insert
the plate into the buckle. Make
sure that the belt is not twisted.
Forward-facing Child seat
3-door models
1st lock position
5th lock position
Fold the seatback forward and
then back to the 1st lock position
(most upright position) until it
locks into place. Adjust the seat-
back to the 5th lock position.
5-door models
Fold the seatback forward. Then
return the seatback and secure it
at the first lock position (most
upright position). (P. 9 7 )
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
1
201
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of the
vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and insert
the plate into the buckle. Make
sure that the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt
and allow it to retract to put it in
lock mode. In lock mode, the belt
cannot be extended.
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
202
1-7. Safety information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
While pushing the child restraint
system into the second seat,
allow the shoulder belt to retract
until the child restraint system is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
Junior seat
3-door models
1st lock position
5th lock position
Fold the seatback forward and
then back to the 1st lock position
(most upright position) until it
locks into place. Adjust the seat-
back to the 5th lock position.
5-door models
Fold the seatback forward. Then
return the seatback and secure it
at the first lock position (most
upright position).
STEP
5
STEP
1
STEP
1
203
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of the
vehicle.
Sit the child in the child restraint
system. Fit the seat belt to the
child restraint system according
to the manufacturers instruc-
tions and insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the belt is
not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is
correctly positioned over the
child’s shoulder, and that the lap
belt is as low as possible.
(P. 122)
STEP
2
STEP
3
204
1-7. Safety information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Push the buckle release button
and fully retract the seat belt.
Installation with ISOFIX rigid anchors (ISOFIX child restraint system)
3-door models
1st lock position
5th lock position
Fold the seatback forward and
then back to the 1st lock position
(most upright position) until it
locks into place. Adjust the seat-
back to the 5th lock position.
STEP
1
205
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
5-door models
Fold the seatback forward. Then
return the seatback and secure it
at the first lock position (most
upright position).
Flip the cover (3-door models
and 5-door models with third
power/manual seats), and latch
the buckles onto the anchors.
If the child restraint has a top
strap, the top strap should be
latched onto the anchor bracket.
STEP
1
STEP
2
206
1-7. Safety information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Child restraint systems with a top strap
Secure the child restraint using a seat belt or ISOFIX rigid
anchors, and do the following.
Move the head restraint in place
at the upmost position.
Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top strap.
Make sure the top strap is
securely latched.
STEP
1
STEP
2
When installing a child restraint system in the seat with ELR belt
(P. 197)
You need a locking clip to install the child restraint system. Follow the
instructions provided by the manufacturer of the system. If your child
restraint system does not provide a locking clip, you can purchase the fol-
lowing item from any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional:
Locking clip for child restraint system
(Part No. 73119-22010)
207
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When installing a junior seat
To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the
shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause
injury or discomfort to the child. (P. 125)
When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual
and fix the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other
passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
If the drivers seat interferes with the
child restraint system and prevents it
from being attached correctly, attach
the child restraint system to the right-
hand second seat (left-hand drive vehi-
cles) or the left-hand second seat (right-
hand drive vehicles).
Adjust the front passenger seat so that
it does not interfere with the child
restraint system.
Child restraint system installed on the
third seat should not contact the second
seatbacks.
208
1-7. Safety information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When installing a child restraint system
Vehicles without an airbag manual
on-off switch
Only put a forward facing child restraint
system on the front seat when unavoid-
able.
When installing a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as pos-
sible.
Failing to do so may result in death or
serious injury if the airbags deploy
(inflate).
209
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When installing a child restraint system
Vehicles without an airbag
manual on-off switch
Vehicles with an airbag
manual on-off switch
Vehicles without an airbag manual
on-off switch
Never install a rear-facing child restraint
system on the front passenger seat.
Vehicles with an airbag manual on-
off switch
Never install a rear-facing child restraint
system on the front passenger seat
when the airbag manual on-off switch is
on. (P. 213)
The force of the rapid inflation of the
front passenger airbag can cause death
or serious injury to children in the event
of an accident.
210
1-7. Safety information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When installing a child restraint system
On some models: There is a label(s) on
the passenger side sun visor, indicating
it is forbidden to attach a rear-facing
child restraint system to the front pas-
senger seat.
Details of the label are shown in the
illustration below.
211
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When installing a child restraint system
If child restraint system regulations exist in the country where you reside,
please contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional for the child restraint system installa-
tion.
When installing a child restraint system on the second center seat, adjust
both seat cushions to the same position (vehicles with third manual/power
seats) and align both seatbacks at the same angle. The seatbacks must
be adjusted to the same angle. Otherwise, the child restraint system can-
not be securely restrained and this may cause death or serious injuries in
a collision.
When a junior seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s
shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event
of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not
twisted.
Push and pull the child restraint system from side to side and forward to be
sure it is secure.
After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
212
1-7. Safety information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the lower anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects
around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child
restraint system. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached,
or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in
the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
When using the left side (left-hand drive
vehicles) or right side (right-hand drive
vehicles) lower anchors for the child
restraint system, do not sit in the center
seat.
Seat belt function may be impaired,
such as being positioned overly high or
loose-fitting, which may result in death
or serious injury in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an acci-
dent.
213
1
1-7. Safety information
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Airbag manual on-off system
: If equipped
This system deactivates the front passenger airbag.
Only deactivate the airbag when using a child restraint system on
the front passenger seat.
Airbag off indicator
This indicator light turns on
when the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in IGNITION
ON mode.
Airbag manual on-off switch
214
1-7. Safety information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Deactivating the front seat passenger airbag
Insert the mechanical key into
the cylinder and rotate to the
“OFF” position.
The indicator light turns on (only
when the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON
mode).
Airbag off indicator
If any of the following problems occur, it is possible that there is a malfunc-
tion in the system. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
The indicator light does not come on when the airbag manual on-off
switch is switched to “OFF”.
The indicator light does not go off when the airbag manual on-off switch
is switched to “ON”.
215
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When installing a child restraint system
For safety reasons, always install the child restraint system in a rear seat. In
the event that the rear seat cannot be used, the front seat can be used as
long as the airbag manual on-off system is set to “OFF”.
If the airbag manual on-off system is left on, the strong impact of the airbag
deployment (inflation) may cause serious injury or even death.
When a child restraint system is not installed on the front passenger
seat
Ensure that the airbag manual on-off system is set to “ON”.
If it is left off, the airbag may not deploy in the event of an accident, which
may result in serious injury or even death.
216
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle ............ 218
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles without a smart
entry & start system)....... 235
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles with a smart
entry & start system)....... 239
Automatic
transmission ................... 249
Manual transmission......... 258
Turn signal lever ............... 263
Parking brake.................... 264
Horn.................................. 265
2
When driving
217
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters .......... 266
Indicators and warning
lights ............................... 270
Multi-information display
(Non-Optitron type
meters) ........................... 276
Multi-information display
(Optitron type
meters) ........................... 282
Multi-information display
(Accessory meters)......... 292
2-3. Operating the lights and
wipers
Headlight switch ............... 300
Fog light switch................. 312
Windshield wipers and
washer............................ 314
Rear window wiper and
washer............................ 320
Headlight cleaner
switch ............................. 322
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control.................... 324
Dynamic radar cruise
control............................. 328
Toyota parking
assist-sensor .................. 345
Rear view monitor system
(vehicles with an
accessory meter) ............ 356
Wide view front & side
monitor (vehicles with
an accessory meter) ....... 361
Driving assist systems ...... 373
PCS (Pre-Crash Safety
system) ........................... 380
Diesel Particulate
Filter system
(diesel engine only) ........ 389
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage ........... 392
Winter driving tips ............. 396
Trailer towing .................... 400
For details of equipment related to off-road driving,
such as the four-wheel drive system, refer to the “Off-
road Driving Owners Manual”.
218
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driv-
ing:
Starting the engine
P. 235, 239
Driving
Automatic transmission
With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.
(P. 249)
Release the parking brake. (P. 264)
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
Manual transmission
While depressing the clutch pedal, shift the shift lever to 1.
(P. 258)
Release the parking brake. (P. 264)
Gradually release the clutch pedal. At the same time, gently
depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
Stopping
Automatic transmission
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift
the shift lever to P or N. (P. 249)
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
219
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Manual transmission
While depressing the clutch pedal, depress the brake
pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift
the shift lever to N. (P. 258)
Parking the vehicle
Automatic transmission
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
Set the parking brake. (P. 264)
Shift the shift lever to P. (P. 249)
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position to stop the
engine.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to stop the
engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your
person.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
220
2-1. Driving procedures
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Manual transmission
While depressing the clutch pedal, depress the brake
pedal.
Set the parking brake. (P. 264)
Shift the shift lever to N. (P. 258)
If parking on a hill, shift the shift lever to 1 or R and block the
wheels as needed.
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position to stop the
engine.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to stop the
engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your
person.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
221
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Starting off on a steep uphill
Automatic transmission
Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever
to D.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
Manual transmission
With the parking brake firmly set and the clutch pedal fully
depressed, shift the shift lever to 1.
Lightly depress the accelerator pedal at the same time as
gradually releasing the clutch pedal.
Release the parking brake.
Driving in the rain
Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the
windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be
especially slippery.
Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain,
because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road
surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.
Engine speed while driving
In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving.
This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation
to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.
The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill
When the accelerator pedal is released
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
222
2-1. Driving procedures
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Breaking in your new Toyota
To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is rec-
ommended:
For the first 300 km (200 miles):
Avoid sudden stops.
For the first 800 km (500 miles):
Do not tow a trailer.
For the first 1000 km (600 miles):
Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
Avoid sudden acceleration.
Do not drive continuously in the low gears.
Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
Do not drive slowly with the manual transmission in a high gear.
Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system.
This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodi-
cally or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced.
Have any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional, perform the bedding-down operation.
223
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Idling time before stopping the engine (diesel engine)
To prevent damage to the turbocharger, allow the engine to idle immediately
after high-speed driving or driving up a hill.
Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability
of the correct fuel. (P. 818)
Driving condition Idling time
Normal city driving Not necessary
High-speed
driving
Constant speed of approx.
80 km/h (50 mph)
Approximately
20 seconds
Constant speed of approx.
100 km/h (63 mph)
Approximately
1 minute
Steep hill driving or continuous driving at 100
km/h (63 mph) or more (race track driving etc.)
Approximately
2 minutes
224
2-1. Driving procedures
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Eco-friendly driving (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
CAUTION
When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine run-
ning. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
Vehicles with a non-optitron
type meters
Vehicles with an optitron
type meters
If Eco Driving Indicator Light turns on, it
indicates that you are driving at Eco-
friendly driving. In case of over-use of the
accelerator that cause the vehicle to
exceed Zone of Eco driving, Eco Driving
Indicator Light will turn off.
Eco Driving Indicator Light will not oper-
ate in the following conditions:
The shift lever is in anything other than
D.
The vehicle is set to second start mode.
(P. 252)
The vehicle speed is approximately 130
km/h (81 mph) or higher.
ITN21M052
225
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When driving the vehicle
Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accel-
erator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake
pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident
that could result in death or serious injury.
When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a diffi-
culty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the
vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and acceler-
ator pedals properly.
Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake
pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, result-
ing in an accident.
Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot
parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, do not let the vehicle roll
backwards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while
the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering
performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and
check that the back door is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the
vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or
a serious health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional immediately.
226
2-1. Driving procedures
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When driving the vehicle
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, do not shift the shift lever to P
while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
Do not shift the shift lever to D (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or
1 (vehicles with a manual transmission) while the vehicle is moving back-
ward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the
engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is
selected.
During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off
while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the
power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to
steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so.
However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible
to stop the vehicle in the normal way: P. 809
Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving
down a steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose
effectiveness. (P. 251)
227
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When driving the vehicle
Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or
outside rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents,
resulting in death or serious injury.
Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their body
are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.
When driving on slippery road surfaces
Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and
reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.
Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by up-
shifting and down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an
accident.
After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make
sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent
the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet
and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in
an accident.
When shifting the shift lever
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, be careful not to shift the shift
lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shifting the shift lever to a gear
other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle
that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.
228
2-1. Driving procedures
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear indicators)
Have the brake pads checked and replaced by any authorized Toyota dealer
or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional as soon as
possible.
Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads
and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.
When the vehicle is stopped
Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P (vehicles with an automatic trans-
mission only) or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly,
causing an accident.
Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space
and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep
depressing the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the
parking brake as necessary.
If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused
by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal
and securely apply the parking brake as needed.
Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause
the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible
material is nearby.
229
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When the vehicle is parked
Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in
the vehicle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:
Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a
fire.
The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and
plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.
Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the
interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehi-
cle’s electrical components.
Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a
place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when
luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.
Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place
containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard.
Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehi-
cle.
Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a
metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause
the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.
Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P (vehicles with an
automatic transmission only), stop the engine and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
230
2-1. Driving procedures
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When the vehicle is parked
Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the engine is running or immediately
after turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it
is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is
running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead
to death or a serious health hazard.
Exhaust gases
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless
and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health
hazard.
If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed
area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.
This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
The exhaust system should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or
crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise,
be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional. Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the
vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health hazard.
231
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift lever
or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to
engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly venti-
lated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to
death or a serious health hazard.
When braking
When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause
one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the
parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.
If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other
vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking. In this
case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed
more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase.
Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted
brakes.
The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: If one of the
systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal
should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will
increase.
If this happens, do not continue to drive the vehicle. Have your brakes
fixed immediately.
232
2-1. Driving procedures
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
NOTICE
When driving the vehicle
Automatic transmission
Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during
driving, as this may restrain driving torque.
Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake
pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.
Manual transmission
Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during
driving, as this may restrain driving torque.
Do not shift gears unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed. After shifting,
do not release the clutch abruptly. Doing so may damage the clutch, trans-
mission and gears.
Observe the following to prevent the clutch from being damaged.
Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving.
Do not use any gears other than the 1st gear when starting off and
moving forward.
Do not use the clutch to hold the vehicle when stopping on an uphill
grade.
Do not shift the shift lever to R when the vehicle is still moving. Doing so
may damage the clutch, transmission and gears.
233
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
NOTICE
When parking the vehicle
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, always shift the shift lever to P.
Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may acceler-
ate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.
Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for
an extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power steering pump.
When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid
damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
Diesel engine only: Make sure to idle the engine immediately after high-
speed driving or hill climbing. Stop the engine only after the turbocharger
has cooled down.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the turbocharger.
If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.
The vehicle will lean abnormally.
Information on what to do in case of a flat tire. (P. 743, 765)
234
2-1. Driving procedures
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
NOTICE
When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may
cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:
Engine stalling
Short in electrical components
Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be
sure to have any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly quali-
fied and equipped professional check the following:
Brake function
Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, trans-
mission, transfer, differentials, etc.
Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints
(where possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
235
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles without a smart entry & start system)
Starting the engine
Automatic transmission
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
Turn the engine switch to the “START” position to start the
engine.
Manual transmission
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in N.
Firmly depress the clutch pedal.
Turn the engine switch to the “START” position to start the
engine.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
236
2-1. Driving procedures
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Changing the engine switch positions
“LOCK”
The steering wheel is locked
and the key can be removed.
(Vehicles with an automatic
transmission: The key can be
removed only when the shift
lever is in P.)
“ACC”
Some electrical components
such as the audio system can
be used.
“ON”
All electrical components can
be used.
“START”
For starting the engine.
237
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Turning the key from “ACC” to “LOCK”
Shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or N (manual
transmission). (P. 249, 258)
If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 152)
When the steering lock cannot be released
Key reminder function
A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened while the engine switch is in
the “LOCK” or “ACC” position to remind you to remove the key.
STEP
1
Push in the key and turn to the “LOCK”
position.
STEP
2
When starting the engine, the engine
switch may seem stuck in the “LOCK”
position. To free it, turn the key while turn-
ing the steering wheel slightly left and
right.
238
2-1. Driving procedures
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the
accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
Caution when driving
Do not turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position while driving.
If in an emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving,
turn the engine switch only to the “ACC” position to stop the engine. An acci-
dent may result if the engine is stopped while driving.
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the engine switch in the “ACC” or “ON” position for long periods
of time without the engine running.
When starting the engine
Do not crank the engine for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may
overheat the starter and wiring system.
Do not race a cold engine.
If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine
checked immediately.
239
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles with a smart entry & start system)
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic
key on your person starts the engine or changes “ENGINE START
STOP” switch modes.
Location of the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
Left-hand drive vehicles
Right-hand drive vehicles
240
2-1. Driving procedures
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Starting the engine
Automatic transmission
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator will turn green.
If the indicator does not turn green, the engine cannot be started.
Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch.
The engine will crank until it starts or for up to 30 seconds, which-
ever is less.
Continue depressing the brake pedal until the engine is com-
pletely started.
Diesel engine only: the indicator turns on. The engine will
start after the indicator light goes out.
The engine can be started from any “ENGINE START STOP”
switch mode.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
241
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Manual transmission
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in N.
Firmly depress the clutch pedal.
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator will turn green.
If the indicator does not turn green, the engine cannot be started.
Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch.
The engine will crank until it starts or for up to 30 seconds, which-
ever is less.
Continue depressing the clutch pedal until the engine is com-
pletely started.
The indicator turns on. The engine will start after the indica-
tor light goes out.
The engine can be started from any “ENGINE START STOP”
switch mode.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
242
2-1. Driving procedures
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Stopping the engine
Automatic transmission
Stop the vehicle.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Set the parking brake. (P. 264)
Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch.
Release the brake pedal and check that the indicator on the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is off.
Manual transmission
Stop the vehicle.
Shift the shift lever to N.
Set the parking brake. (P. 264)
Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch.
Release the brake pedal and check that the indicator on the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is off.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
243
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes
Modes can be changed by pressing the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch with brake pedal (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
or clutch pedal (vehicles with a manual transmission) released.
(The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)
Off
*
The emergency flashers can
be used.
ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components
such as the audio system can
be used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.
IGNITION ON mode
All electrical components can
be used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.
*: If the shift lever is in a position
other than P when turning off
the engine, the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch will be
turned to ACCESSORY mode,
not to OFF (vehicles with an
automatic transmission only).
244
2-1. Driving procedures
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
When stopping the engine with the shift lever in a position other
than P (Vehicles with an automatic transmission)
If the engine is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P,
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will not be turned off but instead
be turned to ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to
turn the switch off:
Check that the parking brake is set.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Check that the indicator on the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is illuminated in amber and then press the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch once.
Check that the indicator on the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is off.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
245
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Auto power off function
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
When the shift lever is in P, if the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode with the engine not running for more than 20 minutes (ACCES-
SORY mode) or one hour (IGNITION ON mode), the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot
entirely prevent battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for
long periods of time when the engine is not running.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode with the engine
not running for more than 20 minutes (ACCESSORY mode) or one hour
(IGNITION ON mode), the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will automatically
turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent battery discharge. Do
not leave the vehicle with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCES-
SORY or IGNITION ON mode for long periods of time when the engine is not
running.
Operation of the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
When operating the “ENGINE START STOP” switch, one short, firm press is
enough. If the switch is pressed improperly, the engine may not start or the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch mode may not change. It is not necessary to
press and hold the switch.
Electronic key battery depletion
P. 5 6
Conditions affecting operation
P. 5 1
Note for the entry function
P. 5 3
246
2-1. Driving procedures
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 152)
Steering lock
After turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off and opening and closing
the doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function.
Operating the “ENGINE START STOP” switch again automatically cancels
the steering lock.
When the steering lock cannot be released
Steering lock motor overheating prevention
To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be sus-
pended if the engine is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time.
In this case, refrain from operating the engine. After about 10 seconds, the
steering lock motor will resume functioning.
When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator flashes in amber
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional immediately.
If the electronic key battery is depleted
P. 656
The green indicator light on the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch will flash and a
message will be shown on the multi-infor-
mation display. Press the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch again while turning
the steering wheel left and right.
247
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the
accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
Caution while driving
If the vehicle begins to slide due to engine failure or other circumstances, do
not lock or open the doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete
stop. Activation of the steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury.
Stopping the engine in an emergency
If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle,
press and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for more than 2 seconds,
or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession.
However, do not touch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while driving
except in an emergency. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause
loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will
be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull
over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
248
2-1. Driving procedures
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNI-
TION ON mode for long periods of time without the engine running.
If the indicator on the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is illuminated, the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is not off. When exiting the vehicle,
always check that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is off.
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, do not stop the engine when
the shift lever is in a position other than P. If the engine is stopped in
another shift lever position, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will not be
turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the vehicle is left
in ACCESSORY mode, battery discharge may occur.
When starting the engine
Do not race a cold engine.
If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine
checked immediately.
Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch
If the “ENGINE START STOP” seems to be operating somewhat differently
than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction.
Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional.
249
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Automatic transmission
: If equipped
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
Shifting the shift lever
Standard type
While the engine switch is in the “ON” position, move the
shift lever with the brake pedal depressed.
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure
that the vehicle is completely stopped.
250
2-1. Driving procedures
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Multi-mode type
While the “ENGINE START STOPswitch is in IGNITION
ON mode, move the shift lever with the brake pedal
depressed.
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure
that the vehicle is completely stopped.
251
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Shift position purpose
*
1
: Shifting to the D position allows the system to select a gear suitable for
the driving conditions. Setting the shift lever to the D position is recom-
mended for normal driving.
*
2
: Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the pos-
sible gear ranges, controls engine braking forces, and prevents unnec-
essary upshifting.
Shift position
Function
Standard type Multi-mode type
P Parking the vehicle/starting the engine
R Reversing
N Neutral
D Normal driving*
1
S
S mode driving*
2
(P. 254)
3
Position for engine
braking
2
Position for more
powerful engine braking
L
Position for maximum
engine braking
252
2-1. Driving procedures
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Selecting the second start mode
Use second start mode for accelerating and driving on slippery
road surfaces such as snow.
Non-Optitron type meters
Turn the “2nd STRT” button
on.
Press the button again to can-
cel second start mode.
253
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Optitron type meters
Press the menu switch.
The multi-information display
will change modes to elec-
tronic features control mode.
Press the “ENTER” switch
upwards or downwards until
“2ND START” appears.
Press the “ENTER” switch to
change to “ON”.
The “2nd STRT” indicator will
be displayed.
Each pressing of the switch
turns second start mode on
and off.
Press the menu switch to
change to the normal display.
STEP
1
STEP
2
254
2-1. Driving procedures
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Changing shift ranges in S mode (multi-mode type)
When the shift lever is in the S position, the shift lever can be oper-
ated as follows:
For upshifting
For downshifting
The initial shift range in S mode is set automatically to 4 according to
vehicle speed. However, the initial shift range may be set to 3 if AI-
SHIFT has operated while the shift lever was in the D position.
(P. 256)
255
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Shift ranges and their functions
You can choose from 5 level of engine braking force.
A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than
a higher shift range, and the engine speed will also increase.
Downshifting restrictions (standard type)
The maximum allowable speeds are as follows.
Driving on a downhill
On declines, there may be case where the vehicle shifts down automatically
to obtain engine braking. As a result of the downshifting, the engine speed
may increase.
Second start mode automatic deactivation
Second start mode is automatically deactivated if the engine is turned off
after driving in second start mode.
Downshifting Transfer position
Maximum speed
km/h (mph)
3 2
H4 105 (65)
L4 35 (22)
2 1
H4 50 (32)
L4 10 (6)
256
2-1. Driving procedures
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
S mode (multi-mode type)
When the shift range is 4 or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+” sets the
shift range to 5.
AI-SHIFT
AI-SHIFT automatically selects a suitable gear according to driver perfor-
mance and driving conditions.
AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position.
(multi-mode type: Shifting the shift lever to the S position cancels the func-
tion.)
When driving with the cruise control or dynamic radar cruise control
(multi-mode type)
Engine braking will not occur in S mode, even when downshifting to 4.
(P. 324, 328)
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
P. 789
257
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
If the “S” indicator does not come on even after shifting the shift lever
to S (multi-mode type)
This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have
the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional immediately.
(In this situation, the transmission will operate in the same manner as when
the shift lever is in D.)
Downshift restriction warning buzzer (S mode in multi-mode type)
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may
sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be
possible even when the shift lever is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)
CAUTION
When driving on slippery road surfaces
Do not accelerate or shift gears suddenly.
Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid,
resulting in an accident.
258
2-1. Driving procedures
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Manual transmission
: If equipped
Shifting the shift lever
5-speed transmission
Fully depress the clutch pedal
before operating the shift
lever, and then release it
slowly.
If it is difficult to shift in reverse,
shift the shift lever to N,
release the clutch pedal
momentarily, and then try
again.
259
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
6-speed transmission
Fully depress the clutch pedal
before operating the shift
lever, and then release it
slowly.
260
2-1. Driving procedures
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Gear Shift Indicator (if equipped)
The Gear Shift Indicator display is a guide to help the driver achieve
improved fuel economy and reduced exhaust emissions within limits
of engine performance.
Upshifting
Downshifting
Gear Shift Indicator display
The Gear Shift Indicator will not be displayed when the four-wheel drive
control switch is in L4.
The Gear Shift Indicator may not be displayed when your foot is placed
on the clutch pedal.
261
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Maximum downshifting speeds
Observe the downshifting speeds in the following table to prevent over-rev-
ving the engine.
5-speed transmission
6-speed transmission (5-door models)
Shift position
Maximum speed (km/h [mph])
Transfer position
H4
Transfer position
L4
1 45 (28) 17 (11)
2 112 (70) 44 (27)
3 119 (74) 46 (29)
4 165 (103) 67 (42)
Shift position
Maximum speed (km/h [mph])
Transfer position
H4
Transfer position
L4
1 38 (24) 15 (9)
2 77 (48) 30 (19)
3 105 (65) 41 (25)
4 131 (81) 51 (32)
5 157 (98) 61 (38)
262
2-1. Driving procedures
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
6-speed transmission (3-door models)
Reverse warning buzzer (vehicles with a 6-speed transmission)
A buzzer will sound to alert the driver if the shift lever is shifted to the R posi-
tion.
CAUTION
Gear Shift Indicator display
Refer to the display while considering actual traffic and road conditions. Fail-
ure to exercise judgment may lead to an accident.
Shift position
Maximum speed (km/h [mph])
Transfer position
H4
Transfer position
L4
1 38 (24) 15 (9)
2 102 (63) 40 (25)
3 105 (65) 41 (25)
4 131 (81) 51 (32)
5 157 (98) 61 (38)
263
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Turn signal lever
Turn signals can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
If the indicator flashes faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned
out.
The turn signal lever can be used to show the following intentions
of the driver:
Right turn
Left turn
Lane change to the right
(push and hold the lever
partway)
The right hand signals will
flash until you release the
lever.
Lane change to the left
(push and hold the lever
partway)
The left hand signals will flash
until you release the lever.
264
2-1. Driving procedures
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Parking brake
Usage in winter time
See “Winter driving tips” for parking brake usage in winter time. (P. 396)
NOTICE
Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components
overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake
wear.
To set the parking brake,
fully pull the parking brake
lever while depressing the
brake pedal.
To release the parking
brake, slightly raise the
lever and lower it com-
pletely while pressing the
button.
265
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Horn
After adjusting the steering wheel (vehicles with manual adjustment
type steering wheel)
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.
(P. 129)
To sound the horn, press on or
close to the mark.
266
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters
Non-Optitron type meters
Optitron type meters
267
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Multi-information display
P. 276, 282
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
Odometer and trip meter display
Odometer: Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter: Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the
meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to
record and display different distances independently.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
Odometer/trip meter display change button
P. 268
268
2-2. Instrument cluster
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Changing the display
Non-Optitron type meter (P. 276)
Optitron type meter
Switches between odometer and
trip meter displays. When the trip
meter is displayed, pressing and
holding the button will reset the
trip meter.
Instrument cluster light control
The brightness of the instrument cluster lights can be adjusted by
turning the knob.
Darker
Brighter
269
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
The meters and display illuminate when
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
The brightness of the instrument cluster lights
Vehicles with a non-optitron type meter
When the headlight switch is turned to on, the brightness will be reduced
slightly.
Vehicles with an optitron type meter
When the headlight switch is turned to on, the brightness will be reduced
slightly unless the control dial is turned fully clockwise.
When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The trip meter data will be reset.
If the trip meter was displayed last, the ODO screen will be displayed after
resetting.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the engine and its components
Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which
indicates the maximum engine speed.
The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is
in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (P. 803)
270
2-2. Instrument cluster
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Indicators and warning lights
The indicators and warning lights on the instrument cluster and cen-
ter panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various sys-
tems.
Instrument cluster (non-optitron type meters)
Instrument cluster (optitron type meters)
271
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Center panel
272
2-2. Instrument cluster
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the
vehicle’s various systems.
Turn signal indicator
(P. 263)
(if equipped)
“SET” indicator
(P. 324, 328)
Headlight high beam
indicator (P. 300)
(if equipped)
Dynamic radar cruise
control indicator
(P. 328)
Tail light indicator
(P. 300)
Slip indicator*
2
(P. 374)
(if equipped)
Front fog light indicator
(P. 312)
VSC OFF indicator*
2
(P. 375)
(if equipped)
Rear fog light indicator
(P. 312)
(if equipped)
“TRC OFF” indicator*
2
(P. 375)
(automatic
transmission)
Eco Driving Indicator
Light (P. 280, 289)
(diesel engine)
Engine preheating
indicator (P. 240)
(if equipped)
Gear Shift Indicator
(P. 260)
(if equipped)
Multi-terrain Select
indicator
*
2
(if equipped)
Cruise control indicator
(P. 324, 328)
(if equipped)
Crawl Control
indicator
*
2
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
273
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
*
1
: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position (vehicles without a smart entry & start system) or the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode
(vehicles with a smart entry & start system) to indicate that a system
check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started,
or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a
light does not turn on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional.
*
2
: Refer to the “Off-road Driving Owner’s Manual”
*
3
: The light turns on when the system is turned off. The light flashes
quickly to indicate that the system is operating.
(if equipped)
Downhill assist control
system indicator
*
2
(if equipped)
Airbag manual off indi-
cator (P. 213)
(automatic
transmission)
Automatic transmission
second start indicator
(P. 252)
(if equipped)
Toyota parking
assist-sensor indicator
(P. 345)
Low speed four-wheel
drive indicator light
*
2
(if equipped)
“AFS OFF” indicator
(P. 307)
(if equipped)
Rear differential lock
indicator
*
2
(if equipped)
DPF system warning
light (P. 389)
Center differential lock
indicator
*
2
(if equipped)
Pre-crash safety system
warning light (P. 380)
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1, 3
274
2-2. Instrument cluster
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the
vehicle’s systems. (P. 703)
*
1
: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position (vehicles without a smart entry & start system) or the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode
(vehicles with a smart entry & start system) to indicate that a system
check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started,
or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a
light does not turn on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional.
*
2
: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
(if equipped) (if equipped) (if equipped) (if equipped)
(if equipped)
(for driver)
(for front
passenger)
(if equipped) (if equipped)
(automatic
transmission)
(if equipped) (if equipped) (if equipped) (if equipped)
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1, 2
*
1
*
1
*
1, 2
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1, 2
275
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
If a safety system warning light does not turn on
Should a safety system light such as ABS/Multi Terrain ABS and the SRS
warning light not turn on when you start the engine, this could mean that
these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which
could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional immediately if this occurs.
276
2-2. Instrument cluster
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Multi-information display (Non-Optitron type meters)
: If equipped
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of
driving-related data including the current outside air temperature.
Outside temperature display (P. 582)
Odometer/trip meter display (P. 277)
Trip information (P. 277)
Displays driving range, fuel consumption and other cruising-related
information.
Shift position and shift range (if equipped) (P. 249)
Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display (if equipped) (P. 280)
Automatic transmission
Manual transmission
277
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Switching the display
Items displayed can be switched
by pressing the “ODO/TRIP” but-
ton.
Display items
Odometer
Trip meters A and B
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been
driven.
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven
since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and
B can be used to record and display different dis-
tances independently.
Press the hold the button to reset.
278
2-2. Instrument cluster
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Driving range
Current fuel consumption
Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display
* (P. 280) and average
fuel consumption
Displays the estimated maximum distance that
can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining
This distance is computed based on your average
fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance
that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
When only a small amount of fuel is added to the
tank, the display may not be updated.
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption
Displays the average fuel consumption since the
function was reset
The function can be reset by pressing the “ODO/
TRIP” button for longer than 1 second when the
average fuel consumption is displayed.
Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a
reference.
279
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Average vehicle speed
Eco Driving Indicator Light setting screen
*
*
: Displayed on vehicles with an automatic transmission only
Displays the average vehicle speed since the
engine was started or the function was reset
The function can be reset by pressing the “ODO/
TRIP” button for longer than 1 second when the aver-
age vehicle speed is displayed.
Eco Driving Indicator Light can be set to on or off.
The function can be activated or deactivated by
pressing the “ODO/TRIP” button for longer than 1
second when Eco Driving Indicator Light setting
screen is displayed.
280
2-2. Instrument cluster
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Eco Driving Indicator
Eco Driving Indicator Light
During Eco-friendly acceleration (Eco
driving), Eco Driving Indicator Light
will turn on.
Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display
Suggests Zone of Eco driving with
current Eco driving ratio based on
acceleration.
Zone of Eco driving
Eco driving ratio based on accelera-
tion
If the vehicle exceeds Zone of Eco
driving, the right side of Eco Driving
Indicator Zone Display will blink and
Eco Driving Indicator Light will turn off.
Eco Driving Indicator Light will not oper-
ate in the following conditions:
The shift lever is in anything other than
D.
The vehicle is set to second start mode.
(P. 252)
The vehicle speed is approximately 130
km/h (81 mph) or higher.
281
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The following information data will be reset:
Trip meter
Average fuel consumption
Average vehicle speed
If the trip meter was displayed last, the ODO screen will be displayed after
resetting.
CAUTION
The information display at low temperatures (vehicles with an auto-
matic transmission)
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the information dis-
play. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may
respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag between the drivers shifting and the new gear
number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to down-
shift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an
accident resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
The multi-information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the information dis-
play. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may
respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
282
2-2. Instrument cluster
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Multi-information display (Optitron type meters)
: If equipped
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of
driving-related data including the current outside air temperature.
Trip information contents (P. 283)
Displays driving range, fuel consumption and other cruising-related
information.
Electronic features control contents (P. 286)
Other contents (P. 287)
283
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Switching the display
Menu switch
Changes modes to electronic fea-
tures control mode, customization
mode or back to normal display
mode
“ENTER” switch
Changes trip information items.
This switch is also used to turn
on/off electronic features controls
and to change customization set-
tings.
Display items
Trip information contents
Trip information items displayed can be switched by pressing the
“ENTER” switch upwards or downwards.
Front tire angle
The direction of the front tires is displayed
The tire direction is displayed in 3 stages for both
left and right, in accordance with the angle of the
tire.
284
2-2. Instrument cluster
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Driving range
Average fuel consumption after refueling
Current fuel consumption
Displays the estimated maximum distance that
can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining
This distance is computed based on your aver-
age fuel consumption. As a result, the actual
distance that can be driven may differ from that
displayed.
When only a small amount of fuel is added to
the tank, the display may not be updated.
Displays the average fuel consumption since
the vehicle was last refueled
Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a
reference.
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption
285
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Average fuel consumption
Average vehicle speed
Elapsed time
Displays the average fuel consumption since
the function was reset
The function can be reset by pressing the
“ENTER” switch for longer than 1 second when
the average fuel consumption is displayed.
Use the displayed average fuel consumption as
a reference.
Displays the average vehicle speed since the
engine was started or the function was reset
The function can be reset by pressing the
“ENTER” switch for longer than 1 second when the
average vehicle speed is displayed.
Displays the elapsed time since the function
was last reset
The function can be reset by pressing the
“ENTER” switch for longer than 1 second when
the elapsed time is displayed.
286
2-2. Instrument cluster
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Outside temperature display
Display off
A blank screen is displayed
Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display
P. 289
Electronic features control contents
Multi-terrain Select (if equipped)
Refer to the “Off-road Driving Owner’s Manual”
Toyota parking assist-sensor (if equipped) (P. 345)
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) (if equipped) (P. 307)
Second start mode (if equipped) (P. 252)
Displays the outside temperature
The temperature range that can be displayed is
from -40 C (-40 F) to 50 C (122 F).
287
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Other contents
Shift position and shift range (if equipped) (P. 249)
Rear height control air suspension display (if equipped)
Refer to the “Off-road Driving Owner’s Manual”
Multi-terrain Select display (if equipped)
Refer to the “Off-road Driving Owner’s Manual”
Toyota parking assist-sensor display
* (if equipped) (P. 345)
Crawl Control display
* (if equipped)
Refer to the “Off-road Driving Owner’s Manual”
Dynamic radar cruise control display
* (if equipped) (P. 328)
Warning messages (P. 718)
Automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in one of the
vehicles systems
Customization
Settings (e.g. available language) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 849)
*: Automatically displayed when the system is used
288
2-2. Instrument cluster
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Electronic features control can be turned on/off when
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
System check display
After turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode,
“TOYOTA” is displayed while system operation is checked. When the sys-
tem check is complete, the normal screen will return.
Conditions for ending electronic features control
In the following situations, the electronic features control will end automati-
cally:
The menu switch is pressed
Toyota parking assist-sensor starts operating
The Crawl Control is operated
The dynamic radar cruise control is operated
A warning message appears after the electronic features control screen
is displayed
289
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Eco Driving Indicator
Eco Driving Indicator Light
During Eco-friendly acceleration (Eco
driving), Eco Driving Indicator Light
will turn on.
Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display
Suggests Zone of Eco driving with
current Eco driving ratio based on
acceleration.
Zone of Eco driving
Eco driving ratio based on accelera-
tion
If the vehicle exceeds Zone of Eco
driving, the right side of Eco Driving
Indicator Zone Display will blink and
Eco Driving Indicator Light will turn off.
Eco Driving Indicator Light will not oper-
ate in the following conditions:
The shift lever is in anything other than
D.
The vehicle is set to second start mode.
(P. 252)
The vehicle speed is approximately 130
km/h (81 mph) or higher.
290
2-2. Instrument cluster
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Outside temperature display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be dis-
played, or the display may take longer than normal to change:
When the vehicle is stopped, or moving at low speeds (less than 20 km/h
[12 mph])
When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/
exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
When “--” or “E” is displayed
The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional.
When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The following information data will be reset:
Average fuel consumption after refueling
Average fuel consumption
Average vehicle speed
Elapsed time
291
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
The information display at low temperatures (vehicles with an auto-
matic transmission)
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the information dis-
play. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may
respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag between the drivers shifting and the new gear
number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to down-
shift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an
accident resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
The multi-information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the information dis-
play. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may
respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
292
2-2. Instrument cluster
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Multi-information display (Accessory meters)
: If equipped
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of
driving-related data including the current outside air temperature.
Outside temperature display (P. 293)
Rear view monitor (if equipped) (P. 356)
Automatically displayed when the shift lever is moved into R.
Multi-terrain Monitor (if equipped)
Refer to the “Off-road Driving Owner’s Manual”
Wide view front & side monitor (if equipped) (P. 361)
Trip information (P. 293)
Displays driving range, fuel consumption and other cruising-related
information.
Toyota parking assist-sensor (if equipped) (P. 345)
293
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Switching the display
Items displayed can be switched
by pressing the “MODE” switch.
“RESET” switch
“DISP” switch
” switch
” switch
“MODE” switch
Display items
Outside temperature display
Displays the outside temperature
The temperature range that can
be displayed is from -40 C (-40
F) to 50 C (122 F)
294
2-2. Instrument cluster
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Driving range
Displays the estimated maxi-
mum distance that can be driven
with the quantity of fuel remain-
ing
This distance is computed based
on your average fuel consump-
tion. As a result, the actual dis-
tance that can be driven may
differ from that displayed.
When only a small amount of fuel
is added to the tank, the display
may not be updated.
Average fuel consumption after refueling and current fuel
consumption
Displays the average fuel con-
sumption since the vehicle was
last refueled and the current rate
of fuel consumption
Use the displayed average fuel
consumption as a reference.
295
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Average fuel consumption
Displays the average fuel con-
sumption since the function was
reset
The function can be reset by
pressing and holding the
“RESET” switch when the
average fuel consumption is
displayed.
Use the displayed average fuel
consumption as a reference.
Average vehicle speed
Displays the average vehicle
speed since the function was
reset
The function can be reset by
pressing and holding the
“RESET” switch when the aver-
age vehicle speed is displayed.
Elapsed time
Displays the elapsed time since
the function was last reset
The function can be reset by
pressing and holding the
“RESET” switch when the
elapsed time is displayed.
296
2-2. Instrument cluster
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Setting up the display
Setting up the information display
To set up the display, press the “DISP” switch until the desired item
appears.
If left idle for approximately 10 seconds, the display will revert to the previ-
ous screen.
Setting the contrast
Press the “” or “” switch to
adjust the contrast.
+: Strengthen
-: Weaken
Setting the brightness
Press the “” or “” switch to
adjust the brightness.
+: Brighter
-: Darker
297
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Setting the day mode
Press the “” or “” switch to
select ON or OFF.
Setting up the display of the monitors
To set up the display, press the “DISP” switch when the camera
image is being displayed until the desired item appears.
If left idle for approximately 10 seconds, the display will revert to the previ-
ous screen.
Setting the contrast
Press the “” or “” switch to
adjust the contrast.
+: Strengthen
-: Weaken
298
2-2. Instrument cluster
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Setting the brightness
Press the “” or “” switch to
adjust the brightness.
+: Brighter
-: Darker
Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is
characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to
use the display.
Outside temperature display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be dis-
played, or the display may take longer than normal to change.
When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 20 km/h [12 mph])
When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/
exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
299
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
When “--” or “E” is displayed on the outside temperature display
The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional.
When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The following information data and settings will be reset:
Average fuel consumption after refueling
Average fuel consumption
Average vehicle speed
Elapsed time
Customization
Setting of available languages can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 849)
NOTICE
The multi-information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal
information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display
monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
300
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:
The front position, tail,
license plate and
instrument panel lights
turn on.
The headlights and all
lights listed above turn
on.
Vehicles without a
smart entry & start sys-
tem: The headlights,
and so on turn on and
off automatically (when
the engine switch is in
the “ON” position.)
Vehicles with a smart
entry & start system:
The headlights front
position lights and so
on turn on and off auto-
matically (when the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in
IGNITION ON mode.)
(if equipped)
301
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Turning on the high beam headlights
With the headlights on, push
the lever away from you to
turn on the high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the
center position to turn the high
beams off.
Pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the high
beams once.
You can flash the high beams
with the headlights on or off.
Manual headlight leveling dial (if equipped)
The level of the headlights can be adjusted according to the number
of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle.
Raises the level of the head-
lights
Lowers the level of the head-
lights
302
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Guide to dial settings
Vehicle category M1
* without electronically modulated air suspension
Occupancy and luggage load conditions Dial position
Occupants Luggage load
9-seat
models
5-door,
7-seat
models
Driver only, or driver
and one passenger in
the front seat
None 0 0
Driver, front passen-
ger and all passen-
gers in the rear seats
farthest to the rear
None 1 1
All seats occupied None 2.5 2
All seats occupied Full luggage loading 3.5
2.5
*
1
3*
2
3.5*
3
Driver Full luggage loading 3.5
2.5
*
1
3.5*
2,3
303
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
*
1
: Vehicles with 18-inch tires with sub fuel tank of the following models:
KDJ150L-GKAEY, KDJ150L-GKFEY, GRJ150L-GKAEK
*
2
: Vehicles with 18-inch tires of the following models:
GRJ150L-GKAEKW, KDJ150R-GKFEYW, KDJ150R-GKAEYW,
KDJ150L-GKFEYW, KDJ150L-GKAEYW, and
vehicles with 18-inch tires without sub fuel tank,
vehicles with 17-inch tires of the following models:
KDJ150L-GKAEY, KDJ150L-GKFEY, GRJ150L-GKAEK
*
3
: Vehicles with 17-inch tires of the following models:
TRJ150L-GKPEK, TRJ150L-GKMEK, GRJ150L-GKAEKW,
KDJ150R-GKFEYW, KDJ150R-GKAEYW, KDJ150L-GKFEYW,
KDJ150L-GKAEYW
The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label. (P. 815)
304
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Vehicle category M1
* without electronically modulated air suspension
Occupancy and luggage load conditions Dial position
Occupants Luggage load
5-door,
5-seat
models
3-door,
5-seat
models
Driver only, or driver
and one passenger in
the front seat
None 0 0
Driver, front passen-
ger and all passen-
gers in the rear seats
farthest to the rear
None 1 1.5
All seats occupied None 1 1.5
All seats occupied Full luggage loading
3
*
4
3.5*
5,7
4*
6
3*
8
3.5*
9
Driver Full luggage loading
3.5
*
4,7
4*
5,6
3.5*
8
4*
9
305
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
*
4
: Vehicles with 18-inch tires of the following models:
KDJ150L-GKAEY, KDJ150L-GKFEY, GRJ150L-GKAEK
*
5
: Vehicles with 17-inch tires of the following models:
TRJ150L-GKPEK, TRJ150L-GKMEK, KDJ150L-GKAEY,
KDJ150L-GKFEY, GRJ150L-GKAEK
*
6
: Vehicles with 17-inch tires of the following models:
GRJ150L-GKAEKW, KDJ150R-GKFEYW, KDJ150R-GKAEYW,
KDJ150L-GKFEYW, KDJ150L-GKAEYW
*
7
: Vehicles with 18-inch tires of the following models:
GRJ150L-GKAEKW, KDJ150R-GKFEYW, KDJ150R-GKAEYW,
KDJ150L-GKFEYW, KDJ150L-GKAEYW
*
8
: Vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers
*
9
: Vehicles with intermittent windshield wipers with interval adjuster
The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label. (P. 815)
306
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Vehicle category M1
* with electronically modulated air suspension
Vehicle category N1
*
*
8
: Vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers
*
9
: Vehicles with intermittent windshield wipers with interval adjuster
*: To distinguish the vehicle category, ask any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
Occupancy and luggage load conditions
Dial position
Occupants Luggage load
Driver only, or driver and
one passenger in the front
seat
None 0
Driver, front passenger and
all passengers in the rear
seats farthest to the rear
None 0
All seats occupied None 0
All seats occupied Full luggage loading 0.5
Driver Full luggage loading 0.5
Occupancy and luggage load conditions
Dial position
Occupants Luggage load
Driver only, or driver and
one passenger in the front
seat
None 0
Driver Full luggage loading
3.5
*
8
4 *
9
307
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) (if equipped)
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) secures excellent visibility at
intersections and on curves by automatically adjusting the direction of
the light axis of the headlights according to vehicle speed and the
degree of the tire’s angle as controlled by steering input.
AFS operates at speeds of 10 km/h (6 mph) or higher.
Deactivating AFS
Press the menu switch.
The multi-information display will
change modes to electronic fea-
tures control mode.
Press the “ENTER” switch
upwards or downwards until
“AFS” appears.
Press the “ENTER” switch to
change to “OFF”.
The “AFS OFF” indicator will be
displayed.
Each pressing of the switch turns
“AFS” on and off.
Press the menu switch to
change to the normal display.
STEP
1
STEP
2
308
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Daytime running light system (if equipped)
To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights and tail
lights turn on automatically whenever the engine is started. Daytime running
lights are not designed for use at night.
Headlight control sensor (if equipped)
Automatic light off system
Type A
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The headlights, front position, tail, license plate, front and rear fog (if
equipped), and instrument panel lights turn off automatically if the engine
switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position and the driver’s door is
opened.
To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to the “ON” position, or
turn the light switch off once and then back to or .
The sensor may not function properly if
an object is placed on the sensor, or any-
thing that blocks the sensor is affixed to
the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor
detecting the level of ambient light and
may cause the automatic headlight sys-
tem to malfunction.
309
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The headlights, front position, tail, license plate, front and rear fog (if
equipped), and instrument panel lights turn off if the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off and the driver’s
door is opened.
To turn the lights on again, turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNI-
TION ON mode, or turn the light switch off once and then back to or
.
Type B
When the light switch is in : The headlights, front position, tail,
license plate, front and rear fog (if equipped), and instrument panel lights
turn off automatically if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to
ACCESSORY mode or turned off and a door or the glass hatch (if
equipped) is opened and closed.
When the light switch is in or : The lights listed above
except for tail lights turn off automatically if the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. (A buzzer sounds if
the driver’s door is opened at this time.)
To turn the lights on again, turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNI-
TION ON mode, or turn the light switch off once and then back to or
.
310
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Type C
When only the tail lights come on: The front position, tail, license plate,
front and rear fog (if equipped), and instrument panel lights turn off if the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or
turned off the driver’s door is opened.
When the headlights come on: The headlights, front position, tail, license
plate, front and rear fog (if equipped), and instrument panel lights turn off
30 seconds after a door or the glass hatch (if equipped) is opened and
closed.
To turn the lights on again, turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNI-
TION ON mode, or turn the light switch off once and then back to or
.
Type D
When the light switch is in : The headlights, front position, tail,
license plate, front and rear fog (if equipped), and instrument panel lights
turn off 30 seconds after a door or the glass hatch (if equipped) is opened
and closed if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCES-
SORY mode or turned off. (The lights turn off immediately if on the
key is pressed after all the doors are locked.)
When the light switch is in or : The headlights and front
fog lights turn off automatically if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. (A buzzer sounds if the
driver’s door is opened at this time.)
To turn the lights on again, turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNI-
TION ON mode, or turn the light switch off once and then back to or
.
311
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Automatic headlight leveling system (if equipped)
The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number
of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the
headlights do not interfere with other road users.
If the “AFS OFF” indicator flashes
It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
Light reminder buzzer (if equipped)
A buzzer sounds when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off or
turned to ACCESSORY mode and the driver’s door is opened while the tail
lights remains on.
Customization
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable featuresP. 849)
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not run-
ning.
312
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Fog light switch
: If equipped
The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving condi-
tions, such as in rain and fog.
Front and rear fog light switch
Turns the front and rear fog
lights off
Turns the front fog lights on
Turns both front and rear
fog lights on
Releasing the switch ring
returns it to .
Operating the switch ring again
turns only the rear fog lights
off.
313
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Fog lights can be used when
Vehicles with a front and rear fog light
Front fog lights: The headlights or front position lights are turned on.
Rear fog lights: The front fog lights are turned on.
Vehicles with a rear fog light only
The headlights or front position lights are turned on.
Rear fog light switch
Turns the rear fog light off
Turns the rear fog light on
314
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Windshield wipers and washer
Intermittent windshield wipers with interval adjuster
The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows.
When intermittent windshield wiper operation is selected, the
wiper interval can be also adjusted.
Intermittent windshield
wiper operation
Low speed windshield wiper
operation
High speed windshield
wiper operation
Temporary operation
315
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Increases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
Washer/wiper dual opera-
tion
The wipers will automatically
operate a couple of times after
the washer squirts.
Vehicles with the headlight
cleaners: If the headlights are
on, the headlight cleaners will
operate once.
316
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Rain-sensing windshield wipers (if equipped)
When is selected, the wipers will operate automatically
when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically
adjusts wiper timing in accordance with rain volume and vehicle
speed.
When is selected, the sensor sensitivity can be adjusted
as follows by turning the switch ring:
Rain-sensing wiper opera-
tion (“AUTO”)
Low speed wiper operation
High speed wiper operation
Temporary operation
317
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Increases the sensitivity
Decreases the sensitivity
Washer/wiper dual opera-
tion
The wipers operate automati-
cally. (After operating several
times, the wipers operate one
more time after a short delay to
prevent dripping.)
Vehicles with the headlight
cleaners: If the headlights are
on, the headlight cleaners will
operate once.
318
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: The engine switch is in the
“ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Raindrop sensor (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)
If the wiper switch is turned to the “AUTO” position while the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode, the wipers will operate
once to show that “AUTO” mode is activated.
When the sensor sensitivity ring is turned toward high while in “AUTO”
mode, the wipers will operate once to indicate that the sensor sensitiv-
ity is enhanced.
If the temperature of the raindrop sensor is 90 C (194 F) or higher, or
-15 C (5 F) or lower, automatic operation may not occur. In this case,
operate the wipers in any mode other than “AUTO”.
Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation (vehicles equipped with
rain-sensing windshield wipers)
With the settings other than “AUTO” also, the time until drip prevention wiper
sweep occurs is changed depending on vehicle speed.
With “LO” selected, wiper operation will be switched from low speed to inter-
mittent wiper operation only when the vehicle is stationary. (However, when
the sensor sensitivity is adjusted to the highest level, the mode cannot be
switched.)
The raindrop sensor judges the amount
of raindrops.
An optical sensor is adopted. It may not
operate properly when sunlight from the
rising or setting of the sun intermittently
strikes the windshield, or if bugs etc.
are present on the windshield.
319
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
CAUTION
Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in “AUTO” mode
The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or
the windshield is subject to vibration in “AUTO” mode. Take care that your
fingers or anything else does not become caught in the windshield wipers.
NOTICE
When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may over-
heat.
When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled
toward you and held continually.
When a nozzle becomes blocked
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
320
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Rear window wiper and washer
The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows:
Intermittent window wiper
operation
Normal window wiper oper-
ation
Washer operation
Washer/wiper dual opera-
tion
321
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: The engine switch is in the
“ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
The glass hatch (if equipped) is closed.
If no washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the
washer fluid reservoir.
NOTICE
When the rear window is dry
Do not use the wiper, as it may damage the rear window.
When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may over-
heat.
322
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Headlight cleaner switch
: If equipped
The headlight cleaners can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: The engine switch is in the
“ON” position and the headlight switch is turned on.
If equipped, the headlight switch is in the “AUTO” position and the headlight
is on.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the headlight switch is turned on.
If equipped, the headlight switch is in the “AUTO” position and the headlight
is on.
Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.
Press the switch to clean the
headlights.
323
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Windshield washer linked operation
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: When the windshield washer
is operated with the engine switch is in the “ON” position and the headlight
on, the headlight cleaners will operate once. (P. 314)
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: When the windshield washer is
operated with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode
and the headlight on, the headlight cleaners will operate once. (P. 314)
NOTICE
When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not press the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.
324
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control
: If equipped
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
Indicators
Cruise control switch
Setting the vehicle speed
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will
come on.
Press the button again to
deactivate the cruise control.
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed,
and push the lever down to set
the speed.
“SET” indicator will come on.
The vehicle speed at the
moment the lever is released
becomes the set speed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
325
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set
speed is obtained.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired
direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the
lever in the desired direction.
The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time
the lever is operated.
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or
decreased continually until the lever is released.
Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the constant speed
control.
The speed setting is also can-
celed when the brakes are
applied or the clutch pedal
(manual transmission only) is
depressed.
Pushing the lever up
resumes the constant
speed control.
Resuming is available when
the vehicle speed is more than
approximately 40 km/h (25
mph).
326
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Cruise control can be set when
The shift lever is in the D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected
(vehicles with an automatic transmission).
Vehicle speed is above approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set
speed resumes.
Even without cancelling the cruise control, the set speed can be
increased by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then
pushing the lever down to set the new speed.
Automatic cruise control cancelation
Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following
situations:
Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 16 km/h (10 mph)
below the preset vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
VSC is activated.
If the cruise control indicator light flashes
Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press
the button again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels
immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise
control system. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer
or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
327
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.
Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting
in death or serious injury.
In heavy traffic
On roads with sharp bends
On winding roads
On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
When your vehicle is towing a trailer (with towing hitch) or during emer-
gency towing
328
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Dynamic radar cruise control
: If equipped
Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise con-
trol with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or
decelerates in order to maintain a set following distance from vehi-
cles ahead.
Display
Set speed
Indicators
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
button
Cruise control switch
329
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-
trol mode)
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Dynamic radar cruise control
indicator will come on.
Press the button again to
deactivate the cruise control.
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed,
and push the lever down to set
the speed.
“SET” indicator will come on.
The vehicle speed at the
moment the lever is released
becomes the set speed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
330
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set
speed is displayed.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired
direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the
lever in the desired direction.
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed
will be increased or decreased as follows:
When the set speed is shown in “MPH”
Fine adjustment: By approximately 8 km/h (5 mph) each time
the lever is operated
Large adjustment: By approximately 8 km/h (5 mph) for each
0.75 seconds the lever is held
When the set speed is shown in “km/h”
Fine adjustment: By approximately 5 km/h (3.1 mph) each
time the lever is operated
Large adjustment: By approximately 5 km/h (3.1 mph) for
each 0.75 seconds the lever is held
In the constant speed control mode (P. 335), the set speed will
be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time
the lever is operated
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or
decreased continually until the lever is released.
331
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Pressing the button changes
the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance as follows:
Long
Medium
Short
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance
is set automatically to long
mode when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is turned
to IGNITION ON mode.
If a vehicle is running ahead of
you, the preceding vehicle
mark will be also displayed.
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings
Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances
shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 80 km/h (50 mph). Vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accordance with
vehicle speed.
Preceding vehicle mark
Distance options Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Long Approximately 50 m (160 ft.)
Medium Approximately 40 m (130 ft.)
Short Approximately 30 m (100 ft.)
332
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the cruise control.
The speed setting is also can-
celed when the brakes are
applied.
Pushing the lever up
resumes the cruise control
and returns vehicle speed
to the set speed.
Resuming is available when
the vehicle speed is more than
approximately 40 km/h (25
mph).
333
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles
up to approximately 120 m (400 ft.) ahead, determines the current
vehicle-to-vehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suit-
able following distance from the vehicle ahead.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long
downhill slopes.
Example of constant speed cruising
When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-
vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control.
Example of deceleration cruising
When the vehicle ahead is driving slower than the set speed
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you the system automatically
decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is
necessary, the system applies the brakes. A warning tone warns you
when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle
from closing in on the vehicle ahead.
334
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Example of follow-up cruising
When following a vehicle driving slower than the set speed
The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the
speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance set by the driver.
Example of acceleration
When there are no longer any vehicles ahead driving slower than
the set speed
The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then
returns to constant speed cruising.
Approach warning
When your vehicle is too close to a vehicle ahead, and sufficient
automatic deceleration via the cruise control is not possible, the dis-
play will flash and the buzzer will sound to alert the driver. An exam-
ple of this would be if another driver cuts in front of you while you are
following a vehicle. Apply the brakes to ensure an appropriate vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance.
Warnings may not occur when
In the following instances, there is a possibility that the warnings
will not occur:
When the speed of the vehicle ahead matches or exceeds your
vehicle speed
When the vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely slow speed
Immediately after the cruise control speed was set
At the instant the accelerator is applied
335
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Selecting conventional constant speed control mode
Constant speed control mode differs from vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode. When constant speed control mode is selected, your
vehicle will maintain a set speed regardless of whether or not there
are other vehicles in the lane ahead.
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Press the button again to deacti-
vate the cruise control.
Switch to constant speed con-
trol mode.
(Push the lever forward and
hold for approximately 1 sec-
ond.)
Constant speed control mode
indicator will come on.
When in constant speed control
mode, to return to vehicle-to-vehi-
cle distance control mode, push
the lever forward again and hold
for approximately 1 second.
After the desired speed has been
set, it is not possible to return to
vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-
trol mode.
336
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
If the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is turned off and then
turned to IGNITION ON mode
again, the vehicle will automati-
cally return to vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control mode.
Adjusting the speed setting:
P. 325
Canceling and resuming the
speed setting: P. 332
Dynamic radar cruise control can be set when
The shift lever is in the D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.
Vehicle speed is above approximately 50 km/h (30 mph).
Switching modes
The mode cannot be switched to constant speed control mode if vehicle-to-
vehicle distance control mode has been used. The mode also cannot be
switched from constant speed control to vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode. Turn the system off by pressing the “ON-OFF” button, and turn it on
again.
Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed
resumes. However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the
vehicle speed may decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the
distance to the vehicle ahead.
337
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the
following situations:
Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
VSC is activated.
The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way.
The windshield wipers are operating at high speed.
When second start mode is set.
Bad weather causes the detection function to become extremely unsta-
ble.
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any
other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional and have your Toyota inspected.
Automatic cancelation of constant speed control
The cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in the following sit-
uations:
Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 16 km/h (10 mph)
below the set vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
VSC is activated.
338
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Radar sensor and grille cover
Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-
vehicle distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as
snow, ice and plastic objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.)
Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected.
Warning lights and messages for dynamic radar cruise control
Warning lights and messages are used to indicate a system malfunction or
to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. (P. 718)
Grille cover
Radar sensor
339
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Certification
340
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
341
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Before using dynamic radar cruise control
Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.
Be aware of the set speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not
appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your
vehicle and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes etc.
Cautions regarding the driving assist systems
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
Assisting the driver to measure following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control is only intended to help the driver in
determining the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a
designated vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows care-
less or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in
low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for driver to pay close attention
to the vehicle’s surroundings.
Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control determines whether the following dis-
tance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling
ahead is appropriate or not. It is not capable of making any other type of
judgement. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain
vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of danger in
any given situation.
Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle
The dynamic radar cruise control has no capability to prevent or avoid a
collision with a vehicle traveling ahead. Therefore, if there is ever any dan-
ger, the driver must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and
act appropriately in order to ensure the safety of all involved.
342
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
To avoid inadvertent cruise control activation
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.
Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an acci-
dent resulting in death or serious injury.
In heavy traffic
On roads with sharp bends
On winding roads
On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice and snow
On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up
and down gradients
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
At entrances to expressways
When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sen-
sors from functioning correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)
When a buzzer is heard often
When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing
In traffic conditions where the vehicle is repeatedly sped up and slowed
down at frequent intervals
343
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles
are in front of you.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles,
the approach warning (P. 334) will not be activated, and a fatal or serious
accident may result.
Vehicles that cut in suddenly
Vehicles traveling at low speeds
Vehicles that are not moving
Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)
Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may
not function correctly
Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sen-
sor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and a fatal or serious
accident may result:
When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the
functioning of the sensor
When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the lug-
gage compartment etc.)
When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow
When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable
When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly
Excessive exhaust gas (black smoke) is coming from the vehicle ahead or
other vehicles around you, obscuring your front view
The rear section of the vehicle ahead is extremely dirty
The vehicle ahead has higher ground clearance
344
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
To ensure the sensor functions correctly
Do not do the following to the sensor or grille as doing so may cause the
sensor not to function correctly and could result in an accident:
Sticking or attaching anything to them
Leaving them dirty
Disassembling or subjecting them to strong shocks
Modifying or painting them
Replacing them with non-genuine parts
Handling the radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the cruise control system can function effec-
tively.
Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an acci-
dent.
Keep the sensor and front grille cover clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and front grille cover with a soft cloth so you do not mark
or damage them.
Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction.
If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always
have the area inspected and adjusted by any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
Do not disassemble the sensor.
Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or sur-
rounding area.
Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover.
Do not replace them with non-genuine parts.
345
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Toyota parking assist-sensor
: If equipped
The distance from your vehicle to nearby obstacles when parallel
parking or maneuvering into a garage is measured by the sensors
and communicated via the indicator (non-optitron type meters), the
multi-information display (optitron type meters), the accessory
meter (if equipped), and a buzzer. Always check the surrounding
area when using this system.
Vehicles with a navigation system
Refer to the “Navigation System Owners Manual”.
Vehicles without a navigation system
Types of sensors
Front corner sensors (if
equipped)
Front center sensors (if
equipped)
Rear corner sensors
Rear center sensors
346
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Toyota parking assist-sensor switch
4 sensor type
Turns Toyota parking assist-
sensor on/off
When on, the indicator light
come on and the buzzer
sounds to inform the driver
that the system is operational.
8 sensor type
Press the menu switch.
The multi-information dis-
play will change modes to
electronic features control
mode.
Press the “ENTER” switch
upwards or downwards until
the Toyota parking assist-
sensor mark appears in the
multi-information display.
STEP
1
347
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Display
When the sensors detect an obstacle, the Toyota parking assist-sen-
sor indicator is illuminated by an LED (non-optitron type meters), or a
graphic is shown on the multi-information display (optitron type
meters and accessory meters) depending on the position and dis-
tance to the obstacle.
Press the “ENTER” switch to
change to “ON”.
The Toyota parking assist-
sensor indicator will be dis-
played.
Each pressing of the switch
turns the Toyota parking assist-
sensor on and off.
When on, the buzzer sounds to
inform the driver that the sys-
tem is operational.
Press the menu switch to
change to the normal display.
STEP
2
348
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
4 sensor type
Vehicle indicator
Rear corner indicator
Rear center indicator
8 sensor type (vehicles with an optitron type meter)
Front corner sensor operation
Front center sensor operation
Front tire angle
Rear corner sensor operation
Rear center sensor operation
8 sensor type (vehicles with an accessory meter)
When the vehicle is moving for-
ward or backward
A simplified image is displayed
when an obstacle is detected.
349
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
The distance display and buzzer
When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approxi-
mate distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.
Distance display
Corner sensor
*: 4 sensor type contains only rear sensors
Approximate
distance to
obstacle
*
4 sensor type
8 sensor type
Optitron type
meter
Accessory
meter (insert
display)
Front:
60 cm (2.0 ft.) to
47.5 cm (1.6 ft.)
Rear:
55 cm (1.8 ft.) to
37.5 cm (1.2 ft.)
(blinking) (continuous) (blinking)
Front:
47.5 cm (1.6 ft.) to
35 cm (1.1 ft.)
Rear:
37.5 cm (1.2 ft.) to
25 cm (0.8 ft.)
(blinking rapidly)
(continuous)
(blinking rapidly)
Front:
Less than
35 cm (1.1 ft.)
Rear:
Less than
25 cm (0.8 ft.)
(continuous) (blinking) (continuous)
350
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Center sensors
*: 4 sensor type contains only rear sensors
Approximate
distance to
obstacle
*
4 sensor type
8 sensor type
Optitron type
meter
Accessory
meter (insert
display)
Front:
100 cm (3.3 ft.) to
50 cm (1.6 ft.)
Rear:
150 cm (4.9 ft.) to
65 cm (2.1 ft.)
(blinking
slowly)
(continuous)
(blinking
slowly)
Front:
50 cm (1.6 ft.) to
37.5 cm (1.2 ft.)
Rear:
65 cm (2.1 ft.) to
50 cm (1.6 ft.)
(blinking) (continuous) (blinking)
Front:
37.5 cm (1.2 ft.) to
30 cm (1.0 ft.)
Rear:
50 cm (1.6 ft.) to
40 cm (1.3 ft.)
(blinking rapidly)
(continuous)
(blinking rapidly)
Front:
Less than
30 cm (1.0 ft.)
Rear:
Less than
40 cm (1.3 ft.)
(continuous) (blinking) (continuous)
351
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Buzzer operation and distance to an obstacle
A beep sounds when the corner sensors and center sensors are
operating.
The buzzer beeps faster as the vehicle approaches an obstacle.
When the vehicle comes within the following distance of the
obstacle, the buzzer sounds continuously.
Front corner sensors: Approximately 35 cm (1.1 ft.)
Front center sensors: Approximately 30 cm (1.0 ft.)
Rear corner sensors: Approximately 25 cm (0.8 ft.)
Rear center sensors: Approximately 40 cm (1.3 ft.)
When 2 or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, the
buzzer system responds to the nearest obstacle.
Sensors that operate
4 sensor type
352
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
8 sensor type
Detection range of the sensors
Approximately 100 cm (3.3 ft.)
Approximately 150 cm (4.9 ft.)
Approximately 60 cm (2.0 ft.)
Approximately 55 cm (1.8 ft.)
The diagram shows the detection
range of the sensors. Note that
the sensors may not be able to
detect obstacles that are
extremely close to the vehicle.
The range of the sensors may
change depending on the shape
of the object etc.
*: If equipped
Forward Backward
*
*
353
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Sensor detection information
Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect
the ability of a sensor to correctly detect an obstacle. Particular instances
where this may occur are listed below.
There is dirt, snow or ice on a sensor.
A sensor is frozen.
A sensor is covered in any way.
The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.
On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass.
The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle
engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing
ultrasonic waves.
There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the
vicinity.
A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.
The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or radio antenna.
Towing eyelets are installed.
A bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.
The vehicle is approaching a tall or right-angled curb.
In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.
A non-genuine Toyota suspension (lowered suspension etc.) is
installed.
In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of
their shape, signs and other objects may be judged by a sensor to be closer
than they are.
354
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Pay
particular attention to the following obstacles:
Wires, fences, ropes, etc.
Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves
Sharply-angled objects
Low obstacles
Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction
of your vehicle
If the vehicle indicator remains on while the rear corner and rear center
indicators flash and the malfunction beep sounds for approximately 8
seconds. (vehicles with a non- optitron type meter)
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repair, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional.
If the vehicle indicator and the rear corner and rear center indicators
flash and the malfunction beep sounds for approximately 8 seconds.
(vehicles with a non- optitron type meter)
Clean the sensors with soft cloth.
If a message is displayed (vehicles with an optitron type meter)
P. 718
Customization that can be configured at any authorized Toyota dealer
or repair, or another duly qualified and equipped professional
Setting of buzzer volume can be changed.
(Customizable features
P. 849)
355
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Caution when using the Toyota parking assist-sensor
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely
and possibly cause an accident.
Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 10 km/h (6 mph).
Do not attach any accessories within the sensor range.
NOTICE
Notes when washing the vehicle
Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.
356
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Rear view monitor system (vehicles with an accessory meter)
: If equipped
The rear view monitor assists the driver by displaying an image of
the area behind the vehicle while reversing. The image is displayed
in reverse on the screen. This reversed image is a similar image to
the one on the inside rear view mirror.
Vehicles with a navigation system
For the advanced parking guidance system, refer to the “Naviga-
tion System Owner’s Manual”.
Vehicles without a navigation system
The rear view image is dis-
played when the shift lever is
in the R position.
Vehicles with an automatic
transmission
Vehicles with a manual
transmission
If the shift lever is shifted out of
R, the screen returns to the
previous one.
357
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Displayed area
Vehicles with back door mounted spare tire
Vehicles without back door mounted spare tire
The area covered by the camera is lim-
ited. Objects which that are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the spare
wheel cover cannot be seen on the
screen.
The area displayed on the screen may
vary depending on vehicle orientation or
road conditions.
Corners of bumper
The area covered by the camera is lim-
ited. Objects which that are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper cannot be seen on the screen.
The area displayed on the screen may
vary depending on vehicle orientation or
road conditions.
Corners of bumper
358
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Rear view monitor camera
When the back door is open
The screen cannot be used because a message is displayed.
When backing up the vehicle, make sure the back door is securely closed.
Vehicles with back door
mounted spare tire
Vehicles without back door
mounted spare tire
In the following cases, it may be difficult
to see images on the screen even when
the system is functioning correctly:
The vehicle is in a dark area, such as at
night.
The temperature near the lens is
extremely high or low.
Water droplets are on the camera lens
or humidity is high, such as when it
rains.
Foreign matter, such as snow and mud,
adheres to the camera lens.
The sun or headlights are shining
directly into the camera lens.
359
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Smear effect
CAUTION
When using the rear view monitor system
Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in
death or serious injuries:
Never depend solely on the monitor system when reversing.
Always check visually and with the mirrors to confirm your intended path is
clear.
Depicted distances between objects and flat surfaces differ from actual
distances.
If a bright light, such as sunlight reflected
off the vehicle body, is picked up by the
camera, a smear effect
* characteristic to
the camera may occur.
*: Smear effectA phenomenon that
occurs when a bright light is picked up
by the camera; when transmitted by
the camera, the light source appears to
have a vertical streak above and below
it.
360
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Conditions which may affect the rear view monitor system
If the back of the vehicle has been hit, the camera’s position and mounting
angle may have changed. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional.
Rapid temperature changes, such as when hot water is poured on the
vehicle in cold weather, may cause the system to function abnormally.
If the camera lens is extremely dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image.
Rinse with water and wipe with a soft cloth. If the camera lens is extremely
dirty, wash with a mild cleanser and rinse.
The displayed image may be darker and moving images may be slightly
distorted when the system is cold.
361
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Wide view front & side monitor (vehicles with an accessory meter)
: If equipped
This system can display the wide view front monitor and the side
monitor.
The wide view front monitor uses a super-wide angle lens to display
on screen the areas to the left and right of the vehicle and the blind
spots to the front of the vehicle. This system helps the driver check
for approaching cars, bicycles and pedestrians when at intersec-
tions with poor visibility.
The side monitor uses a camera installed in the passengers side
outside rear view mirror to display on screen the area to the right
(left-hand drive vehicles) or left (right-hand drive vehicles) of the
vehicle, helping the driver check this area.
Vehicles with a navigation system
Refer to the “Navigation System Owners Manual”.
Vehicles without a navigation system
On/off
The camera image is displayed
when the wide view front &
side monitor switch is pressed.
362
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Changing the display
The screen changes as follows with each press of the wide view
front & side monitor switch.
The wide view front monitor display and trip information are not acces-
sible when the shift lever is in R.
On vehicles with Multi-terrain Select, the Multi-terrain Monitor can be
switched to by pressing the wide view front & side monitor switch
while the system is operating.
Trip information
Wide view front monitor (Side monitor)
Side monitor (Wide view front monitor)
363
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Display
Wide view front monitor
The image from the front camera is displayed. Use this monitor to
help check the area in front of the vehicle for safety, for example in
intersections with poor visibility.
Side monitor
The image from the side camera is displayed. Use this monitor to
help check the area to the right (left-hand drive vehicles) or left
(right-hand drive vehicles) of the vehicle, for example when taking
off and stopping, when turning right (left-hand drive vehicles) or left
(right-hand drive vehicles), etc. (P. 364)
364
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Using the side monitor
Vehicle icon
Displays the image being shown
by the side monitor.
Front wheel contact point
Shows the position of the vehi-
cle’s front tire.
Vehicle front edge line
Shows the position of the vehi-
cle’s leading edge.
Vehicle width line
Indicates the width of the vehicle
including the outside rear view
mirror.
Rear wheel contact point
Shows the position of the vehi-
cle’s rear tire.
365
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Using the vehicle width line
Use the vehicle width line to
check the vehicle’s distance from
objects such as curbstones etc.
As shown in the illustration, be
sure that the vehicle width line
does not overlap the object. If
you also move the vehicle so
that the vehicle width line and
the object are parallel, you can
park parallel to the object.
366
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
The wide view front & side monitor can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
The vehicle speed is less than approximately 10 km/h (6 mph).
Automatic system cancelation
In the following situations, the system is canceled automatically.
When the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 12 km/h (7 mph).
When the shift lever is in R.
When the shift lever is in P. (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
When the outside rear view mirrors have been folded
The side monitor screen can be displayed even if the outside rear view mir-
rors have been folded. In this case, there will be a slight difference between
the image displayed when the outside rear view mirrors are extended and
when the outside rear view mirrors have been folded.
If the side monitor is displayed while the outside rear view mirrors are folded,
you cannot check the area near the front edge of the vehicle as the base of
the outside rear view mirrors will be in the way.
367
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Displayed area
The area covered by the camera is limited. Objects which are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be seen on the screen.
The area displayed on the screen may vary according to vehicle orientation
or road conditions.
Front camera
Masking
This section is masked to prevent the
driver from moving the vehicle while
only watching the wide view front mon-
itor screen. The driver must visually
confirm this area directly.
Camera’s field of view
Objects visible to the camera
Objects not visible to the camera
Parts of the vehicle (bumper, grill, etc.)
368
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Side camera
The above illustrations are for a left-hand drive vehicle. In addition, the dis-
played area is reversed for right-hand drive vehicles.
Camera’s field of view
Objects visible to the camera
Passenger’s side of vehicle
369
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Wide view front & side monitor cameras
The above illustration is for a left-hand drive vehicle. In addition, the side
camera is reversed for right-hand drive vehicles.
In the following cases, it may be difficult to see images on the screen even
when the system is functioning correctly:
The vehicle is in a dark area, such as at night.
The temperature near the lens is extremely high or low.
Water droplets are on the camera lens or humidity is high, such as when
it rains.
Foreign matter, such as snow and mud, adheres to the camera lens.
The sun or headlights are shining directly into the camera lens.
The camera lens is damaged by flying stones.
Side camera
Front camera
370
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Smear effect
CAUTION
When using the wide view front & side monitor system
Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in
death or serious injuries.
Never depend solely on the monitor system.
Always check visually and with the mirrors to confirm your intended path is
clear.
Depicted distances between objects and flat surfaces differ from actual
distances.
Do not use the system if the hood or doors are open.
If a bright light, such as sunlight reflected
off the vehicle body, is picked up by the
camera, a smear effect
* characteristic to
the camera may occur.
*: Smear effectA phenomenon that
occurs when a bright light is picked up
by the camera; when transmitted by
the camera, the light source appears to
have a vertical streak above and below
it. The vertical streak also appears in
the masked areas.
371
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Conditions which may affect the wide view front & side monitor system
If the front of the vehicle or the passenger side outside rear view mirror
has been hit, the camera’s position and mounting angle may have
changed. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
Rapid temperature changes, such as when hot water is poured on the
vehicle in cold weather, may cause the system to function abnormally.
If the camera lens is extremely dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image.
Rinse with water and wipe with a soft cloth. If the camera lens is extremely
dirty, wash with a mild cleanser and rinse.
The displayed image may be darker and moving images may be slightly
distorted when the system is cold.
Situations unsuitable for wide view front & side monitor
On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow.
When using tire chains or emergency tires.
On roads that are not flat or straight, such as curves or slopes.
If the tires are changed, the position of the guide lines displayed on the
screen may be incorrect. When changing the tires, consult any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional.
Depending on the circumstances of the vehicle (number of passengers,
amount of luggage, etc.), the position of the guide lines displayed on the
screen may change. Be sure to check visually behind and all around the
vehicle before proceeding.
372
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
NOTICE
When using the wide view front & side monitor
Even if an obstacle is no longer visible on the side monitor, do not turn the
steering wheel further in the direction the vehicle is turning until the vehicle
has moved completely past the obstacle. If the steering wheel is turned to
full lock, the vehicle will turn in the smallest possible turning circle, and may
collide with the obstacle.
373
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Driving assist systems
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following sys-
tems operate automatically in response to various driving situations.
Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and
should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface
Multi Terrain ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) (vehicles with a
Multi-terrain Select system)
Refer to the “Off-road Driving Owner’s Manual”
Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation
VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning
on slippery road surfaces
TRC (Traction Control) for 2TR-FE engines and H4 mode on
1GR-FE and 1KD-FTV engines
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the 4 wheels from spinning
when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads
Active TRC (Traction Control) for L4 mode on 1GR-FE and
1KD-FTV engines
*
Refer to the “Off-road Driving Owner’s Manual”
374
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
When the VSC/TRC systems are operating
If the vehicle is in danger of slip-
ping or if any of the drive wheels
spins, the slip indicator flashes to
indicate that the VSC/TRC sys-
tems are operating.
A buzzer (intermittent) sounds to
indicate that VSC is operating.
Hill-start assist control (if equipped)
Refer to the “Off-road Driving Owner’s Manual”
KDSS (Kinetic Dynamic Suspension System) (if equipped)
Refer to the “Off-road Driving Owner’s Manual”
PCS (Pre-Crash Safety system) (if equipped)
P. 380
Emergency brake signal (if equipped)
When the brakes are applied suddenly, the stop lights automatically
flash to alert the vehicle behind.
*: The function only works in vehicles with Multi-terrain Select when Multi
terrain Select is switched on
375
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Disabling the TRC/VSC systems
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, the TRC/VSC systems
may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to
turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
Turning off TRC system only
To turn the TRC system off,
quickly press and release the
button.
The “TRC OFF” indicator light will
come on or the TRC OFF will be
shown on the multi-information
display.
Press the button again to turn the
system back on.
*
1
: Vehicles with an optitron type
meters
*
2
: Vehicles with a non-optitron
type meters
*
1
*
2
376
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Turning off both TRC and VSC systems
To turn the TRC and VSC sys-
tems off, press and hold the but-
ton for 3 seconds and more while
the vehicle is stopped.
The VSC OFF indicator light will
come on and the “TRC OFF” indi-
cator light will come on or TRC
OFF will be shown on the multi-
information display.
Press the button again to turn the
system back on.
*
1
: Vehicles with an optitron type
meters
*
2
: Vehicles with a non-optitron
type meters
*
1
*
2
377
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC and TRC
systems
A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is
started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indi-
cate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are
operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.
Reactivation of the TRC/VSC systems after turning off the engine
Turning off the engine after turning off the TRC/VSC systems will automati-
cally reactivate them.
Reactivation of the TRC system linked to vehicle speed
When only the TRC system is turned off, the TRC system will turn on when
vehicle speed increases. However, when both TRC and VSC systems are
turned off, the systems will not turn on even when vehicle speed increases.
When the brake system operates continuously
The brake actuator may overheat. In this case, the TRC (vehicles other than
2TR-FE engines) will stop operating, a buzzer will sound and the “TRC OFF”
indicator will come on (non-optitron type meters) or the TRC OFF will be
shown on the multi-information display (optitron type meters). Refrain from
using the system until the “TRC OFF” indicator turns off (non-optitron type
meters) or the message goes off (optitron type meters). (There is no problem
with continuing normal driving.)
378
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
If the slip indicator comes on...
It may indicate a malfunction in the VSC or TRC system. Consult any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional.
CAUTION
The ABS does not operate effectively when
The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as
excessively worn tires on a snow covered road).
The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick
road.
Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of nor-
mal conditions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you especially in the fol-
lowing situations:
When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
When driving with tire chains
When driving over bumps in the road
When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven surfaces
TRC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slip-
pery road surfaces, even if the TRC system is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
379
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When the VSC is activated
The slip indicator light flashes and a warning buzzer sounds. Always drive
carefully.
Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the
indicator light flashes and a buzzer sounds.
When the TRC/VSC systems are turned off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road condi-
tions. As these are the systems to help enhance vehicle stability and driving
force, do not turn the TRC/VSC systems off unless necessary.
Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total
load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure level.
The ABS and VSC will not function correctly if different tires are installed on
the vehicle.
Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional for further information when replacing tires or
wheels.
Handling of tires and the suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect
the driving assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction.
380
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
PCS (Pre-Crash Safety system)
: If equipped
When the radar sensor detects that a frontal collision is highly likely
or even unavoidable, safety systems such as the brakes and seat
belts are automatically engaged to lessen impact as well as vehicle
damage.
Pre-crash seat belts (front seat belts only)
If the pre-crash sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable,
the pre-crash safety system will retract the seat belt before the
collision occurs.
The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking
or loses control of the vehicle. (P. 124)
However, when the VSC system is disabled, the system will not
operate in the event of skidding.
Pre-crash brake assist
When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system
applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the
brake pedal is depressed.
Pre-crash braking
When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system
warns the driver using a warning light, warning display and
buzzer. If the system determines that a collision is unavoidable,
the brakes are automatically applied to reduce the collision
speed. Pre-crash braking can be disabled using the pre-crash
braking off switch.
AVS (Adaptive Variable Suspension System) control (if
equipped)
When the system determines that there is a high possibility of a
frontal collision, the AVS optimizes the damping effect
(
Refer to the “Off-road Driving Owner’s Manual”)
381
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Disabling pre-crash braking
Pre-crash braking disabled
Pre-crash braking enabled
The “PCS” warning light turns on
when pre-crash braking is dis-
abled.
Radar sensor
The radar sensor detects vehi-
cles or other obstacles on or
near the road ahead and deter-
mines whether a collision is
imminent based on the position,
speed, and heading of the obsta-
cles.
382
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
The pre-crash safety system is operational when
Pre-crash seat belts (situation 1):
Vehicle speed is greater than about 5 km/h (4 mph).
The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the
vehicle running ahead of you is greater than about 30 km/h (19 mph).
The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
Pre-crash seat belts (situation 2):
Vehicle speed greater than about 30 km/h (19 mph).
The system detects sudden braking or skidding.
The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
Pre-crash brake assist:
Vehicle speed is greater than about 30 km/h (19 mph).
The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the
vehicle running ahead of you is greater than about 30 km/h (19 mph).
The brake pedal is depressed.
Pre-crash braking:
The pre-crash braking off switch is not pressed.
Vehicle speed is greater than about 15 km/h (10 mph).
The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the
vehicle running ahead of you is greater than about 15 km/h (10 mph).
AVS (Adaptive Variable Suspension System) control (if equipped):
Vehicle speed is greater than about 5 km/h (4 mph).
The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the
vehicle running ahead of you is greater than about 30 km/h (19 mph).
383
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no possibility of
a collision
When there is an object by the roadside at the entrance to a curve
When passing an oncoming vehicle on a curve
When driving over a narrow iron bridge
When there is a metal object on the road surface
When driving on an uneven road surface
When passing an oncoming vehicle on a right-turn (right-hand drive vehi-
cles) or left-turn (left-hand drive vehicles)
When your vehicle rapidly closes on the vehicle in front
When a grade separation/interchange, sign, billboard, or other structure
appears to be directly in the vehicle’s line of travel
When a billboard or other metallic structure appears to be in the direct
line of travel due to driving on a hill.
When an extreme change in vehicle height occurs
When the axis of the radar is out of adjustment
When passing through certain toll gates
When driving on a bridge
When the system is activated in the situations described above, there is also
a possibility that the seat belts will retract quickly and the brakes will be
applied with a force greater than normal. When the seat belt is locked in the
restricted position, stop the vehicle in a safe place, release the seat belt and
refasten it.
384
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Situations in which the pre-crash safety system does not function
properly
The system may not function effectively in situations such as the following:
On roads with sharp bends or uneven surfaces
If a vehicle suddenly moves in front of your vehicle, such as at an inter-
section
If a vehicle suddenly cuts in front of your vehicle, such as when overtak-
ing
In inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or sand storms
When your vehicle is skidding with the VSC system off
When an extreme change in vehicle height occurs
When the axis of the radar is out of adjustment
Automatic cancelation of Pre-crash safety system
When a malfunction occurs due to sensor contaminations, etc. that results in
the sensors being unable to detect obstacles, the pre-crash safety system
will be automatically disabled. In this case, the system will not activate even
if there is a collision possibility.
Obstacles not detected
The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as traffic cones. There may
also be occasions when the radar sensor cannot detect pedestrians, ani-
mals, bicycles, motorcycles, trees, or snowdrifts.
When there is a malfunction in the system
Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (P. 718)
385
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Certification
386
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
387
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Limitations of the pre-crash safety system
Do not overly rely on the pre-crash safety system. Always drive safely, taking
care to observe your surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other
road hazards.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
Cautions regarding the assist contents of the system
By means of alarms and brake control, the pre-crash safety system is
intended to assist the driver in avoiding collisions through the process of
LOOK-JUDGE-ACT. There are limits to the degree of assistance the system
can provide, so please keep in mind the following important points.
Assisting the driver in watching the road
The pre-crash safety system is only able to detect obstacles directly in
front of the vehicle, and only within a limited range. It is not a mechanism
that allows careless or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can
assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for the driver
to pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.
Assisting the driver in making correct judgment
When attempting to estimate the possibility of a collision, the only data
available to the pre-crash safety system is that from obstacles it has
detected directly in front of the vehicle. Therefore, it is absolutely neces-
sary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine whether or not there
is a possibility of collision in any given situation.
Assisting the driver in taking action
The pre-crash safety system’s braking assist feature is designed to help
reduce the severity of a collision, and so only acts when the system has
judged that a collision is unavoidable. This system by itself is not capable
of automatically avoiding a collision or bringing the vehicle to a stop safety.
For this reason, when encountering a dangerous situation the driver must
take direct and immediate action in order to ensure the safety of all
involved.
388
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
Apply the brakes as necessary in any of the following situations.
When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the
functioning of the sensor
When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the lug-
gage compartment etc.)
Vehicles that cut in suddenly
Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)
Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
Handling the radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the pre-crash safety system can function
effectively:
Keep the sensor and front grille clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and front grille with a soft cloth so you do not mark or
damage them.
Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may become
inaccurate or malfunction. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a
strong impact, always have the area inspected and adjusted by any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional.
Do not disassemble the sensor.
Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille or surrounding
area.
Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover.
389
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Diesel Particulate Filter system (diesel engine only)
DPF system failure warning
If the DPF system warning light comes on (vehicle with non-opti-
tron type meters) or the DPF system warning message “DPF FULL
SEE OWNER’S MANUAL” appears on the display (vehicle with an
optitron type meters), Driving continuously. (P. 716, 741)
If the DPF system warning light flashes (vehicle with non-optitron
type meters) or the DPF system warning message “DPF FULL
ENGINE SERVICE REQUIRED” appears on the display (vehicle
with an optitron type meters), have the vehicle inspected by any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional, immediately. (P. 707, 722)
: If equipped
When the deposit collected by the filter reaches a predetermined
amount, it is automatically regenerated.
Regeneration
Regeneration is performed as necessary in accordance with
driving conditions.
System characteristics
The DPF system has the following characteristics:
Idle speed increases during regeneration
The smell of the exhaust gas differs from that of a conven-
tional diesel vehicle
390
2-4. Using other driving systems
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Replacing the engine oil
Make sure to use an oil of the recommended grade or of matching quality.
(P. 827)
DPF system warning
Under the following driving conditions, the DPF system warning light or mes-
sage may come on earlier than normal.
*
When only driving at low speeds (for example 20 km/h [12 mph] or
below).
If the engine is turned on and off frequently (if the engine is not left run-
ning for more than 10 minutes at a time).
*: Differs in accordance with weather, driving conditions, etc.
CAUTION
Exhaust pipe
Do not touch the exhaust pipe during regeneration, as the exhaust pipe and
exhaust gases will become particularly hot. Also, make sure that there are
no people or flammable materials near the exhaust pipe while the vehicle is
stopped.
Failure to do so may cause injury by burning or a fire.
If the malfunction indicator light comes on
The malfunction indicator light comes on if you continue driving while the
DPF system warning light is flashing (vehicles with non-optitron type
meters), or the DPF warning message “DPF FULL ENGINE SERVICE
REQUIRED” appears on the display (vehicles with a optitron type meters). In
this event, damage may be caused to the vehicle or an accident may occur.
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional, immediately.
391
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
NOTICE
To prevent the DPF system from failing
Vehicles with non-optitron type meters: Do not drive for long periods of
time while the DPF system warning light is flashing
Vehicles with an optitron type meters: Do not drive for long periods of time
while the DPF system warning message “DPF FULL ENGINE SERVICE
REQUIRED” appears on the display.
Do not use fuel other than the specified type
Do not use engine oil other than the recommended type
Do not modify the exhaust pipe
392
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage
Roof luggage carrier (if equipped)
Roof luggage carrier components
Roof rail
Cross rail
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions,
cargo capacity and load:
Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever
possible.
Be sure all items are secured in place.
To maintain vehicle balance while driving, position luggage
evenly within the luggage compartment.
For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
393
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compartment:
Receptacles containing gasoline
Aerosol cans
Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever possible.
Do not stack anything in the luggage compartment higher than the seat-
backs.
Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle
in the event of a sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the item
may get under the clutch, brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the ped-
als from being depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or hit the
driver or passengers, causing an accident:
At the feet of the driver
On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
On the luggage cover
On the instrument panel
On the dashboard
394
2-5. Driving information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Storage precautions
Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure
someone in the event of a sudden braking, sudden swerving or an acci-
dent.
When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be place directly
behind the front seats.
Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not designed
for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts prop-
erly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or seri-
ous bodily injury, in the event of a sudden braking, sudden swerving or an
accident.
Roof luggage carrier precautions
To use the roof rails as a roof luggage carrier, you must fit the roof rails with
two or more genuine Toyota cross rails or their equivalent.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions and precautions when installing the
cross rails or their equivalent.
Load and distribution
Do not overload your vehicle.
Do not apply loads unevenly.
Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control
which may cause death or serious injury.
395
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When loading cargo
Observe the following precautions:
Place the cargo so that its weight is distributed evenly between the front
and rear axles.
If loading long or wide cargo, never exceed the vehicle overall length or
width. (P. 812)
Before driving, make sure the cargo is securely fastened on the roof lug-
gage carrier.
Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of gravity of
the vehicle higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden
braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or
vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly and result in
death or serious injury.
If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, stop the
vehicle now and then during the trip to make sure the cargo remains in its
place.
Do not exceed 80 kg (176 lb.) cargo weight on the roof luggage carrier.
NOTICE
When loading cargo (vehicles with a moon roof)
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the moon roof.
396
2-5. Driving information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving
the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropri-
ate to the prevailing weather conditions.
Pre-winter preparations
Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside tem-
peratures.
Engine oil
Engine coolant
Washer fluid
Have a service technician inspect the level and specific grav-
ity of battery electrolyte.
Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set
of tire chains for the rear tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains
match the size of the tires.
397
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions:
Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is
frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice.
Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents
in front of the windshield.
Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.
Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow
that may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the
brakes.
When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suit-
able to road conditions.
When parking the vehicle (in the winter time or in the cold
latitudes)
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P (automatic trans-
mission) or 1 or R (manual transmission) without setting the
parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it
from being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent
inadvertent sliding or creeping.
398
2-5. Driving information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Selecting tire chains
Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the snow chains.
Chain size is regulated for each tire size.
Side chain
(5 mm [0.20 in.] in diameter)
Cross chain
(6.3 mm [0.25 in.] in diameter)
Regulations on the use of tire chains
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on loca-
tion and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing
chains.
1
2
ITY25C045
Tire chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:
Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
Install tire chains on the rear tires. Do not install tire chains on the front
tires.
Install tire chains on rear tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains
after driving 0.5 - 1.0 km (1/4 - 1/2 mile).
Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.
399
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or
serious injury.
Use tires of the specified size.
Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
Do not drive at speeds in excess of the speed limit or the speed limit spec-
ified for the snow tires being used.
Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
Driving with tire chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely,
and may cause death or serious injury.
Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being
used, or 50 km/h (30 mph), whichever is lower.
Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect
vehicle handling.
Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle con-
trol is maintained.
400
2-5. Driving information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger carrying vehicle.
Towing a trailer will have an adverse effect on handling, perfor-
mance, braking, durability, and fuel consumption. Your safety and
satisfaction depend on the proper use of correct equipment and cau-
tious driving habits. For your safety and the safety of others, do not
overload the vehicle or trailer.
To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in
accordance with the trailers characteristics and operating condi-
tions.
Toyota warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by
towing a trailer for commercial purposes.
Ask your local authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional for further details before towing,
as there are additional legal requirements in some countries.
Weight limits
Check the allowable towing capacity, GVM (Gross Vehicle
Mass), MPAC (Maximum Permissible Axle Capacity), and per-
missible draw bar load before towing. (P. 812)
Towing hitch/bracket
Toyota recommends the use of the Toyota hitch/bracket for your
vehicle. Other products of a suitable nature and comparable
quality may also be used.
401
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Selecting a trailer ball
Use the correct trailer ball for your application.
Trailer ball load rating
Matches or exceeds the gross
trailer weight rating of the trailer.
Ball diameter
Matches the size of the trailer
coupler. Most couplers are
stamped with the required trailer
ball size.
Shank length
Protrudes beyond the bottom of
the lock washer and nut at least 2
threads.
Shank diameter
Matches the ball mount hole
diameter size.
Connecting trailer lights
Use the wire harness stored in the rear end.
402
2-5. Driving information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Important points regarding trailer loads
Total trailer weight and permissible drawbar load
Total trailer weight
Weight of the trailer itself plus the
trailer load should be within the
maximum towing capacity.
Exceeding this weight is danger-
ous. (P. 812)
When towing a trailer, use a fric-
tion coupler or friction stabilizer
(sway control device).
When the total trailer weight is
over 2000 kg (4409 lb.), a friction
stabilizer (sway control device) is
required.
Permissible drawbar load
Allocate the trailer load so that
the drawbar load is greater than
25 kg (55.1 lb.) or 4 % of the tow-
ing capacity. Do not let the draw-
bar load exceed the indicated
weight. (P. 812)
403
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Information tag (manufacturer’s label)
Type A
Gross vehicle mass
Maximum permissible rear
axle capacity
Type B
404
2-5. Driving information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Gross vehicle mass
Vehicle category M1 models
*:
The combined weight of the driver, passengers, luggage, towing hitch,
total curb mass and drawbar load should not exceed the gross vehicle
mass by more than 100 kg (220.5 lb.). Exceeding this weight is danger-
ous.
Vehicle category N1 models*:
The combined weight of the driver, passengers, cargo, towing hitch, total
curb mass and drawbar load must not exceed the gross vehicle mass.
Exceeding this weight is dangerous.
Maximum permissible rear axle capacity
Vehicle category M1 models
*:
The weight borne by the rear axle should not exceed the maximum per-
missible axle capacity by 15 % or more. Exceeding this weight is danger-
ous.
Vehicle category N1 models*:
The weight borne by the rear axle should not exceed the maximum per-
missible axle capacity. Exceeding this weight is dangerous.
The values for towing capacity were derived from testing conducted at sea
level. Take note that engine output and towing capacity will be reduced at
high altitudes.
405
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
*: To distinguish the vehicle category, ask any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
CAUTION
Vehicle category M1 models*: When the gross vehicle mass limit or
maximum permissible axle capacity is exceeded
Do not exceed the established speed limit for towing a trailer in built-up
areas or 100 km/h (63 mph), whichever is lower.
Failing to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or
serious injury.
406
2-5. Driving information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
When connecting and disconnecting a trailer (vehicles with rear height
control air suspension)
Connecting
Set the rear height control air suspension to LO mode.
Turn off the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the rear height con-
trol air suspension.
Connect the trailer.
Turn on the switch that was turned off on step 2.
Set the rear height control air suspension to N mode.
Disconnecting
Set the rear height control air suspension to LO mode.
Turn off the rear height control air suspension.
Turn off the “ENGINE START STOP” switch.
Set the supporting leg of a trailer on the ground and raise the hitch
by 100 mm (4 in.).
Turn on the “ENGINE START STOP” switch.
Turn on the rear height control air suspension.
Wait until vehicle height is stabilized.
Make sure the hitch is disconnected. If the hitch does not disconnect, raise
the hitch higher and repeat steps 2 through 7.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
STEP
7
407
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Installation positions for the towing hitch/bracket and hitch ball
5-door models
78 mm (3.0 in.)
78 mm (3.0 in.)
53 mm (2.1 in.)
53 mm (2.1 in.)
53 mm (2.1 in.)
53 mm (2.1 in.)
1219 mm (48.0 in.)
137 mm (5.4 in.)
*
1
141 mm (5.6 in.)*
2
79 mm (3.1 in.)*
1
83 mm (3.3 in.)*
2
54 mm (2.1 in.)*
1
58 mm (2.3 in.)*
2
428 mm (16.9 in.)*
1
336 mm (13.2 in.)*
2
200 mm (7.9 in.)*
1
199 mm (7.8 in.)*
2
171 mm (6.7 in.)*
1
169 mm (6.7 in.)*
2
171 mm (6.7 in.)*
1
168 mm (6.6 in.)*
2
*
1
: Vehicles with rear height con-
trol air suspension
*
2
: Vehicles without rear height
control air suspension
408
2-5. Driving information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
3-door models
78 mm (3.0 in.)
78 mm (3.0 in.)
53 mm (2.1 in.)
53 mm (2.1 in.)
53 mm (2.1 in.)
53 mm (2.1 in.)
1110 mm (43.7 in.)
142 mm (5.6 in.)
84 mm (3.3 in.)
59 mm (2.3 in.)
327 mm (12.9 in.)
199 mm (7.8 in.)
169 mm (6.7 in.)
167 mm (6.6 in.)
409
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Tire information
On some models, increase the tire inflation pressure to 20.0 kPa (0.2
kgf/cm
2
or bar, 3 psi) greater than the recommended value when towing.
(P. 840)
Increase the air pressure of the trailer tires in accordance with the total
trailer weight and according to the values recommended by the manufac-
turer of your trailer.
Trailer lights
Check that the turn signal lights and stoplights are operating correctly every
time you hitch up the trailer. Directly wiring up to your vehicle may damage
the electrical system and stop the lights from functioning correctly.
Break-in schedule
Toyota recommends that vehicles fitted with new power train components
should not be used for towing trailers for the first 800 km (500 miles).
Safety checks before towing
Check that the maximum load limit for the towing hitch/bracket hitch ball
is not exceeded. Bear in mind that the coupling weight of the trailer will
add to the load exerted on the vehicle. Also make sure that the total load
exerted on the vehicle is within the range of the weight limits. (P. 402)
Ensure that the trailer load is secure.
Supplementary outside rear view mirrors should be added to the vehicle
if the traffic behind cannot be clearly seen with standard mirrors. Adjust
the extending arms of these mirrors on both sides of the vehicle so that
they always provide maximum visibility of the road behind.
410
2-5. Driving information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Maintenance
Maintenance must be performed more frequently when using the vehicle
for towing due to the greater weight burden placed on the vehicle com-
pared to normal driving.
Retighten all bolts securing the hitching ball and bracket after towing for
approximately 1000 km (600 miles).
CAUTION
To avoid accident or injury
For vehicles with the rear height control air suspension, set the vehicle
height to the low mode and turn off the electronically modulated air suspen-
sion to prevent the vehicle height from automatically changing.
NOTICE
When the rear bumper strengthening material is aluminum
Ensure the steel bracket part does not come directly in contact with that
area.
When steel and aluminum come into contact, there is a reaction similar to
corrosion, which will weaken the section concerned which may result in
damage. Apply a rust inhibitor to parts that will come in contact when attach-
ing a steel bracket.
411
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Guidance
Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. In order to
avoid accident, death or serious injury, keep the following in mind
when towing:
Checking connections between trailer and lights
Stop the vehicle and check the operation of the connection
between the trailer and lights after driving for a brief period as well
as before starting off.
Practicing driving with a coupled trailer
Get the feel for turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer
coupled by practicing in an area with no or light traffic.
When reversing with a coupled trailer, hold the section of the
steering wheel nearest to you and rotate clockwise to turn the
trailer left or counterclockwise to turn it right. Always rotate a lit-
tle at a time to prevent steering error. Have someone guide you
when reversing to lessen the risk of accident.
Increasing vehicle-to-vehicle distance
At a speed of 10 km/h (6 mph), the distance to the vehicle running
ahead of you should be equivalent to or greater than the combined
length of your vehicle and trailer. Avoid sudden braking that may
cause skidding. Otherwise, the vehicle may spin out of control.
This is especially true when driving on wet or slippery road sur-
faces.
412
2-5. Driving information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Sudden acceleration/steering input/cornering
Executing sharp turns when towing may result in the trailer collid-
ing with your vehicle. Decelerate well in advance when approach-
ing turns and take them slowly and carefully to avoid sudden
braking.
Important points regarding turning
The wheels of the trailer will travel closer to the inside of the curve
than the wheels of the vehicle. To make allowance for this, take the
turns wider than you would normally do.
Important points regarding stability
Vehicle movement resulting from uneven road surfaces and strong
crosswinds will affect handling. The vehicle may also be rocked by
passing buses or large trucks. Frequently check behind when mov-
ing alongside such vehicles. As soon as such vehicle movement
occurs, immediately start to decelerate smoothly by slowly apply-
ing the brakes. Always steer the vehicle straight ahead while brak-
ing.
Passing other vehicles
Consider the total combined length of your vehicle and trailer and
ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is sufficient before exe-
cuting lane changes.
413
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Transmission information
Refrain from driving in the 6th gear (6-speed manual transmission)
or 5th gear (5-speed manual transmission), 5 range in S mode
(multi-mode type automatic transmission) or 4 (standard type auto-
matic transmission) to maintain the effectiveness of the engine
brake and the charge performance of electrical components.
If the engine overheats
Towing a loaded trailer up a long, steep incline in temperatures
exceeding 30 C (85 F) may result in the engine overheating. If
the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is
overheating, turn the air conditioning off immediately, leave the
road and stop the vehicle in a safe place. (P. 803)
When parking the vehicle
Always place wheel chocks under the wheels of both the vehicle
and trailer. Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P
for automatic transmissions, and 1 or R for manual transmissions.
414
2-5. Driving information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Follow all the precautions described in this section. Failure to do so could
cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
Trailer towing precautions
When towing, make sure that none of the weight limits are exceeded.
(P. 402)
Vehicle speed in towing
Observe the legal maximum speeds for trailer towing.
Before descending hills or long declines
Reduce speed and downshift. Never downshift abruptly.
Operation of the brake pedal
Do not hold the brake pedal depressed often or for long periods of time.
Doing so may result in the brake overheating or reduce braking effects.
NOTICE
For vehicles with an emergency tire puncture repair kit (if equipped)
Do not tow anything if a tire that has been repaired using the emergency tire
puncture repair kit is installed. The load on the tire may cause unexpected
damage to the tire.
Do not directly splice trailer lights
Directly splicing trailer lights may damage your vehicle’s electrical system
and cause a malfunction.
415
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
416
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
3-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Front manual air
conditioning system........ 418
Front automatic air
conditioning system........ 425
Rear manual air
conditioning system........ 435
Rear automatic air
conditioning system........ 438
Heater idle up switch ........ 442
Power heater .................... 443
Rear window defogger
switch ............................. 444
Windshield wiper
de-icer ............................ 447
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system types........... 449
Using the radio.................. 453
Using the CD player.......... 458
Playing MP3 and
WMA discs...................... 468
Operating an iPod............. 477
Operating a
USB memory .................. 486
Optimal use of the
audio system .................. 496
Using the AUX port ........... 499
Using the steering wheel
audio switches ................ 501
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio
system
Bluetooth
®
audio
system ............................ 504
Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system .................. 511
Operating a Bluetooth
®
enabled portable
player.............................. 514
Setting up a Bluetooth
®
enabled portable
player.............................. 518
Bluetooth
®
audio
system setup .................. 522
3
Interior features
417
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
3-4. Using the hands-free system
(for mobile phone)
Hands-free system
(for mobile phone) .......... 523
Using the hands-free
system
(for mobile phone) .......... 532
Making a phone call.......... 539
Setting a mobile
phone ............................. 543
Security and system
setup............................... 546
Using the phone book....... 551
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list................ 557
Personal/interior light
main switch..................... 558
Personal/interior
lights ............................... 559
Lounge illumination
control switches .............. 560
3-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features ..... 562
Glove box ....................... 563
Card holder..................... 564
Console box.................... 565
Bottle holders/door
pockets ........................... 567
Cup holders .................... 569
Auxiliary boxes ............... 573
3-7. Other interior features
Cool box............................ 576
Sun visors ......................... 579
Vanity mirror ..................... 580
Clock................................. 581
Outside temperature
display ............................ 582
Ashtray.............................. 584
Conversation mirror .......... 585
Power outlet...................... 586
Seat heaters ..................... 590
Armrest ............................. 593
Coat hooks........................ 594
Assist grips ....................... 595
Floor mat........................... 596
Luggage compartment
features........................... 598
418
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Front manual air conditioning system
: If equipped
The illustration below is for left-hand drive vehicles.
The button positions and shapes may differ slightly for right-hand
drive vehicles.
Windshield defogger button
Fan speed control knob
Rear manual air conditioning
on/off button (if equipped)
Temperature control knob
Cooling and dehumidification
function on/off button (if equipped)
Outside/recirculated air mode button
Air outlet selector buttons
419
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Adjusting the settings
Basic setting
To turn on the air conditioning system and adjust the fan
speed, turn the fan speed control knob clockwise (increase) or
counterclockwise (decrease).
Turning the knob to “OFF” turns off the fan.
To adjust the temperature setting, turn the temperature control
knob clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool).
If the “A/C” button is not pressed, the system will blow ambient tem-
perature air or heated air.
To change the air outlets, press any button of , ,
or .
Air flow as shown below according to the mode selected.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
420
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Air flows to the upper body.
: Some models
Air flows to the upper body and
feet.
: Some models
Air flows to the feet.
: Some models
421
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger operates.
: Some models
Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press .
The mode switches between outside air mode (introduces air from out-
side the vehicle) (indicator off) and recirculated air mode (recycles air
inside the vehicle) (indicator on) each time the button is pressed.
422
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Defogging the windshield
Defogging
The air intake is automatically
switched to outside air mode.
Pressing the “A/C” button to turn
the cooling and dehumidification
function on clears the windshield
and side windows faster.
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Front center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
423
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Front side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
Rear outlets (vehicles without a rear manual air conditioning
system)
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
Using the system in recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if recirculated air mode is used for an
extended period of time.
424
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
When the indicator light on the “A/C” button flashes
Press the “A/C” button to turn off the cooling and dehumidification function
and turn it on again. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if
the indicator light continues to flash. Turn the air conditioning system off and
have it inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional.
When outside air temperature is below 0 °C (32 °F)
The cooling and dehumidification function may not operate even when the
“A/C” button is pressed.
Air conditioning odors
During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter
into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause
odor to be emitted from the vents.
To reduce potential odors from occurring:
It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
CAUTION
To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the wind-
shield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your
vision.
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is stopped.
425
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Front automatic air conditioning system
: If equipped
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the
temperature setting.
The illustration below is for left-hand drive vehicles.
The button positions and shapes may differ slightly for right-hand
drive vehicles.
Fan speed control button
Driver’s side temperature
control knob
Automatic
mode button
“OFF” button
Outside/recirculated air mode button
Pollen removal mode button
Dual mode button
Driver’s side temperature display
Fan speed display
Passenger’s
side
temperature
control knob
Air outlet display
Passenger’s side temperature display
Air outlet selector button
Rear air conditioning operating
mode button (if equipped)
Windshield defogger button
Cooling and dehumidification
function on/off button
426
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Using the automatic air conditioning system
Press the “AUTO” button.
The air conditioning system begins to operate. Air outlets and fan
speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature set-
ting.
Turn the “TEMP” knob (driver’s side) clockwise to increases
the temperature and turn the “TEMP” knob (drivers side)
counterclockwise to decreases the temperature.
When the “DUAL” button is pressed (the indicator on the “DUAL”
button is on) or the passenger’s side temperature control knob is
turned, the temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be
adjusted separately.
Adjusting the settings manually
Basic setting
To turn on the air conditioning system and adjust the fan
speed, press “” on to increase the fan speed and “
to decrease the fan speed.
Press to turn the fan off.
To adjust the temperature setting, turn the “TEMP” knob
(driver’s side) clockwise to increases the temperature and
turn the “TEMP” knob (driver’s side) counterclockwise to
decreases the temperature.
When the “DUAL” button is pressed (the indicator on the “DUAL”
button is on) or the passenger’s side temperature control knob is
turned, the temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be
adjusted separately.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
427
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
To change the air outlets, press the air outlet selector button.
The air outlets used are switched each time the button is pressed.
The air flow shown on the display indicates the following:
Air flows to the upper body.
*
1
: Only in the automatic mode (Air may not always flow.)
*
2
: Some models
Air flows to the upper body and
feet.
: Some models
STEP
3
428
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Air flows to the feet.
: Some models
Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger operates.
: Some models
Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press .
The mode switches between outside air mode (introduces air from
outside the vehicle) (indicator off) and recirculated air mode (recycles
air inside the vehicle) (indicator on) each time the button is pressed.
429
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Changing the rear seat settings (vehicles with a rear automatic
air conditioning system)
Adjusting the temperature setting
Press the “REAR” button.
“REAR” is shown on the display.
Turn the “TEMP” knob (passengers side) clockwise to
increases the temperature and turn the “TEMP” knob (pas-
senger’s side) counterclockwise to decreases the tempera-
ture.
Adjusting the fan speed
Press “” on to increase the fan speed and “” to decrease
the fan speed.
Press to turn the fan off.
Changing the air outlets
Press .
The air outlets switch each time the button is pressed (P. 439)
STEP
1
STEP
2
430
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Defogging the windshield
Defogging
The air conditioning system oper-
ates automatically.
Recirculated air mode may auto-
matically switch to outside air
mode when the ambient tempera-
ture is low.
Pollen removal mode button
Operates pollen removal mode
on/off.
Outside air mode switches to
recirculated air mode. Pollen is
removed from the air and the air
flows to the upper part of the
body.
Usually the system will turn off
automatically after approximately
3 minutes.
431
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Adjusting the position and opening and closing the air outlets
Front center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
Front side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
432
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Rear outlets (vehicles without a rear automatic air conditioning
system)
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting
and ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur.
Immediately after
the switch is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until
warm or cool air is ready to flow.
Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is
on.
Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Recirculated air mode or outside air mode may be automatically switched to
in accordance with the temperature setting, inside temperature, outside tem-
perature, etc.
433
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Using the system in recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used.
Window defogger feature
Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to outside air mode in situa-
tions where the windows need to be defogged.
Pollen removal mode
In order to prevent the windows from fogging up when the outside air is
cold, the following may occur.
Outside air mode does not switch to recirculated air mode.
The air conditioning system operates automatically.
The operation cancels after 1 minute.
In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press .
When the indicator light on the “A/C” button flashes
Press the “A/C” button to turn off the cooling and dehumidification function
and turn it on again. There may be a problem in the air conditioning control
system if the indicator light continues to flash. Turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off and have it inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional.
When outside air temperature is below 0 °C (32 °F)
The cooling and dehumidification function may not operate even when the
“A/C” button is pressed.
Using the rear automatic air conditioning system
When the rear automatic air conditioning system is on, the indicator light
on the “REAR” button is turned on.
If the system is left untouched for approximately 10 seconds after chang-
ing to the rear automatic air conditioning system, the control mode in the
front control panel returns to the front.
434
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Air conditioning odors
During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter
into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause
odor to be emitted from the vents.
To reduce potential odors from occurring:
It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time
immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic
mode.
Customization
Settings (e.g. A/C automatic mode button operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 849)
CAUTION
To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the wind-
shield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your
vision.
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is stopped.
435
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Rear manual air conditioning system
Using the rear manual air conditioning system
Press the “REAR” button on the front manual air conditioning control
panel.
Adjusting the settings
Adjusting the temperature setting
Turn the temperature control knob clockwise (warm) or counter-
clockwise (cool).
Changing the air outlets
Press any button of , or .
Air flows as shown below according to the mode selected.
: If equipped
Temperature control knob
Air outlet selector buttons
Fan speed control knob
436
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Air flows to the upper body.
Air flows to the upper body and
feet.
Air flows to the feet.
Adjusting the fan speed
Turn the air volume control knob clockwise (increase) or counter-
clockwise (decrease).
437
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Roof side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Turn the knob fully to the back
of the vehicle to close the
vent.
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is stopped.
438
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Rear automatic air conditioning system
Using automatic air conditioning system
Press the “AUTO” button.
The air conditioning system will operate, and air outlets and fan
speed will be adjusted automatically.
Press “” on the “TEMP” button to increase the temperature
and “” to decrease the temperature.
: If equipped
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the
temperature setting.
Automatic mode button Temperature display Fan speed display
Temperature
control button
Air outlet selector buttons
“OFF”
button
Fan speed
control
button
STEP
1
STEP
2
439
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Adjusting the settings manually
Adjusting the temperature setting
Press “” on the “TEMP” button to increase the temperature and
” to decrease the temperature.
Changing the air outlets
Press any button of , or .
Air flows as shown below according to the mode selected.
Air flows to the upper body.
440
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Air flows to the upper body and
feet.
Air flows to the feet.
Adjusting the fan speed
Press “” (increase) or “” (decrease) on .
Pressing turns off the fan.
441
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Adjusting the position and opening and closing the air outlets
Roof side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Turn the knob fully to the back
of the vehicle to close the
vent.
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is stopped.
442
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Heater idle up switch
: If equipped
Heater idle up switch can be operated when
The engine is running.
The engine coolant temperature is low.
This feature is used to boost heating effect in extremely cold condi-
tions when the vehicle is not moving.
Left-hand drive vehicles
Press the switch to increase
engine speed.
Press the switch again to
return the engine to the normal
idle speed. If you do not turn
the switch to off, the engine
speed is increased whenever
the engine is started.
Right-hand drive vehicles
Press the switch to increase
engine speed.
Press the switch again to
return the engine to the normal
idle speed. If you do not turn
the switch to off, the engine
speed is increased whenever
the engine is started.
443
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Power heater
: If equipped
Power heater can be operated when
The engine is running.
The engine coolant temperature is low.
This feature is used to heat the engine coolant, speed up warming of
the cab in cold weather, and keep the cab warm.
Left-hand drive vehicles
Turns the power heater on/off
If you do not turn the switch to
off, the engine speed is
increased whenever the
engine is started.
Right-hand drive vehicles
Turns the power heater on/off
If you do not turn the switch to
off, the engine speed is
increased whenever the
engine is started.
444
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Rear window defogger switch
Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove rain-
drops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors (if equipped).
The illustrations below are for left-hand drive vehicles.
The button positions and shapes may differ slightly for right-hand
drive vehicles.
Vehicles with a front manual air conditioning system
Vehicles without the out-
side rear view mirror defog-
gers
Vehicles with the outside
rear view mirror defoggers
Turns the defoggers on/off
The defoggers will automati-
cally turn off after their opera-
tion time. The operation time is
between 15 minutes and 270
minutes depending on the
ambient temperature and vehi-
cle speed.
A
B
445
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Vehicles with a front automatic air conditioning system
Vehicles without the out-
side rear view mirror defog-
gers
Vehicles with the outside
rear view mirror defoggers
Turns the defoggers on/off
The defoggers will automati-
cally turn off after their opera-
tion time. The operation time is
between 15 minutes and 270
minutes depending on the
ambient temperature and vehi-
cle speed.
A
B
446
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
The defoggers can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
The outside rear view mirror defoggers (vehicles with the outside rear
view mirror defoggers)
Turning the rear window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror
defoggers on.
CAUTION
When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on (vehicles with the
outside rear view mirror defoggers)
Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirrors, as they can
become very hot and burn you.
447
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Windshield wiper de-icer
: If equipped
This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the wind-
shield and wiper blades.
Left-hand drive vehicles
Turns the windshield wiper de-
icer on/off
The windshield wiper de-icer
will automatically turn off after
approximately 15 minutes.
Right-hand drive vehicles
Turns the windshield wiper de-
icer on/off
The windshield wiper de-icer
will automatically turn off after
approximately 15 minutes.
448
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
The windshield wiper de-icer can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
CAUTION
When the windshield wiper de-icer is on
Do not touch the lower part of the windshield or the side of the front pillars,
as the surfaces can become very hot and burn you.
449
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system types
: If equipped
Vehicles with a navigation system
Refer to the “Navigation System Owners Manual”.
Vehicles without a navigation system
Type A and B: CD player with AM/FM radio
Type C: CD player with a changer and AM/FM radio
Type A
450
3-2. Using the audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Type B
Type C
451
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Using mobile phones
Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a mobile
phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is
operating.
Title Page
Using the radio P. 453
Using the CD player P. 458
Playing MP3 and WMA discs P. 468
Operating an iPod P. 477
Operating a USB memory P. 486
Optimal use of the audio system P. 496
Using the AUX port P. 499
Using the steering switches P. 501
452
3-2. Using the audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Certification for the radio (for Italy)
IL PRODUTTORE PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome,
Meguro-Ku, Tokyo, Japan DI QUESTO APPARECCHIO MODELLO 86120-
60C00, 86120-60C20, 86120-60D20 (radio-CD player) DICHIARA CHE
ESSO E’ CONFORME AL D.M.28.08.1995 No.548, OTTEMPERANDO
ALLE PRESCRIZIONI DI CUI AL D.M.25.6.1985 (PARAGRAFO 3, ALL.A)
ED AL D.M.27.8.1987 (PARAGRAFO 3, ALL.I).
Certification for the disc player with a changer
This product is a class 1 laser product.
Do not open the cover of the player or attempt to repair the unit yourself.
Refer servicing to qualified personnel.
Laser power: No hazardous
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the engine off.
To avoid damaging the audio system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.
453
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Using the radio
Type A
Type B and C
TA mode
button
AM/FM mode buttons
AF mode
button
VolumePower
“PWR•VOL” knob
Preset station buttons
Frequency adjustment knob
Program type button
Auto preset button
Seek button
TA mode button
AM/FM mode buttons
AF mode
button
VolumePower
“PWR•VOL” knob
Preset station buttons
Frequency
adjustment knob
Auto preset
button
Seek button
Program type button
Mute button (type B only)
454
3-2. Using the audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Setting station presets
Manually operation
Search for the desired stations by turning the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob or pressing “” or “” on the “SEEK/
TRACK” button.
Press and hold the button (from the 1 button to the 6 button)
the station is to be set to until you hear a beep.
Automatically operation
Press and hold the “AST” button until you hear a beep.
Up to 6 stations are set in order of reception quality. When the
setting is complete, 2 beeps will be heard.
In the FM1 or FM2 mode, the stations automatically set by the
audio system will be set in the FM3 presets.
STEP
1
STEP
2
455
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
RDS (Radio Data System)
This feature allows your radio to receive station and program informa-
tion (classical, news, etc.) from radio stations which broadcast this
information.
Listening to stations of the same network
Press the “AF” button.
“AF-ON”, “REG-OFF” modes: A station among those of the same
network with strong reception is
selected.
“AF-ON”, “REG-ON” modes: A station among those of the same
network with strong reception and
broadcasting the same program is
selected.
Each time the “AF” button is pressed, the mode changes in the following
order:
“AF-ON”, “REG-OFF” “AF-ON”, “REG-ON” “AF-OFF”, “REG-OFF”.
Selecting program type
Press the “PTY” button.
Each time the “PTY” button is pressed, the program type changes in the
following order:
“NEWS” “SPORTS” “TALK” “POP” “CLASSICS”.
456
3-2. Using the audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Traffic information
Press the “TA” button.
TP mode: The system automatically switches to traffic information
when a broadcast with a traffic information signal is
received.
The station returns to the previous one when the traffic infor-
mation ends.
TA mode: Traffic information can be heard only when a signal is
received. The system switches to the mute mode when
a signal is not received. In CD or MP3/WMA mode, the
system automatically switches to traffic information
when a signal is received.
The audio system returns to the mute, CD or MP3/WMA
mode when the traffic information ends.
Audio system mode changes as follows each time the “TA” button
is pressed:
FM modes: “TP” “TA” off
Modes other than the radio modes: “TA” off
Emergency broadcast reception mode
“ALARM” appears in the display in the event that an emergency
broadcast is received, and the emergency broadcast is aired.
457
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Silencing the sound (type B)
Press the “MUTE” button.
Press the button again to turn the system back on.
EON (Enhanced Other Network) system (for traffic announcement
function)
If the RDS station (with EON data) you are listening to is not broadcasting a
traffic information program and the audio system is in the TA (traffic
announcement) mode, the radio will be switched automatically to a station
broadcasting a traffic information program in the EON AF list when traffic
information begins.
When the battery is disconnected
All preset stations are erased.
Reception sensitivity
It is difficult to maintain perfect radio reception at all times due to the con-
tinually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength
and surrounding objects, such as trains and transmitters.
When the “AST” button is used, automatic station selection and auto-
matic registering of the stations may not be possible.
The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear quarter window. To main-
tain clear radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other
metallic objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear quarter win-
dow.
Digital Audio Broadcast (DAB) radio
The optional radio antenna and tuner are necessary for the use of Digital
Audio Broadcast (DAB) radio.
458
3-2. Using the audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Using the CD player
Type A
Type B
VolumePower
“PWR•VOL” knob
Repeat play button
Playback button
Text button
Track selector button
Random playback button
Eject button
VolumePower
“PWR•VOL” knob
Repeat play button
Playback button
Text button
Track selector button
Random playback button
Eject button
Mute button
459
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Loading a CD
Loading a CD
Type A and B
Insert a CD.
Type C
Press the “LOAD” button.
“WAIT” is shown on the display.
When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green,
insert a CD.
The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”.
Type C
VolumePower
“PWR•VOL” knob
Playback button
Text button
Playback/Pause
button
Track selector
button
Random playback button
Eject button
Load button
CD selector buttons
Repeat play button
STEP
1
STEP
2
460
3-2. Using the audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Loading multiple CDs (type C)
Press and hold the “LOAD” button until you hear a beep.
“WAIT” is shown on the display.
When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green,
insert a CD.
The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”.
The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the CD is being
inserted.
When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green,
insert the next CD.
Repeat the procedure for the remaining CDs.
To cancel the operation, press the “LOAD” button. If you do not
insert a disc within 15 seconds, loading will be canceled automati-
cally.
Ejecting CDs
Ejecting a CD
Type A and B
Press and remove the CD.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
461
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Type C
To select the CD to be ejected,
press the 3 () or 4 () button.
The selected disc number is
shown on the display.
Press and remove the CD.
Ejecting all the CDs (type C)
Press and hold until you hear a beep, and then remove
the CDs.
Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
Selecting a track
Press “” to move up or “” to move down using the “SEEK/
TRACK” button until the desired track number is displayed.
Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on the “SEEK/
TRACK” button until you hear a beep.
STEP
1
STEP
2
462
3-2. Using the audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Selecting a CD (type C)
To select the desired CD, press the 3 () or 4 () button.
Playing and pausing tracks (type C)
To play or pause a track, press the “AST” ( ) button.
Random playback
Current CD
Press the 1 (RAND) button.
Songs are played in random order.
To cancel, press the 1 (RAND) button again.
All CDs (type C)
Press and hold the 1 (RAND) button until you hear a beep.
Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in random order.
To cancel, press the 1 (RAND) button again.
463
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Repeat play
Repeating a track
Press the 2 (RPT) button.
To cancel, press the 2 (RPT) button again.
Repeating all of the tracks on a CD (type C)
Press and hold the 2 (RPT) button until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press the 2 (RPT) button again.
Switching the display
Press the “TEXT” button.
Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following
order: Elapsed time CD title Track title.
Silencing the sound (type B)
Press the “MUTE” button.
Press the button again to turn the system back on.
464
3-2. Using the audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when
a problem is detected.
Display
Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
If there are 13 or more characters, pressing and holding the “TEXT” button
for 1 second or more enables to display the remaining characters.
A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.
If the “TEXT” button is pressed for more than 1 second again or has not
been operated for more than 6 seconds, the display will return to the first 12
characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed
properly or may not be displayed at all.
When “ERROR” or “WAIT” is shown on the display
“ERROR”: This indicates a trouble either in the CD or inside the player. The
CD may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down.
“WAIT”: This indicates that operation is stopped due to a high tempera-
ture inside the player. Wait for a while and then press the
“DISC•AUX” or “CD•AUX” button. If the CD still cannot be played
back, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional.
465
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc fea-
tures, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CDs with copy-protect features may not be used.
Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
If discs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for
extended periods of time
The discs may be damaged and may not play properly.
NOTICE
CDs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs, 8 cm (3 in.) CD adapters or Dual
Disc.
Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.
CDs that have a diameter that is not 12
cm (4.7 in.)
466
3-2. Using the audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
NOTICE
Low-quality and deformed CDs
CDs with a transparent or translucent
recording area
CDs that have tape, stickers or CD-R
labels attached to them, or that have
had the label peeled off
467
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
NOTICE
CD player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the
CDs or the player itself.
Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
Do not apply oil to the CD player.
Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.
Do not insert more than one CD at a
time.
468
3-2. Using the audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Playing MP3 and WMA discs
Type A
Type B
VolumePower
“PWR•VOL” knob
Playback button
Text button
File selector
button
Random playback button
Eject button
Folder selector buttons
File selector
knob
Repeat play button
VolumePower
“PWR•VOL” knob
Repeat play button
Playback button
Text button
File selector button
Random playback button
Eject button
Mute button
File selector
knob
Folder selector buttons
469
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs
P. 459, 460
Selecting MP3 and WMA discs
P. 462
Type C
VolumePower
“PWR•VOL” knob
Playback button
Text button
Playback/Pause
button
File selector
button
Random playback button
Eject button
Load button
Disc selector buttons
Repeat play button
File selector
knob
Folder selector buttons
470
3-2. Using the audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Selecting a folder
Selecting a folder one at a time
Press the 6 () or 5 () button to select the desired folder.
Returning to the first folder
Press and hold the 5
() button until you hear a beep.
Fast-forwarding and reversing files
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on the “SEEK/
TRACK” button until you hear a beep.
Selecting files
Turn the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob or press “” or “” on the
“SEEK/TRACK” button to select the desired file.
Playing and pausing files (type C)
To play or pause a file, press the “AST” ( ) button.
471
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Random playback
Playing files from a folder in random order
Press the 1 (RAND) button.
To cancel, press the 1 (RAND) button again.
Playing all the files from a disc in random order
Press and hold the 1 (RAND) button until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press the 1 (RAND) button again.
Repeat play
Repeating a file
Press the 2 (RPT) button.
To cancel, press the 2 (RPT) button again.
Repeating all the files in a folder
Press and hold the 2 (RPT) button until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press the 2 (RPT) button again.
472
3-2. Using the audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Switching the display
Press the “TEXT” button.
Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following
order: Folder no./File no./Elapsed time Folder name File name 
Album title (MP3 only) Track title Artist name
Silencing the sound (type B)
Press the “MUTE” button.
Press the button again to turn the system back on.
CD player protection feature
P. 464
Display
P. 464
When “ERROR”, “WAIT” or “NO MUSIC” is shown on the display
“ERROR”: This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the player.
The CD may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down.
“WAIT”: This indicates that operation is stopped due to a high tem-
perature inside the player. Wait for a while and then press the
“DISC•AUX” or “CD•AUX” button. If the CD still cannot be
played back, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer,
or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that an MP3/WMA file is not included in the CD.
473
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Discs that can be used
P. 465
Lens cleaners
P. 465
If discs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for
extended periods of time
P. 465
MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3
format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to
the media/formats on which the files are recorded.
MP3 file compatibility
Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and
monaural
474
3-2. Using the audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
WMA file compatibility
Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-
RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is
not finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the
disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.
Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used:
Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above
may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not
be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels (including the root)
Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
Maximum number of files per disc: 255
475
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those
with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
Discs containing multi-session recordings
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play
discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can
be played.
ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc
are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file
is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you
do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnec-
essary folders.
Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data
cannot be played.
476
3-2. Using the audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and
WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and
WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage
to the speakers.
Playback
To play MP3 file with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit
rate of least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances,
depending on the characteristics of the disc.
There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for
MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the
encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of
playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at
all.
When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may
take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may
not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trade-
marks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
NOTICE
CDs and adapters that cannot be used
P. 465
CD player precautions
P. 467
477
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Operating an iPod
: If equipped
Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle
speakers.
Connecting an iPod
Open the cover and connect an iPod using an iPod cable.
Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on.
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Vehicles with a manual transmission
Press the “DISC•AUX” or “CD•AUX” button.
STEP
1
STEP
2
478
3-2. Using the audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Control panel
Type A
Type B
VolumePower
“PWR•VOL” knob
Go back button
iPod menu/Song selector knob
Playback button
Text button
Song selector
button
Repeat play button
Playback/Pause button
Shuffle playback button
VolumePower
“PWR•VOL” knob
Playback/Pause button
Playback button
Text button
Song selector button
Shuffle playback button
Go back button
Mute button
iPod menu/Song selector knob
Repeat play button
479
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Selecting a play mode
Press the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob to select iPod
menu mode.
Turning the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob changes the
play mode in the following order:
“PLAYLISTS” “ARTISTS” “ALBUMS” “SONGS”
“PODCASTS” “GENRES” “COMPOSERS”
“AUDIOBOOKS”
Press the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob to select the
desired play mode.
Type C
VolumePower
“PWR•VOL” knob
Playback button
Text button
Playback/Pause
button
Song selector
button
Shuffle playback button
Repeat play button
Go back button
iPod menu/Song selector knob
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
480
3-2. Using the audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Play mode list
Selecting a list
Turn the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob to display the first
selection list.
Press the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob to select the
desired item.
Pressing the knob changes to the second selection list.
Repeat the same procedure to select the desired song name.
To return to the previous selection list, select “GO BACK” or press
the 4 ( ) or “AF” ( ) button.
Play mode
First
selection
Second
selection
Third
selection
Fourth
selection
“PLAYLISTS”
Playlists
select
Songs select - -
“ARTISTS” Artists select Albums select Songs select -
“ALBUMS” Albums select Songs select - -
“SONGS” Songs select - - -
“PODCASTS” Albums select Songs select - -
“GENRES” Genre select Artists select Albums select Songs select
“COMPOS-
ERS”
Composers
select
Albums select Songs select -
“AUDIO-
BOOKS”
Songs select - - -
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
481
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Selecting songs
Turn the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob or press “” or “” on the
“SEEK/TRACK” button to select the desired song.
Playing and pausing songs
To play or pause a song, press the 3 ( ) or “AST” ( ) button.
Fast-forwarding and rewinding songs
To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold “” or “” on the “SEEK/
TRACK” button until you hear a beep.
Shuffle playback
Playing songs from one playlist or album in random order
Press the 1 (RAND) button.
To cancel, press the 1 (RAND) button again.
Playing songs from all the playlists or albums in random order
Press and hold the 1 (RAND) button until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press the 1 (RAND) button again.
482
3-2. Using the audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Repeat play
Press the 2 (RPT) button.
To cancel, press the 2 (RPT) button again.
Switching the display
Press the “TEXT” button.
Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following
order: Elapsed time Album title Track title Artist name
Silencing the sound (type B)
Press the “MUTE” button.
Press the button again to turn the system back on.
Adjusting sound quality and volume balance
Press the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob to enter iPod
menu mode.
Pressing the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob changes
sound modes. (P. 496)
STEP
1
STEP
2
483
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
About iPod
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance
with safety and regulatory standards.
iPod is a trade mark of Apple inc., registered in the U.S. and other coun-
tries.
iPod functions
When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod
mode, the iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last
used.
Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions
may not be available. Disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once
again may resolve some malfunctions.
iPod problems
To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect
your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it.
For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner’s Man-
ual.
Display
P. 464
Error messages
“ERROR”: This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.
“EMPTY”: This indicates that an empty playlist is selected.
“UPDATE”: This indicates that the version of the iPod is not compatible.
Upgrade your iPod software to the latest version.
484
3-2. Using the audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Compatible models
Depending on differences between models or software version etc., some
models listed above might be incompatible with this system.
iPod 4th generation and earlier models are not compatible with this system.
iPhone, iPod mini, iPod shuffle and iPod photo are not compatible with this
system.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
Maximum number of lists in device: 9999
Maximum number of songs in device: 65535
Maximum number of songs per list: 65535
Model Generation Software version
iPod 5th generation Ver. 1.2.0 or higher
iPod nano 1st generation Ver. 1.3.0 or higher
2nd generation Ver. 1.1.2 or higher
3rd generation Ver. 1.0.0 or higher
iPod touch 1st generation Ver. 1.1.0 or higher
iPod classic 1st generation Ver. 1.0.0 or higher
485
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Caution while driving
Do not connect iPod or operate the controls.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to iPod
Do not leave iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may
become high, resulting in damage to the player.
Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is
connected as this may damage the iPod or its terminal.
Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod or
its terminal.
486
3-2. Using the audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Operating a USB memory
: If equipped
Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the
vehicle speakers.
Connecting a USB memory
Open the cover and connect a USB memory.
Turn on the power of the USB memory if it is not turned on.
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Vehicles with a manual transmission
Press the “DISC•AUX” or “CD•AUX” button.
STEP
1
STEP
2
487
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Control panel
Type A
Type B
VolumePower
“PWR•VOL” knob
File selector knob
Playback button
Text button
File selector
button
Repeat play button
Folder selector buttons
Random playback button
Playback/Pause button
VolumePower
“PWR•VOL” knob
Repeat play button
Playback button
Text button
File selector button
Random playback button
Playback/Pause
button
Mute button
File selector
knob
Folder selector buttons
488
3-2. Using the audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Selecting a folder
Selecting folders one at a time
Press the 6 () or 5 () button to select the desired folder.
Returning to the first folder
Press and hold the 5 () button until you hear a beep.
Type C
VolumePower
“PWR•VOL” knob
Playback button
Text button
Playback/Pause
button
File selector
button
Random playback button
Repeat play button
File selector
knob
Folder selector buttons
489
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Selecting files
Turn the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob or press “” or “” on the
“SEEK/TRACK” button to select the desired file.
Playing and pausing files
To play or pause a file, press the 3 ( ) or “AST” ( ) button.
Fast-forwarding and rewinding files
To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold “” or “” on the “SEEK/
TRACK” button until you hear a beep.
Random playback
Playing files from a folder in random order
Press the 1 (RAND) button.
To cancel, press the 1 (RAND) button again.
Playing all the files from a USB memory in random order
Press and hold the 1 (RAND) button until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press the 1 (RAND) button again.
490
3-2. Using the audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Repeat play
Repeating a file
Press the 2 (RPT) button.
To cancel, press the 2 (RPT) button again.
Repeating all the files in a folder
Press and hold the 2 (RPT) button until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press the 2 (RPT) button again.
Switching the display
Press the “TEXT” button.
Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following
order: Elapsed time Folder name File name
Album title (MP3 only) Track title Artist name
Silencing the sound (type B)
Press the “MUTE” button.
Press the button again to turn the system back on.
491
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
USB memory functions
Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, certain
functions may not be available. Disconnecting the device and reconnecting it
once again may resolve some malfunctions.
Display
P. 464
Error messages
“ERROR”: This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the USB
memory.
492
3-2. Using the audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
USB memory
Compatible devices
USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback
Compatible device formats
The following device formats can be used:
USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12mbps)
File formats: FAT16/32 (Windows)
Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above
may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be
displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
Maximum number of folders in a device: 999 (including the root)
Maximum number of files in a device: 65025
Maximum number of files per folder: 255
MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3
format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and
to the media/formats on which the files are recorded.
493
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
MP3 file compatibility
Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III,
MPEG2.5)
Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
MPEG2.5: 8, 11.025, 12 (kHz)
Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-160 (kbps)
MPEG2.5: 32-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and
monaural
WMA file compatibility
Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 9
Compatible sampling frequencies
HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
Compatible bit rates
HIGH PROFILE 32-320 (kbps, VBR)
File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those
with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
494
3-2. Using the audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3
tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
MP3 and WMA playback
When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in
the USB memory device are checked. Once the file check is finished,
the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more
quickly, we recommend that you do not include any files other than
MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
When the USB device is connected and the audio source is changed to
USB memory mode, the USB device will start playing the first file in the
first folder. If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the con-
tents have not been changed), the USB device will resume play from
the same point in which it was last used.
Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and
WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and
WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage
to the speakers.
495
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Playback
To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit
rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for
MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the
encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of
playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at
all.
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
CAUTION
Caution while driving
Do not connect USB memory or operate the controls.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to USB memory
Do not leave USB memory in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehi-
cle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory
while it is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.
Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB
memory or its terminal.
496
3-2. Using the audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Optimal use of the audio system
Adjusting sound quality and volume balance
Changing sound quality modes
Pressing the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
Pressing the button changes sound modes in the following order:
“BAS” “MID” (type C) “TRE” “FAD“BAL” “ASL”
Type A
Displays the current mode
Changes the following set-
tings
Sound quality and vol-
ume balance
P. 4 9 6
The sound quality and bal-
ance setting can be
changed to produce the
best sound.
Automatic Sound Level-
izer on/off
P. 4 9 8
Type B and C
497
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Adjusting sound quality
Turning the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob adjusts the level.
*
1
: If equipped
*
2
: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio mode.
Mode
displayed
Sound
quality mode
Level
Turn coun-
terclockwise
Turn
clockwise
“BAS” Bass*
2
-5 to 5
Low High“MID”*
1
Mid-range*
2
-5 to 5
“TRE” Treble*
2
-5 to 5
“FAD”
Front/rear
volume
balance
F7 to R7 Shifts to rear
Shifts to
front
“BAL”
Left/right
volume
balance
L7 to R7 Shifts to left
Shifts to
right
498
3-2. Using the audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Turning the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL) on/off
Type A and B
When “ASL” is selected, turning the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob to the right changes the “ASL” level in the order of “LOW”,
“MID” and “HIGH”.
Turning the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob to the left turns
“ASL” off.
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the
vehicle speed.
Type C
Turning the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob clockwise turns on
the ASL, and turning the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob coun-
terclockwise turns off the ASL.
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the
noise level as you drive your vehicle.
Trademark owned by SRS Labs, Inc. (type A and B)
The audio systems utilize SRS FOCUS
and SRS TruBass
audio
enhancement technologies, under license from SRS Labs, Inc., in all mode
except AM radio mode.
FOCUS, TruBass, SRS and
symbols are trademarks of SRS Labs,
Inc.
FOCUS and TruBass technologies are incorporated under license from
SRS Labs, Inc.
R
499
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Using the AUX port
: If equipped
This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen
to it through the vehicle’s speakers.
Open the cover and connect the portable audio device.
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Vehicles with a manual transmission
Press the “DISC•AUX” or “CD•AUX” button.
STEP
1
STEP
2
500
3-2. Using the audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All the other
adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable
audio device.
501
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Using the steering wheel audio switches
Turning the power on
Press the “MODE” button when the audio system is turned off.
The audio system can be turned off by holding the switch down for 1 sec-
ond or more.
: If equipped
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the
steering wheel.
Operation may differ depending on the type of audio system or navi-
gation system. For details, refer to the manual provided with the
audio system or navigation system.
Increases/decreases vol-
ume
Radio mode:Selects a radio
station
CD mode: Selects a track,
file (MP3 and
WMA) and disc
Bluetooth
®
audio mode:
Selects a track
and album
iPod mode: Selects a song
USB memory mode:
Selects a file and
folder
Turns the power on, selects
an audio source
502
3-2. Using the audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Changing the audio source
Press the “MODE” button when the audio system is turned on. The
audio source changes as follows each time the button is pressed. If
no discs are inserted in the player, that mode will be skipped.
FM1 FM2 FM3 CD player Bluetooth
®
audio AUX 
iPod or USB memory MW DAB (if equipped) FM1
Adjusting the volume
Press “+” on to increase the volume and “-” to decrease the
volume.
Hold down the button to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.
Selecting a radio station
Press the “MODE” button to select the radio mode.
Press “” or “” on to select a radio station.
To scan for receivable stations, press and hold “” or “” the button
until you hear a beep.
Selecting a track/file or song
Press the “MODE” button to select CD, Bluetooth
®
audio,
iPod or USB memory mode.
Press “” or “” on to select the desired track/file or
song.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
503
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Selecting an album
Press the “MODE” button to select Bluetooth
®
audio mode.
Press and hold “” or “” on until you hear a beep.
Selecting a folder
Press the “MODE” button to select USB memory mode.
Press and hold “” or “” on until you hear a beep.
Selecting a disc in the CD player
Press the “MODE” button to select CD mode.
Press and hold “” or “” on until you hear a beep.
Canceling automatic selection of a radio station
Press
again.
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
504
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
Bluetooth
®
audio system
: If equipped
The Bluetooth
®
audio system enables you to enjoy music played on
a portable player from the vehicle speakers via wireless communica-
tion.
This audio system supports Bluetooth
®
, a wireless data system
capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your por-
table player does not support Bluetooth
®
, the Bluetooth
®
audio sys-
tem will not function.
Vehicles with a navigation system
Refer to the “Navigation System Owners Manual”.
Vehicles without a navigation system
Title Page
Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system P. 5 11
Operating a Bluetooth
®
enabled portable player P. 514
Setting up a Bluetooth
®
enabled portable player P. 518
Bluetooth
®
audio system setup P. 522
505
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Conditions under which the system will not operate
If using a portable player that does not support Bluetooth
®
If the portable player is switched off
If the portable player is not connected
If the portable player’s battery is low
If the portable player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box
If metal is covering or touching the player
When transferring ownership of the vehicle
Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improp-
erly accessed. ( P. 549)
About Bluetooth
®
Compatible models
Bluetooth
®
specifications:
Ver. 1.2, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 2.0+EDR or higher)
Following Profiles:
A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher
AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Ver.
1.3 or higher recommended)
Portable players must correspond to the above specifications in order to be
connected to the Bluetooth
®
audio system. However, please note that some
functions may be limited depending on the type of portable player.
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
506
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Certification for the Bluetooth
®
audio system
507
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
508
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
509
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
510
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Caution while driving
Do not connect portable players or operate the controls.
Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth
®
antennas. People with implanted
pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should maintain a reasonable dis-
tance between themselves and the Bluetooth
®
antennas.
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices.
Before using Bluetooth
®
devices, users of any electrical medical device
other than implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators
should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its
operation under the influence of audio waves. Radio waves could have
unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to portable players
Do not leave portable players in the vehicle. The temperature inside the
vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
511
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
Audio unit
Type A
Display
A message, name, number,
etc. is displayed.
Lower-case characters and
special characters cannot
be displayed.
Displays information that is
too long to be displayed at
one time on the display
(press and hold)
Selects items such as menu
and number
Turn: Selects an item
Press: Inputs the selected
item
Bluetooth
®
connection con-
dition
If “BT” is not displayed, the
Bluetooth
®
audio system
cannot be used.
Type B
512
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system for the first time
Before using the Bluetooth
®
audio system, it is necessary to register
a Bluetooth
®
enabled portable player in the system. Follow the proce-
dure below to register (pair) a portable player:
Press the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob and select
“BT•A MENU” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
Select “BT•A Setup” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob.
Select “Pair Audio” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL
knob.
Select “Record Name” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob, and say the name to be registered after the beep.
The name to be registered will be repeated aloud.
Select “Confirm” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob.
A passkey will be displayed.
Input the passkey into the audio player.
Refer to the manual that comes with the portable player for the oper-
ation of the portable player.
If the portable player has a Bluetooth
®
phone, the phone can be reg-
istered at the same time.
When “Pair Phone?” is displayed, select “Yes” or “No” using
the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
(Bluetooth
®
phone P. 526)
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
STEP
7
513
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Menu list of the Bluetooth
®
audio system
First menu
Second
menu
Third menu Operation detail
“Setup”
“BT•A
Setup”
“Pair Audio”
Registering a portable audio
player
“Select Audio”
Selecting a portable audio
player to be used
“Change Name”
Changing the registered
name of a portable player
“List Audios”
Listing the registered porta-
ble players
“Set Passkey” Changing the passkey
“Delete Audio”
Deleting a registered porta-
ble player
“System
Setup”
“Guidance Vol”
Setting voice guidance vol-
ume
“Device Name”
Displaying the Bluetooth
®
device address and name
“Initialize” Initializing the system
Operations that cannot be performed while driving
Operating the system with
the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob
Registering a portable player to the system
Changing the passkey
P. 520
514
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Operating a Bluetooth
®
enabled portable player
Type A
Type B
VolumePower
“PWR•VOL” knob
Playback button
Text button
Random playback button
Album selector buttons
BT•A menu
knob
Repeat play button
Playback/Pause button
Track selector button
VolumePower
“PWR•VOL” knob
Repeat play button
Playback button
Text button
Track selector button
Random playback button
Mute button
BT•A menu
knob
Album selector buttons
Playback/Pause button
515
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Selecting an album
To select the desired album, press the 6 () or 5 () button.
Selecting tracks
Press “” or “” on the “SEEK/TRACK” button to select the desired
track.
Type C
VolumePower
“PWR•VOL” knob
Playback button
Text button
Playback/Pause
button
Track selector
button
Random playback button
Repeat play button
BT•A menu
knob
Album selector buttons
516
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Playing and pausing tracks
To play or pause a track, press the 3 ( ) or “AST” ( ) button.
Fast-forwarding and rewinding tracks
To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold “” or “” on the “SEEK/
TRACK” button until you hear a beep.
Random playback
Press the 1 (RAND) button.
To cancel, press the 1 (RAND) button again.
Repeat play
Press the 2 (RPT) button.
To cancel, press the 2 (RPT) button again.
Switching the display
Press the “TEXT” button.
Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following
order: Elapsed time Album title Track title Artist name
517
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Silencing the sound (type B)
Press the “MUTE” button.
Press the button again to turn the system back on.
Using the steering wheel audio switches
P. 501
Bluetooth
®
audio system functions
Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain
functions may not be available.
Display
P. 464
Error messages
“Memory Error”: This indicates a problem in the system.
518
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Setting up a Bluetooth
®
enabled portable player
Registering a portable audio player in the Bluetooth
®
audio system
allows the system to function. The following functions can be used
for registered portable players:
Functions and operation procedures
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below.
Press the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob to select
“BT•A MENU” or press the off-hook switch (P. 533) and
select “Setup” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob.
Select “BT•A Setup” using the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob.
Select one of the following items using the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob:
Registering a portable player
“Pair Audio”
Selecting a portable player to be used
“Select Audio”
Changing the registered name of a portable player
“Change Name”
Listing the registered portable players
“List Audios”
Changing the passkey
“Set Passkey”
Deleting a registered portable player
“Delete Audio”
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
519
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Registering a portable player
Select “Pair Audio” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob, and
perform the procedure for registering a portable player. (P. 512)
Selecting a portable player to be used
Select “Select Audio” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob.
Select the portable player to be used using the “TUNE•FILE”
or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
Select “From Car” or “From Audio” using the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob.
If “From Car” is selected, the portable player will be automatically
connected whenever:
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNI-
TION ON mode.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
520
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Changing the registered name of a portable player
Select “Change Name” using the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob.
Select the desired portable player name to be changed using
the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
Select “Record Name” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob, and say the new name after the beep.
The name to be registered will be repeated aloud.
Select “Confirm” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob.
Listing the registered portable players
Select “List Audios” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
The list of registered portable players will be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “BT•A Setup”.
Changing the passkey
Select “Set Passkey” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob.
Select a 4 to 8-digit number using the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob.
The number should be input 1 digit at a time.
When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has
been input, press the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob
again.
If the number to be registered has 8 digits, pressing of the knob is
not necessary.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
521
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Deleting a registered portable player
Select “Delete Audio” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob.
Select the desired portable player to be deleted using the
“TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
If the portable player to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth
®
phone,
the registration of the mobile phone can be deleted at the same time.
When “Del Phone?” is displayed, select “Yes” or “No” using
the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
(Bluetooth
®
phone P. 526)
The number of portable players that can be registered
Up to 2 portable players can be registered in the system.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
522
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Bluetooth
®
audio system setup
System setup items and operation procedures
To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below.
Press the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob to select
“BT•A MENU” or press the off-hook switch (P. 533) and
select “Setup” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob.
Select “System Setup” using the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob.
Select one of the following items using the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob:
Setting voice guidance volume
“Guidance Vol” (P. 549)
Displaying the Bluetooth
®
device address and name
“Device Name” (P. 549)
Initializing the system
“Initialize” (P. 549)
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
523
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
Hands-free system (for mobile phone)
: If equipped
The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your
mobile phone without touching it.
This system supports Bluetooth
®
mobile phones. Bluetooth
®
is a
wireless data system that allows the mobile phone to wirelessly con-
nect to the hands-free system and make/receive calls.
Vehicles with a navigation system
Refer to the “Navigation System Owners Manual”.
Vehicles without a navigation system
Hands-free system quick guide
Setting a mobile phone. (P. 534)
Adding an entry to the phonebook. (Up to 20 names can be
stored.) (P. 551)
Dialing by inputting a name. (P. 539)
Hands-free function list
Title Page
Using the hands-free system
Using the hands-free phone system for
the first time
P. 532
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
524
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Title Page
Making a phone call
Making a phone call
Dialing by inputting a name
Speed dialing
Redial
Call back
Receiving a phone call
Answering the phone
Refusing the call
Transferring a call
Using a call history memory
Dialing
Storing data in the phone book
Deleting
P. 539
Setting a mobile phone
Functions and operation procedures
P. 543
Security and system setup
Security setting items and operation
procedure
System setup items and operation
procedure
P. 546
525
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Conditions under which the system will not operate
If using a mobile phone that does not support Bluetooth
®
.
If the mobile phone is switched off.
If you are outside service range.
If the mobile phone is not connected.
If the mobile phone’s battery is low.
The mobile phone is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box
Metal is covering or touching the phone
Signal status
This display may not correspond exactly with the mobile phone itself.
Title Page
Using the phone book
Adding a new phone number
Changing the registered name in the
phone book
Listing the registered data
Setting speed dials
Deleting the registered data
Deleting speed dials
P. 551
526
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
When using the hands-free system
The audio system and voice guidance are muted when making a call.
If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.
If the incoming call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.
Try to face toward the microphone as much as possible when speaking.
In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party:
When driving on unpaved roads
When driving at high speeds
When a window is open
When the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone
When the air conditioning is set to high
When transferring ownership of the vehicle
Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improp-
erly accessed. (P. 549)
About Bluetooth
®
Compatible models
Compatible with HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.5 and OPP (Object Push
Profile) Ver. 1.1.
If your mobile phone does not support HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth
®
phone. If your mobile phone supports OPP alone, you cannot use the
Bluetooth
®
phone.
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
527
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Certification for the hands-free system
528
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
529
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
530
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
531
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Caution while driving
Do not use a mobile phone or connect the Bluetooth
®
phone.
Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth
®
antennas. People with implanted
pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should maintain a reasonable dis-
tance between themselves and the Bluetooth
®
antennas.
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices.
Before using Bluetooth
®
devices, users of any electrical medical device
other than implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators
should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its
operation under the influence of audio waves. Radio waves could have
unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to mobile phones
Do not leave mobile phones in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehi-
cle may become high, resulting in damage to the phone.
532
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
Audio unit
Type A
Display
A message, name, phone
number, etc. is displayed.
Lower-case characters and
special characters cannot
be displayed.
Selects speed dials
Displays information that is
too long to be displayed at
one time on the display
(press and hold)
Selects items such as menu
and number
Turn: Selects an item
Press: Inputs the selected
item
Bluetooth
®
connection con-
dition
If “BT” is not displayed, the
hands-free system cannot
be used.
Reception level
Type B
533
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Steering wheel switches
Type A
Volume
The voice guidance volume
cannot be adjusted using this
button.
Off-hook switch
Turns the hands-free sys-
tem on/starts a call
On-hook switch
Turns the hands-free sys-
tem off/ends a call/refuses a
call
Talk switch
Turns the voice command
system on (press)/turns the
voice command system off
(press and hold)
Type B
534
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Using the hands-free phone system for the first time
Before using the hands-free phone system, it is necessary to register
a mobile phone in the system. The system will enter phone registra-
tion mode automatically when starting the system with no mobile
phone registered. Follow the procedure below to register (pair) a
mobile phone:
Microphone
535
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Press the off-hook switch and select “Pair phone” using the
“TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
Select “Record Name” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob, and say the name to be registered after the beep.
The name to be registered will be repeated aloud.
Select “Confirm” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob.
A passkey will be displayed.
Input the passkey into the mobile phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the mobile phone for the opera-
tion of the phone.
If the mobile phone has a Bluetooth
®
audio player, the audio player
can be registered at the same time.
When “Pair Audio?” is displayed, select “Yes” or “No” using
the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
(Bluetooth
®
audio player P. 505)
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
536
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Menu list of the hands-free phone system
First menu
Second
menu
Third menu Operation detail
“Callback” - -
Dialing a number stored in
the incoming call history
memory
“Redial” - -
Dialing a number stored in
the outgoing call history
memory
“Phone-
book”
“Add
Entry”
-
Adding a new phone num-
ber
“Change
Name”
-
Changing the registered
name in the phone book
“Delete
Entry”
- Deleting the registered data
“Del Spd
Dial”
- Deleting speed dials
“List
Names”
- Listing the registered data
“Speed
Dial”
- Setting speed dials
537
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
“Setup”
“Security”
“Set PIN” Setting a PIN code
“Phbk Lock” Locking the phone book
“Phbk Unlock” Unlocking the phone book
“Phone
Setup”
“Pair Phone” Registering a mobile phone
“Select Phone”
Selecting a mobile phone to
be used
“Change Name”
Changing the registered
name of a mobile phone
“List Phones”
Listing the registered mobile
phones
“Set Passkey” Changing the passkey
“Delete Phone”
Deleting a registered mobile
phone
“System
Setup”
“Guidance Vol”
Setting voice guidance vol-
ume
“Device Name”
Displaying the Bluetooth
®
device address and name
“Initialize” Initializing the system
First menu
Second
menu
Third menu Operation detail
538
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Automatic volume adjustment
When vehicle speed reaches 80 km/h (50 mph) or more, the volume auto-
matically increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when
vehicle speed drops to 70 km/h (43 mph) or less.
Operations that cannot be performed while driving
Operating the system with the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob
Registering a mobile phone to the system
Changing the passkey
P. 545
539
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Making a phone call
Making a phone call
Dialing by inputting a name
“Dial by name”
Speed dialing
Dialing a number stored in the outgoing history memory
“Redial”
Dialing a number stored in the incoming history memory
“Call back”
Receiving a phone call
Answering the phone
Refusing the call
Transferring a call
Using the call history memory
Dialing
Storing data in the phone book
Deleting
540
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Dialing by inputting a name
Press the talk switch and say a registered name.
The desired name or number is displayed.
Dial by one of the following methods:
a. Press the off-hook switch.
b. Select “Dial” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
In , if the pronounced name cannot be recognized, select the
desired name using
the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
Speed dialing
Press the off-hook switch.
Press the preset button in which the desired number is regis-
tered.
Press the off-hook switch.
When receiving a phone call
Answering the phone
Press the off-hook switch.
Refusing the call
Press the on-hook switch.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
541
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Transferring a call
A call can be transferred between the mobile phone and system while
dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the following
methods:
a. Operate the mobile phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the mobile phone for the opera-
tion of the phone.
b. Press the off-hook switch*.
*: This operation can be performed only when transferring a call
from the mobile phone to the system during a call.
Using a call history memory
Follow the procedure below to use number stored in call history
memory:
Press the off-hook switch and select “Redial” (when using a
number stored in the outgoing call history memory) or “Call
back” (when using a number stored in the incoming call his-
tory memory) using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
Select the desired number using the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob.
STEP
1
STEP
2
542
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
The following operations can be performed:
Dialing: Press the off-hook switch or select “Dial” using the
“TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
Storing the number in the phone book: Select “Store” and then
“Confirm” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
Deleting: Select “Delete” and then “Confirm” using the
“TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
Call history
Up to 5 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing and incoming call his-
tory memories.
When talking on the phone
Do not talk simultaneously with the other party.
Keep the volume of the receiving voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will
increase.
STEP
3
543
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Setting a mobile phone
Registering a mobile phone in the hands-free phone system allows
the system to function. The following function can be used for regis-
tered mobile phones:
Functions and operation procedures
To enter menu for each function, follow the steps below.
Press the off-hook switch and select “Setup” using the
“TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
Select “Phone Setup” using the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob.
Select one of the following items using the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob:
Registering a mobile phone
“Pair Phone”
Selecting a mobile phone to be used
“Select Phone”
Changing the registered name of a mobile phone
“Change Name”
Listing the registered mobile phones
“List Phones”
Changing the passkey
“Set Passkey”
Deleting a registered mobile phone
“Delete Phone”
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
544
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Registering a mobile phone
Select “Pair Phone” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob,
and perform the procedure for registering a mobile phone. (P. 534)
Selecting a mobile phone to be used
Select “Select Phone” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob.
Select the mobile phone to be used using the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob.
Changing the registered name of a mobile phone
Select “Change Name” using the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob.
Select the desired mobile phone name to be changed using
the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
Select “Record Name” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob, and say the new name after the beep.
The name to be registered will be repeated aloud.
Select “Confirm” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob.
Listing the registered mobile phones
Select “List Phones” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
The list of registered mobile phones will be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phone Setup”.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
545
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Changing the passkey
Select “Set Passkey” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob.
Select a 4 to 8-digit number using the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob.
The number should be input 1 digit at a time.
When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has
been input, press the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob
again.
If the number to be registered has 8 digits, pressing of the knob is
not necessary.
Deleting a registered mobile phone
Select “Delete Phone” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob.
Select the desired mobile phone to be deleted using the
“TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
If the mobile phone to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth
®
audio
player, the registration of the audio player can be deleted at the same
time.
When “Del Audio?” is displayed, select “Yes” or “No” using the
“TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
(Bluetooth
®
audio player P. 505)
The number of mobile phones that can be registered
Up to 6 mobile phones can be registered in the system.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
546
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Security and system setup
To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below.
Security setting items and operation procedures
Press the off-hook switch and select “Setup” using the
“TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
Select “Security” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob.
Select one of the following items using the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob:
Setting or changing the PIN (Personal Identification Number)
“Set PIN”
Locking the phone book
“Phbk Lock”
Unlocking the phone book
“Phbk Unlock”
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
547
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
System setup items and operation procedures
Press the off-hook switch and select “Setup” using the
“TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
Select “System Setup” using the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob.
Select one of the following items using the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob:
Setting voice guidance volume
“Guidance Vol”
Displaying the Bluetooth
®
device address and name
“Device Name”
Initializing the system
“Initialize”
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
548
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Setting or changing the PIN
Setting a PIN
Select “Set PIN” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
Enter a PIN using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
Input the code 1 digit at a time.
Changing the PIN
Select “Set PIN” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
Enter the registered PIN using the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob.
Enter a new PIN using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob.
Input the code 1 digit at a time.
Locking or unlocking the phone book
Select “Phbk Lock” or “Phbk Unlock” using the “TUNE•FILE”
or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
Input a new PIN by using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob and select “Confirm” using the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob.
Input the code 1 digit at a time.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
549
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Setting voice guidance volume
Select “Guidance Vol” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob.
Change the voice guidance volume.
To decrease the volume: Turn the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob counterclockwise.
To increase the volume: Turn the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob clockwise.
Displaying the Bluetooth
®
device address and name
Select “Device Name” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob.
Turn the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob to display the
Bluetooth
®
device address and name.
Select “Go Back” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob to return to “System Setup”.
Initializing the system
Select “Initialize” and then “Confirm” using the “TUNE•FILE”
or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
Select “Confirm” again using the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
550
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Initialization
The following data in the system can be initialized:
Phone book
Outgoing and incoming call history
Speed dials
Registered mobile phone data
Security code
Registered Bluetooth
®
enabled portable player data
Passkeys for the mobile phones
Passkey for the Bluetooth
®
audio players
Guidance volume
Receiver volume
Ring tone volume
Once the initialization has been completed, the data cannot be restored
to its original state.
When the phone book is locked
The following functions cannot be used:
Dialing by inputting a name
Speed dialing
Dialing a number stored in the call history memory
Using the phone book
551
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Using the phone book
To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below.
Press the off-hook switch and select “Phonebook” using the
“TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
Select one of the following items using the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob:
Adding a new phone number
“Add Entry”
Changing the registered name in the phone book
“Change Name”
Listing the registered data
“List Names”
Setting speed dials
“Speed Dial”
Deleting the registered data
“Delete Entry”
Deleting speed dials
“Del Spd Dial”
STEP
1
STEP
2
552
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Adding a new phone number
The following methods can be used to add a new phone number:
Transferring data from the mobile phone
Inputting a phone number using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob
Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming call history
Adding procedure
Select “Add Entry” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob.
Use one of the following methods to input a telephone num-
ber:
Transferring data from the mobile phone:
STEP2-1 Select “By Phone” and then “Confirm” using the
“TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
STEP2-2 When “Transfer” appears in the display, transfer
the data from the mobile phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the mobile phone
for the details of transferring data.
STEP2-3 Select the desired data using the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob.
STEP
1
STEP
2
553
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Inputting a phone number using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob:
STEP2-1 Select “Manual Input” using the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob.
STEP2-2 Input a phone number using the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob, and press the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob again.
Input the phone number 1 digit at a time.
Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming call history:
STEP2-1 Select “Call History” using the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob.
STEP2-2 Select “Outgoing” or “Incoming” using the
“TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
STEP2-3 Select the desired data using the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob.
Select “Record Name” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob, and say the desired name after the beep.
The name to be registered will be repeated aloud.
Select “Confirm” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob.
Select “Confirm” again using the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob.
In , selecting “Speed Dial” instead of “Confirm” registers the
newly added phone number as a speed dial.
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
5
554
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Changing the registered name in the phone book
Select “Change Name” using the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob.
Select the desired name to be changed using the
“TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
Select “Record Name” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob, and say the new name after the beep.
The name to be registered will be repeated aloud.
Select “Confirm” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob.
Listing the registered data
Selecting “List Names” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
The list of the registered data will be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phonebook”.
Pressing the off-hook switch while an entry is being read aloud
selects the entry, and calls the registered phone number.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
555
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Setting speed dials
Select “Speed Dial” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL
knob.
Select the desired data using the “TUNE•FILE” or
“TUNE•SEL” knob.
Select the desired preset button, and register the data into
speed dial by either of the following methods:
a. Press the desired preset button, and select “Confirm” using
the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
b. Press and hold the desired preset button.
Deleting the registered data
Select “Delete Entry” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob.
Select the desired data to be deleted using the “TUNE•FILE”
or “TUNE•SEL” knob.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
556
3-4. Using the hands-free system (for mobile phone)
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Deleting speed dials
Select “Del Spd Dial” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob.
Press the preset button to which the desired speed dial is reg-
istered after the beep.
The name to be deleted will be heard.
Select “Confirm” using the “TUNE•FILE” or “TUNE•SEL”
knob.
Limitation of number of digits
A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
557
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list
Personal/interior lights (P. 559)
Ornament illumination* (if equipped)
Inside door handle lights
* (if equipped)
Shift lever light (when the engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”
position [vehicles without a smart entry & start system] or the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode [vehicles with a smart entry & start system]) (if
equipped)
558
3-5. Using the interior lights
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Personal/interior light main switch
“OFF”
The personal/Interior lights
and interior light can be indi-
vidually turned on or off.
Door position
The personal/interior lights
come on when a door is
opened. They turn off when
the doors are closed.
On
The personal/interior lights
cannot be individually turned
off.
Footwell lights* (if equipped)
Engine switch light (vehicles without smart entry & start system)
or “ENGINE START STOP” switch light (vehicles with smart
entry & start system)
Door pocket lights
* (if equipped)
Door courtesy lights
Running board lights (if equipped)
*: The brightness of the lights can be adjusted (P. 560)
Personal/interior light main switch
559
3-5. Using the interior lights
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Personal/interior lights
Front
Turns the lights on/off
Rear (without personal lights)
Turns the lights on
Turns the door position on
Door position: When the per-
sonal/interior light main switch is
in the “OFF” position, the lights
will not turn on.
Rear (with personal lights)
Turns the lights on/off
Personal/interior lights
560
3-5. Using the interior lights
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Lounge illumination control switches (if equipped)
The brightness of the following the lights can be adjusted:
Inside door handle lights
Ornament illumination
Door pocket lights
Footwell lights
Brighter
Darker
Lounge illumination control switches
561
3-5. Using the interior lights
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Illuminated entry system
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The lights automatically turn on/off according to the engine switch position,
whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are open/
closed.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The lights automatically turn on/off according to “ENGINE START STOP”
switch mode, the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are
locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are open/closed.
To prevent battery discharge
If the following lights remain on when the door is not fully closed and the per-
sonal/interior light main switch is in the door position, the lights will go off
automatically after 20 minutes:
Personal/interior light
Inside door handle lights (if equipped)
Ornament illumination (if equipped)
Door pocket lights (if equipped)
Footwell lights (if equipped)
Running board lights (if equipped)
Customization
Settings (e.g. time elapsed before the interior lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 849)
562
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
3-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features
Cup holders
Bottle holders/door pockets
Auxiliary boxes
Glove box
Card holder (right-hand drive vehicles)
Console box (if equipped)
563
3-6. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Glove box
The glove box can be opened by pulling the lever and can be locked
and unlocked by using the master key (vehicles without a smart entry
& start system) or the mechanical key (vehicles with a smart entry &
start system).
Unlock
Lock
Open
CAUTION
Items that should not be left in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this
may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact
with other stored items.
Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other
stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas,
causing a fire hazard.
Glove box
564
3-6. Using the storage features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Card holder (right-hand drive vehicles)
The card holder is located in the glove box.
Glove box light
The glove box light turns on when the tail lights are on.
CAUTION
Caution while driving
Keep the glove box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerv-
ing, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open
glove box or the items stored inside.
Glove box and card holder
565
3-6. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Console box (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with either a console box or cool box.
For vehicles with the cool box, refer to P. 576.
Console box
Lift the lid while pulling up the
knob to release the lock.
Lifts the lid and tray
Lifts the lid
Pull the tray up to open the
console box.
Using the console box vent (if equipped)
Air from the air conditioner can be distrib-
uted into the console box by opening and
closing the vent.
Open
Close
Console box
566
3-6. Using the storage features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Items unsuitable for the console box
Drinks in unsealed containers
Fragile items, perishables or anything with strong odor
Owners manual, electronic devices, CDs, etc. (when using the console
box vent)
When using the console box lid as an armrest
CAUTION
Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden
swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the
open console box or the items stored inside.
NOTICE
Tray
Do not insert items exceeding the height of the tray. Doing so may prevent
opening and closing of the lid.
Slide the console box lid forward or back-
ward as needed. Slide the lid while pulling
up the lever to release the lock.
Console box
567
3-6. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Bottle holders/door pockets
Front
Rear (if equipped)
Bottle holders/door pockets
568
3-6. Using the storage features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
When using the holder as a bottle holder
When storing a bottle, close the cap.
The bottle may not be stored depending on its size or shape.
NOTICE
Items that should not be stowed in the bottle holders
Do not place open bottles in the bottle holders, or glasses and paper cups
containing liquid. The contents may spill and glasses may break.
Bottle holders/door pockets
569
3-6. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Cup holders
Front (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Press down and release the cup
holder lid.
You can remove the holder
inside.
Front (vehicles with a manual transmission)
Press down and release the cup
holder lid.
You can remove the separate tray
inside.
Cup holders
570
3-6. Using the storage features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Rear (type A) (if equipped)
Pull the armrest down.
Rear (type B) (if equipped)
Pull the armrest down and press
in and release the button.
Rear (type C) (if equipped)
Cup holders
571
3-6. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Removing the holder, separate tray and adapter
Front (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Front (vehicles with a manual transmission)
Rear (type A)
Pull up the holder.
Pull up the separate tray.
Pull up the adapter.
Cup holders
572
3-6. Using the storage features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups, mugs or beverage cans in the cup
holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of sudden braking,
sudden swerving or an accident, cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to
prevent burns.
When not in use
Keep the cup holders closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden
swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the
open cup holders or the items stored inside.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the rear cup holders (rear [type B])
Stow the cup holders before stowing the armrest.
Cup holders
573
3-6. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Auxiliary boxes
Type A
Press in the button and then pull
down the lid. The overhead con-
sole is useful for temporarily
storing sunglasses and similar
small items.
Type B (if equipped)
Push the lid.
Type C (if equipped)
Auxiliary boxes
574
3-6. Using the storage features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Type D (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Type D (vehicles with a manual transmission)
Auxiliary boxes
575
3-6. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Caution while driving
Keep the auxiliary boxes closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden
swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by an
open auxiliary box or the items stored inside.
Do not place cups, beverage cans or bottles in the box. They may be
thrown out of the box in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or
an accident, resulting in injury. (type D)
Items unsuitable for storing (type A)
Do not store items heavier than 0.2 kg (0.4 lb.).
Doing so may cause the auxiliary box to open and the items inside may fall
out, resulting in an accident.
Do not put large items in the overhead console.
The overhead console may not be able to be shut from the conversation
mirror state.
Auxiliary boxes
576
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
3-7. Other interior features
Cool box
: If equipped
The cool box can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Vehicles with a manual air conditioning system
The air conditioning system must be on to use cool box.
Lift the lid while pulling up the
knob to release the lock.
Turns the cool box on/off
When on, the indicator light
comes on.
STEP
1
STEP
2
577
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
When the cool box is turned on (vehicles with an automatic air condi-
tioning system)
Turning cool box on also turns on front air conditioning system.
Items unsuitable for the cool box
Drinks in unsealed containers
Fragile items, perishables or anything with strong odor
Owners manual, electronic devices, CDs, etc.
When the indicator light flashes
The cool box is not operated when any of the following conditions occurs.
When the air conditioning system is off
Turn the air conditioning system on also turns on the cool box.
When outside air temperature is about 0 C (32 F) or below
When the indicator light on the “A/C” button (P. 418, 425) also flashes
Press the “A/C” button to turn off the cooling and dehumidification function
and turn it on again.
If the indicator light continues to flash, there may be a malfunction in the sys-
tem. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it inspected by any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional.
When using the cool box lid as an armrest
Slide the cool box lid forward or backward
as needed. Slide the lid while pulling up
the lever to release the lock.
578
3-7. Other interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Caution while driving
Keep the cool box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerv-
ing, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open cool
box or the items stored inside.
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the cool box on longer than necessary when the engine is
stopped.
579
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Sun visors
Type A
To set the visor in the for-
ward position, flip it down.
To set the visor in the side
position, flip down, unhook,
and swing it to the side.
Type B
To set the visor in the for-
ward position, flip it down.
To set the visor in the side
position, flip down, unhook,
and swing it to the side.
To use the side extender,
place the visor in the side
position, then slide it back-
ward.
580
3-7. Other interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Vanity mirror
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the engine is off.
Slide the cover to open.
The light turns on when the
cover is opened.
581
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Clock
The clock is displayed when
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The clock data will be reset.
Vehicles with a front manual air conditioning system
Adjusts the hours
Adjusts the minutes
Vehicles with a front automatic air conditioning system
Adjusts the hours
Adjusts the minutes
Rounds the nearest hour
*
*
:e.g. 1:00 to 1:29 1:00
1:30 to 1:59 2:00
582
3-7. Other interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Outside temperature display
The temperature display shows temperatures within the range of -40
°C (-40 °F) and 50 °C (122 °F).
Non-Optitron type meter (vehicles with an automatic transmis-
sion)
Non-Optitron type meter (vehicles with a manual transmis-
sion)
Optitron type meter (P. 283)
Accessory meter (P. 293)
583
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
The outside temperature is displayed when
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be dis-
played, or the display may take longer than normal to change:
When the vehicle is stopped, or moving at low speeds (less than 20 km/h
[12 mph])
When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/
exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
When “--” or “E” is displayed
The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional.
584
3-7. Other interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Ashtray
: If equipped
CAUTION
When not in use
Keep the ashtray closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerv-
ing, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open
ashtray or ash flying out.
To prevent fire
Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray,
then make sure the ashtray is fully closed.
Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.
The ashtray can be installed in
the auxiliary box (type D)
(P. 573) or cup holder
(P. 569).
585
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Conversation mirror
To use the overhead console from the conversation mirror state
Pull down the lid. (P. 573)
The conversation mirror can provide the driver and the front passen-
ger with a view of the rear seat area without the need to turn around.
Press in the button.
586
3-7. Other interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Power outlet
The power outlet can be used for the following components:
12 V: Accessories that run on less than 10 A.
Accessories that run on less than 10 A should be used
when using several power outlets at the same time.
220 VAC: Accessories that use less than 100 W.
Center of console (12 V)
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Vehicles with a manual transmission
587
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Rear of console box (12 V)
Luggage compartment (12 V) (if equipped)
3 door models
5 door models
588
3-7. Other interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
The power outlet can be used when
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
12 V: The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
220 VAC: The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
12 V: The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode.
220 VAC: The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Luggage compartment (220 VAC) (if equipped)
3 door models
5 door models
589
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
NOTICE
To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short cir-
cuit.
To prevent blown fuse
12 V
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
220 VAC
Do not use a 220 VAC appliance that requires more than 100 W.
If a 220 VAC appliance that consumes more than 100 W is used, the protec-
tion circuit will cut the power supply.
To prevent battery discharge
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not
running.
Appliances that may not operate properly (220 VAC)
The following 220 VAC appliances may not operate properly even if their
power consumption is under 100 W:
Appliances with high initial peak wattage
Measuring devices that process precise data
Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply
590
3-7. Other interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Seat heaters
: If equipped
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Turns the seat heater on
The indicator light comes on.
Adjusts the seat tempera-
ture
The further you turn the dial
upward, the warmer the seat
becomes.
591
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
The seat heaters can be used when
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
When not in use
Turn the dial fully backward. The indicator light goes off.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
Turns the seat heater on
The indicator light comes on.
Adjusts the seat tempera-
ture
The further you turn the dial
upward, the warmer the seat
becomes.
592
3-7. Other interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Burns
Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat
heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:
Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically chal-
lenged
Persons with sensitive skin
Persons who are fatigued
Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping
drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature
of the seat and may lead to overheating.
Do not use the seat heater more than necessary. Doing so may cause
minor burns or overheating.
NOTICE
To prevent seat heater damage
Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do
not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
To prevent battery discharge
Turn the seat heaters off when the engine is not running.
593
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Armrest
: If equipped
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the armrest
Do not apply too much load on the armrest.
Fold down the armrest for use.
594
3-7. Other interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Coat hooks
CAUTION
Items that cannot be hung on the coat hook (vehicles with SRS curtain
shield airbags)
Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the
SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles,
causing death or serious injury.
595
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Assist grips
CAUTION
Assist grip (Type A)
Do not use the assist grip (Type A) when getting in or out of the vehicle or
rising from your seat.
NOTICE
To prevent damage of the assist grip
Do not hang any heavy object or put a heavy load on the assist grip.
An assist grip (Type A) can be used to support your body while sit-
ting on the seat.
An assist grip (Type B) can be used when getting in or out of the
vehicle and others.
Assist grip (Type A)
Assist grip (Type B)
596
3-7. Other interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Floor mat
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering
with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it
may become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to a serious accident.
When installing the drivers floor mat
Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year
vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.
Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat.
Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) pro-
vided.
Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same
model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place
onto the carpet.
Fix the floor mat in place using
the retaining hooks (clips) pro-
vided.
The shape of the retaining
hooks (clips) and the fixing
procedure of the floor mat for
your vehicle may differ from
those shown in the illustration.
For details, refer to the floor
mat retention clip installation
instructions supplied with the
clips.
597
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Before driving
Check that the floor mat is securely
fixed in the correct place with all the
provided retaining hooks (clips). Be
especially careful to perform this
check after cleaning the floor.
With the engine stopped and the shift
lever in P (automatic transmission) or
N (manual transmission), fully
depress each pedal to the floor to
make sure it does not interfere with
the floor mat.
598
3-7. Other interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Luggage compartment features
Deck rail (if equipped)
To attach the deck hooks, use
the deck rails.
The deck hook itself is not
included as an original equip-
ment.
Vehicles with the third seats
(power seat): When using the
deck rail, the third seat must be
fold down. (P. 109)
Cargo hooks (if equipped)
Raise the hook to use.
The cargo hooks are provided
for securing loose items.
Vehicles with the third seats
(manual seat): When using the
deck hooks, the third seat must
be fold down. (P. 106)
Type A Type B
599
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Warning reflector holder
Turn the knob clockwise.
Open the lid.
Secure the warning reflector.
The warning reflector itself is
not included as an original
equipment.
STEP
1
STEP
2
600
3-7. Other interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Cargo net hooks
To hang the cargo net, use the
cargo net hooks.
The cargo net itself is not
included as an original equip-
ment.
Auxiliary box (if equipped)
Type A
Remove the cover.
Type A Type B
601
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Type B
Auxiliary tray (if equipped)
602
3-7. Other interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Luggage cover (if equipped)
3-doors models
Attach the hooks to the head
restraints.
5-doors models
Attach the hooks to the head
restraints.
Vehicles with the third seats:
When using the luggage cover,
the third seat must be fold
down. (P. 106, 109)
Pull out the luggage cover and
hook it on the anchors.
STEP
1
STEP
1
STEP
2
603
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Removing the luggage cover
The luggage cover can be removed by following the procedure
below.
Retract the cover and release
both ends, then lift it out.
After removing the luggage cover,
place it somewhere other than the
passenger compartment.
Adjusting the sub cover (if equipped)
Fasten the button when the second seats
are in the rear-most position.
Unfasten the buttons before sliding the
second seats forward.
604
3-7. Other interior features
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When the cargo hooks are not in use
To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their stowed positions.
Caution while driving
Keep the auxiliary box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden
swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by an
open auxiliary box or the items stored inside.
Caution for the luggage cover
Do not allow children to climb on the luggage cover. Climbing on the luggage
cover could result in damage to the luggage cover, possibly causing death or
serious injury to the child.
4
Maintenance and care
605
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior ......... 606
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior .......... 610
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements................... 613
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions ..................... 617
Hood ................................. 622
Engine compartment......... 623
Tires.................................. 645
Tire inflation pressure ....... 649
Wheels.............................. 652
Air conditioning filter ......... 654
Wireless remote
control/electronic key
battery............................. 656
Checking and replacing
fuses ............................... 661
Light bulbs ........................ 675
606
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Automatic car washes
Fold the mirrors back before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the
front of the vehicle. Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving.
Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface
and harm your vehicle’s paint.
High pressure car washes
Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity
of the windows and the air suspension unit.
Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle
is closed properly.
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime
condition:
Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any
dirt and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thor-
oughly with water.
Wipe away any water.
Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle
body is cool.
607
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Aluminum wheels
Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use
hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical
cleaners. Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after
driving for long distance in the hot weather.
Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
Bumpers and side moldings
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
Notes for vehicles with a smart entry & start system (if equipped)
If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the
effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. Place the key
in a position 2 m (6 ft.) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehi-
cle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet
during a car wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information
display and a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm,
lock all the doors.
608
4-1. Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When washing the vehicle
Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may
cause the electrical components etc. to catch fire.
When cleaning the windshield (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield
wiper)
When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is
located is touched by hand
When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sensor
If something bumps against the windshield
If you directly touch the raindrop sensor body or if something bumps into
the raindrop sensor
Precautions regarding the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled
sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
Set the wiper switch to off.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wip-
ers may operate unexpectedly in the fol-
lowing situations, and may result in hands
being caught or other serious injuries and
cause damage to the wiper blades.
“OFF”
609
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
NOTICE
To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and compo-
nents (aluminum wheels etc.)
Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
After driving near the sea coast
After driving on salted roads
If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface
If you see dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings on the paint
After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust,
iron powder or chemical substances
If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud
If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place
with low humidity when storing wheels.
Cleaning the exterior lights
Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
To prevent damage to the windshield wiper arms
When lifting the wiper arms away from the windshield, pull the driver side
wiper arm upward first, and repeat for the passenger side. When returning
the wipers to their original position, do so from the passenger side first.
When using an automatic car wash (vehicles with rain sensing wind-
shield wipers)
Set the wiper switch to the off position.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may operate and the wiper
blades may be damaged.
610
4-1. Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior and
keep it in top condition:
Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty sur-
faces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
Cleaning the leather areas
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5 % neutral wool deter-
gent.
Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly
wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.
Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remain-
ing moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded ventilated
area.
Cleaning the synthetic leather areas
Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a
sponge or soft cloth.
Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the
dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
611
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Caring for leather areas
Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year
to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a
sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use
water. The excellent results are obtained when keeping the carpet as dry as
possible.
Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also
check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
CAUTION
Water in the vehicle
Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.
Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch
fire.
Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(P. 172)
An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function
properly, resulting in death or serious injury.
Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off
the windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
612
4-1. Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
NOTICE
Cleaning detergents
Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehi-
cle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:
Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline,
alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach
Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alco-
hol
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other
interior part’s painted surface may be damaged.
Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of
leather surfaces:
Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.
Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.
Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the uphol-
stery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats
up significantly.
Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes
into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or
under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.
Cleaning the inside of the rear window
Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause
damage to the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth
dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the
window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.
Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.
613
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular
maintenance is essential. Toyota recommends performing the fol-
lowing maintenance:
Scheduled maintenance
Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified inter-
vals according to the maintenance schedule.
For full details of your maintenance schedule, read the “Toyota
Service Booklet” or “Toyota Warranty Booklet”.
Do-it-yourself maintenance
What about do-it-yourself maintenance?
Many maintenance items are easy to do yourself if you have a little
mechanical ability and a few basic automotive tools.
Note, however, that some maintenance tasks require special tools
and skills. These are best performed by qualified technicians. Even if
you’re an experienced do-it-yourself mechanic, we recommend that
repairs and maintenance be conducted by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional. Any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer will keep a record of
maintenance, which could be useful should you ever require Warranty
Service. Should you choose to select a qualified and equipped profes-
sional other than an authorized Toyota repairer to service or maintain
your vehicle, we recommend that you request that a record of mainte-
nance be kept.
614
4-2. Maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Where to go for service?
In order to maintain your vehicle in the highest possible condition, Toyota
recommends that all repairs and service operations be carried out by autho-
rized Toyota dealers or repairers or other duly qualified and equipped profes-
sionals. For repairs and services covered by your warranty, please visit an
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, who will use genuine Toyota parts in
repairing any difficulties you may encounter. There can also be advantages
in utilizing authorized Toyota dealers or repairers for non-warranty repairs
and services, as members of the Toyota network will be able to expertly
assist you with any difficulties you may encounter.
Your Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional service department will perform all of the scheduled maintenance
on your vehicle reliably and economically due to their experience with
Toyota vehicles.
615
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Does your vehicle need repair?
Be on the alert for changes in performance and sounds, and visual tip-offs
that indicate service is needed. Some important clues are:
Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging
Appreciable loss of power
Strange engine noises
A fluid leak under the vehicle (However, water dripping from the air condi-
tioning after use is normal.)
Change in exhaust sound (This may indicate a dangerous carbon mon-
oxide leak. Drive with the windows open and have the exhaust system
checked immediately.)
Flat-looking tires, excessive tire squeal when cornering, uneven tire wear
Vehicle pulls to one side when driving straight on a level road
Strange noises related to suspension movement
Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling brake pedal, pedal almost
touches the floor, vehicle pulls to one side when braking
Engine coolant temperature continually higher than normal
If you notice any of these clues, take your vehicle to any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional, as
soon as possible. Your vehicle may need adjustment or repair.
616
4-2. Maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
If your vehicle is not properly maintained
Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and
possible serious injury or death.
Handling of the battery
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after
handling. (P. 636)
617
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct
procedures as given in these sections.
Items Parts and tools
Battery condition (P. 636)
•Warm water
Baking soda
Grease
Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
Engine coolant level (P. 632)
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non-silicate, non-
amine, non-nitrite and non-borate
coolant with long-life hybrid
organic acid technology. “Toyota
Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-
mixed with 50 % coolant and
50 % deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for adding cool-
ant)
618
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Items Parts and tools
Engine oil level P. 627)
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent
Rag or paper towel
Funnel (used only for adding
engine oil)
Fuses (P. 661)
Fuse with same amperage rating
as original
Light bulbs (P. 675)
Bulb with same number and watt-
age rating as original
• Phillips-head screwdriver
Flathead screwdriver
• Wrench
Radiator, condenser and inter-
cooler (P. 635)
Tire inflation pressure (P. 649)
Tire pressure gauge
Compressed air source
Washer fluid (P. 641)
Water or washer fluid containing
antifreeze (for winter use)
Funnel (used only for adding
water or washer fluid)
619
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may
move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death
or serious injury, observe the following precautions:
When working on the engine compartment:
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine
drive belt.
Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right
after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the
engine compartment.
Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the bat-
tery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.
Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.
Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage
painted surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with
clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, consult a doctor.
620
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: Be sure the engine switch is
off. With the engine switch in the “ON” position, the electric cooling fans may
automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant tem-
perature is high. (P. 635)
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: Be sure the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is off. With the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in IGNITION
ON mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air
conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (P. 635)
When working on or under the vehicle
Do not get under the vehicle with just the jack supporting it.
Always use automotive jack stands or other solid supports.
Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from
getting in your eyes.
621
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
NOTICE
If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear
due to dirt in the air.
If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads
wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
622
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Hood
CAUTION
Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion
and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
Pull the hood release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Move the auxiliary catch lever
to side direction and lift the
hood.
STEP
1
STEP
2
623
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Engine compartment
2TR-FE engine
Discharging dust valve
(P. 644)
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 632)
Cooling fan
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 629)
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 627)
Fuse box (P. 661)
Battery (P. 636)
Radiator (P. 635)
Condenser (P. 635)
Washer fluid tank (P. 641)
624
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
1GR-FE engine
Discharging dust valve
(if equipped) (P. 644)
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 627)
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 632)
Radiator (P. 635)
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 629)
Fuse box (P. 661)
Battery (P. 636)
Cooling fan
Condenser (P. 635)
Washer fluid tank (P. 641)
625
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
1KD-FTV engine
Discharging dust valve
(P. 644)
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 632)
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 627)
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 629)
Radiator (P. 635)
Battery (P. 636)
Fuse box (P. 661)
Fuel filter (P. 643, 806)
Intercooler (P. 635)
Condenser (P. 635)
Cooling fan
Washer fluid tank (P. 641)
ITN43M132
626
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Engine compartment cover
Removing the engine compartment cover
Installing the clips
627
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
Checking the engine oil
Park the vehicle on level ground. After turning off the engine,
wait more than five minutes for the oil to drain back into the
bottom of the engine.
Holding a rag under the end, pull
the dipstick out.
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check
the oil level.
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
628
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Type A
Low
Full
Type B
Low
Full
Type C
Low
Full
629
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near
the low level mark, add engine
oil of the same type as already in
the engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before
adding oil.
Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.
Engine oil selection P. 819
Oil quantity
(Low Full)
1GR-FE
engine
1.7 L (1.8 qt., 1.5 Imp.qt.)
1KD-FTV and
2TR-FE
engines
1.3 L (1.4 qt., 1.1 Imp.qt.)
Items Clean funnel
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
630
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Engine oil consumption
The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the
quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.
More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and
frequent acceleration and deceleration.
A new engine consumes more oil.
When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil
may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accu-
rately.
Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000 km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 Imp.qt./
600 miles)
If you consume more than 1.0 L (1.1 qt., 0.9 lmp.qt.) every 1000 km (600
miles), contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional.
After changing the engine oil (diesel engine only)
The oil maintenance data should be reset. Perform the following procedures:
Switch the display to the trip meter “A” when the engine is running.
(P. 268)
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
While pressing the “ODO TRIP” button (P. 268), set the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode (but do not start the
engine because otherwise the reset mode will be cancelled). Con-
tinue to press and hold the button until the multi-information display
indicates that the reset is complete.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
631
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Used engine oil
Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should
be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine
oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do
not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the
ground. Call any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional, service station or auto parts store for
information concerning recycling or disposal.
Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
NOTICE
To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on regular basis.
When replacing the engine oil
Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
632
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Engine coolant
Gasoline engine
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on
the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
“F” line
“L” line
If the level is on or below the “L”
line, add coolant up to the “F” line.
Diesel engine
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW”
lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
“FULL” line
“LOW” line
If the level is on or below the
“LOW” line, add coolant up to the
“FULL” line.
633
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50 % coolant and 50 %
deionized water. (Enabled: -35 C [-31 F])
For more details about engine coolant, contact any authorized Toyota dealer
or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant reservoir caps, drain cock
and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional, test the cap and check for
leaks in the cooling system.
CAUTION
When the engine is hot
Do not remove the radiator cap, or the coolant reservoir cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the
cap is removed, causing burns or other injuries.
634
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
NOTICE
When adding coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of
water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion
protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damage to parts or paint.
635
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Radiator, condenser and intercooler
Check the radiator, condenser and intercooler and clear any foreign
objects.
If any of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of
their condition, have your vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional.
CAUTION
When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator, condenser or intercooler as they may be hot and
cause burns.
636
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Battery
Check the battery as follows.
Caution symbols
The meanings of each caution symbol on the top of the battery are as
follows:
Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that
there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
No smoking, no naked
flames, no sparks
Battery acid
Shield eyes
Note operating
instructions
Keep away from children Explosive gas
637
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Checking battery fluid
Check that the level is between
the “UPPER” and “LOWER”
lines.
“UPPER LEVEL” line
“LOWER LEVEL” line
If the fluid level is at or below the
“LOWER” line, add distilled water.
Adding distilled water
Remove the vent plug.
Add distilled water.
If the “UPPER” line cannot be seen, check the fluid level by looking
directly at the cell.
Put the vent plug back on and close securely.
Low O.K.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
638
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable
and explosive. Therefore, observe the following before recharging:
If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to discon-
nect the ground cable.
Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and
disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.
After recharging/reconnecting the battery (vehicles with a smart entry
& start system)
The engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the sys-
tem.
Shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or depress the
brake pedal with the shift lever in N (manual transmission).
Open and close any of the doors.
Restart the engine.
Unlocking the doors using the smart entry & start system may not be
possible immediately after reconnecting the battery. If this happens, use
the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the
doors.
Start the engine with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCES-
SORY mode. The engine may not start with the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch turned OFF. However, the engine will operate normally from the
second attempt.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
639
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If
the battery is reconnected, the vehicle will return the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch mode to the status it was in before the battery was discon-
nected. Make sure to turn off the engine before disconnect the battery.
Take extra care when connecting the battery if the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch mode prior to discharge is unknown.
If the system will not start even after multiple attempts, contact any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer or duly qualified and equipped professional.
CAUTION
Chemicals in the battery
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce
hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death
or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near bat-
tery:
Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
Keep children away from the battery.
Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a
garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.
640
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or
cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.
If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical
attention immediately.
If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the cloth-
ing and follow the procedure above if necessary.
If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia,
beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Get emergency medical attention immedi-
ately.
NOTICE
When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all
accessories are turned off.
When adding distilled water
Avoid overfilling. Water spilled during battery recharging may cause corro-
sion.
641
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Washer fluid
If the washer fluid level is at
“LOW”, add washer fluid.
Using the gauge
The washer fluid level is checked by
observing the position of the level on the
liquid covered holes in the gauge.
If the level falls below the second hole
from the bottom (“LOW” position), refill
the washer fluid.
Current
fluid level
642
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When adding washer fluid
Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running as washer fluid
contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bot-
tle.
643
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Draining the fuel filter water (diesel engine only)
The water in the fuel filter must be drained immediately if the follow-
ing symptom occurs:
Vehicles with a non-optitron type meters
Type A
When the fuel filter warning light comes on.
Type B
When the fuel system warning light flashes and buzzer sounds.
Vehicles with an optitron type meters
When the warning message “DRAIN WATER FROM FUEL FILTER”
appears on the instrument cluster and buzzer
* sounds.
*: On some models
Remove the drain plug from the clamp and place a small tray
to catch the water.
Turn the drain plug about 2-2-
1/2 turns.
Loosening more than this
will cause water oozing from
around the drain plug.
Operate the priming pump
until the fuel begins to run out.
After draining, retighten the drain plug. Do not use a tool.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
644
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Discharging dust valve (if equipped)
Squeeze the rubber cap to
remove the dust if the discharg-
ing dust valve is dirty.
Shape of the valve differs slightly
in accordance with the engine.
NOTICE
To prevent damaging the engine
Do not drive with the discharging dust valve removed. Doing so cause
excessive engine wear.
645
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules
and treadwear.
Checking tires
New tread
Treadwear indicator
Worn tread
The location of treadwear indi-
cators is shown by the “TWI” or
” marks, etc., molded on
the sidewall of each tire.
Check spare tire condition and
pressure if not rotated.
Tire rotation
Vehicles with a standard spare tire
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
To equalize tire wear and help
extend tire life, Toyota recom-
mends that you rotate your
tires approximately every 5000
km (3000 miles).
Front
646
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to
expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage
A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size
or location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional.
Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it
has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
If the tread on snow tires wears down below 4 mm (0.16 in.)
The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.
Vehicles with an emergency tire puncture repair kit
Front
647
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as dan-
gerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in
death or serious injury.
Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.
Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply
tires).
Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.
648
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
NOTICE
Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the
cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause
damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.
If tire inflation pressures become low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
For vehicles with an emergency tire puncture repair kit (if equipped)
Do not tow anything if a tire that has been repaired using the emergency tire
puncture repair kit is installed. The load on the tire may cause unexpected
damage to the tire.
649
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Tire inflation pressure
Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
Reduced fuel efficiency
Reduced driving comfort and tire life
Reduced safety
Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
Make sure to maintain the proper tire inflation pressure. Tire inflation
pressure should be checked at least once per month. However,
Toyota recommends that tire inflation pressure be checked once
every two weeks. (P. 840)
650
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been
driven for more than 1.5 km or 1 mile, you will get an accurate cold tire
inflation pressure reading.
Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation
pressure that is even just a few pounds off can affect ride quality and
handling.
Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for tire infla-
tion pressure to be higher after driving.
Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is
balanced.
651
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may
occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury:
Excessive wear
Uneven wear
Poor handling
Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
Poor sealing of the tire bead
Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
NOTICE
When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause
air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps are lost, replace
them as soon as possible.
652
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced.
Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of
handling control.
Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that
they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter,
rim width, and inset
*.
Replacement wheels are available at any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional.
*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Toyota does not recommend using the following:
Wheels of different sizes or types
Used wheels
Bent wheels that have been straightened
Aluminum wheel precautions
Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use
with your aluminum wheels.
When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1600 km (1000 miles).
Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using
tire chains.
653
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When replacing wheels
Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the
Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.
Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tube-
less tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious
injury.
When installing the wheel nuts
Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened,
leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can
cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an acci-
dent and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or grease
from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
When balancing your wheels, use only Toyota genuine bal-
ance weights or the equivalent. If clip-on balance weights are
being used, use a plastic or rubber hammer to install the
weight.
Be sure to install the wheel nuts with
the tapered end facing inward. Install-
ing the nuts with the tapered end facing
outward can cause wheel to break and
eventually cause a wheel to come off
while driving, which could lead to an
accident resulting in death or serious
injury.
Tapered
portion
654
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air
conditioning efficiency.
Removal method
Turn the engine switch (vehicles without a smart entry &
start system) or “ENGINE START STOP” switch (vehicles
with a smart entry & start system) off.
Open the glove box. Slide off
the damper.
Push in each side of the glove
box to disconnect the claws.
Remove the filter cover.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
655
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Checking interval
Replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In
dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow early replacement may be
required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the
“Toyota Service Booklet” or “Toyota Warranty Booklet”.)
If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
NOTICE
When using the air conditioning system
Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the
system.
Replace it with a new one.
The “UP” marks shown on
the filter should be pointing up.
STEP
5
656
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Wireless remote control/electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.
You will need the following items:
Flathead screwdriver
Lithium battery
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system (type A):
CR2032
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system (type B):
CR2016
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: CR1632
Replacing the battery
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system (type A)
Remove the cover using a
coin protected with tape etc.
Remove the depleted battery
using the tip of a ball-point pen
or a similar pointed object.
Insert a new battery with the
“+” terminal facing up.
STEP
1
STEP
2
657
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system (type B)
Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key,
cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a rag.
Remove the module.
Open the case cover using a
coin protected with tape etc.
and remove the depleted bat-
tery.
Insert a new battery with the
“+” terminal facing up.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
658
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
Take out the mechanical key.
Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key,
cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a rag.
Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the
“+” terminal facing up.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
659
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Use the following types of lithium battery
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system (type A): CR2032
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system (type B): CR2016
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: CR1632
Batteries can be purchased at any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer,
or another duly qualified and equipped professional, local electrical appli-
ance shops or camera stores.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
If the electronic key battery is discharged
The following symptoms may occur:
The smart entry & start system (if equipped) and wireless remote control
will not function properly.
The operational range will be reduced.
660
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Removed battery and other parts
These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking.
Keep away from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious
injury.
Certification for the key battery
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT
TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUC-
TIONS.
NOTICE
For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:
Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.
Do not bend the battery terminals.
661
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have
blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
Turn the engine switch off.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment
Push the tab in and lift the lid
off.
STEP
1
STEP
2
662
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Drivers side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage rat-
ings” (P. 665) for details about which fuse to check.
Remove the fuse with the pull-out tool.
Only type A fuse can be
removed using the pullout
tool.
STEP
3
STEP
4
663
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Check if the fuse is blown.
Type A
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a
new fuse of an appropriate
amperage rating. The amper-
age rating can be found on the
fuse box lid.
Type B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped
professional.
STEP
5
1
2
ITY42C012
664
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped
professional.
Type D
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped
professional.
Type E
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped
professional.
665
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Fuse layout and amperage ratings
Engine compartment
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1 A/C RR 40 A Rear air conditioning system
2 PTC HTR NO.3 30 A PTC heater
3 AIR SUS 50 A
Air suspension system, AIR SUS
NO.2
4 INV 15 A Inverter
5 DEF 30 A Rear window defogger
6 FOG RR 7.5 A Rear fog lights
7 DEICER 20 A Windshield wiper deicer
666
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
8
FUEL HTR
*
1
25 A Fuel heater
AIR PMP
HTR
*
2
10 A Air pump heater
9 PTC HTR NO.2 30 A PTC heater
10 PTC HTR NO.1 50 A PTC heater
11 IG2 20 A Injector, ignition, meter
12 HORN 10 A Horn
13 EFI 25 A
EFI ECU, EDU, ECT ECU, fuel
pump, A/F heater relay, FPC, EFI
NO.2
14
A/F
*
3
20 A A/F SSR
EFI MAIN
*
9
20 A A/F SSR, EFI No.2
15 MIR HTR 15 A Mirror heater
16 VISCUS
*
1
10 A VISC heater
17 FOLD SEAT LH 30 A Folding seat (left)
18 FOLD SEAT RH 30 A Folding seat (right)
19 A/C COMP 10 A Air conditioning system
20 CDS FAN 20 A Condenser fan
21 STOP 10 A
Emergency stop light relay, stop
lights, high mount stop light, stop
light switch, VSC/ABS ECU, tow-
ing, smart entry & start system,
ECT ECU
22 AIR SUS NO.2 7.5 A AIR SUS ECU
23 H-LP RH-HI 15 A Headlight high beam (right)
24 H-LP LH-HI 15 A Headlight high beam (left)
25 HTR 50 A Air conditioning system
26 WIP WSH RR 30 A Rear window wipers and washer
Fuse Ampere Circuit
667
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
27 H-LP CLN 30 A Headlight cleaner
28 ST
30 A
*
3
40 A*
4
STARTER MTR
29 H-LP HI 25 A DIM relay, headlights
30 ALT-S 7.5 A ALT
31 TURN & HAZ 15 A
Front turn signal light, rear turn sig-
nal light, side turn signal light,
meter turn signal light, trailer light
32 D/L NO.1 25 A
Door lock motor, glass hatch
opener
33
ETCS
*
3
10 A EFI ECU
EDU
*
9
20 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
34 FUEL PMP
*
5
15 A Fuel pump
35 TOWING 30 A Towing
36 ALT
140 A
*
6
120 A*
3,7
Air conditioning system, AIR SUS,
headlight cleaner, PTC heater, tow-
ing, folding seat, STOP, rear win-
dow defogger, MIR HTR, CDS
FAN, RR FOG, DEICER, MG-CLT,
J/B, INV, RR WIP, RR WSH
37 P/I-B 80 A
Injector, ignition, meter, EFI, A/F
heater, horn
38 GLOW
*
4
80 A Glow plug
39 RAD NO.1 15 A
Audio system, navigation system,
rear seat entertainment system
40 AM2 7.5 A Starter system
Fuse Ampere Circuit
668
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
41 RAD NO.2 10 A Navigation system
42 MAYDAY
*
8
7.5 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
43 AMP 30 A Audio system
44 ABS NO.1 50 A ABS, VSC
45 ABS NO.2 30 A ABS, VSC
46 AIR PMP
*
3
50 A Air pump
47 SECURITY 10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
48 SMART 7.5 A Smart entry & start system
49 STRG LOCK 20 A Steering lock system
50 TOWING BRK 30 A Towing
51 WIP RR 15 A Rear window wiper
52 DOME 10 A
Interior lights, personal lights, van-
ity lights, door courtesy lights, foot-
well lights, outer foot lights,
overhead module
53 ECU-B 10 A
BODY ECU, meter, heater, steering
sensor, wireless remote control,
seat position memory, tilt and tele-
scopic steering, multi display, smart
entry & start system, folding seat,
cool box, DSS#2 ECU, steering
switch, D-module switch, overhead
module
Fuse Ampere Circuit
669
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
*
1
: 1KD -FTV models only
*
2
: 1GR-FE models only
*
3
: Vehicles with gasoline engine
*
4
: Vehicles with diesel engine
*
5
: 1KD-FTV models with sub fuel tank only
*
6
: 1KD-FTV models with left hand drive vehicle
*
7
: 1KD-FTV models with right hand drive vehicle
*
8
: 1GR-FE models with right hand drive vehicle
*
9
: 1KD-FTV models (KDJ150R-GKFEYW, KDJ150R-GKAEYW,
KDJ150L-GKFEYW, KDJ150L-GKAEYW, KDJ155R-GJFEYW,
KDJ155R-GJAEYW, KDJ155L-GJFEYW and KDJ155L-GJAEYW
models
*
10
except for Russia, Ukraine, Serbia, Montenegro, Macedonia
and Croatia)
*
10
: The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label. (P. 815)
54 H-LP RH-LO 15 A
Headlight low beam (right), head-
light leveling system
55 H-LP LH-LO 15 A Headlight low beam (left)
56 INJ 10 A
Coil, injector, ignition, ECT ECU,
noise filter
57 EFI NO.2 10 A
O2 SSR, AFM, ACIS VSV, AI
COMB, EYP VSV, AI DRIVER,
EGR VRV, SWIRL VSV, SWIRL
VSV 2, E/G CUT VSV, EGR COOL
BYPASS VSV, D-SLOT ROTARY
SOL, AI VSV RLY
58 WIP FR NO.2 7.5 A DSS#1 ECU
59 WSH RR 15 A Rear window washer
60 SPARE Spare fuse
61 SPARE Spare fuse
62 SPARE Spare fuse
Fuse Ampere Circuit
670
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Under the instrument panel
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1 P/OUTLET 15 A Power outlet
2ACC 7.5 A
Outside rear view mirror motor,
BODY ECU, air conditioning sys-
tem, audio system, navigation sys-
tem, parking assist system,
sequential switch, back up relay,
DSS#2 ECU, AT indicator, EFI
ECU, shift lock ECU
3BKUP LP 10 A
Back-up lights, audio system, multi
information display, DSS#2 ECU,
parking assist sensor
671
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
4 TOWING BKUP 10 A Towing
5 AVS 20 A Air suspension system
6KDSS 10 A KDSS ECU
7 4WD 20 A 4WD system, rear differential lock
8 P/SEAT FL 30 A Front power seat (left)
9 D/L NO.2 25 A
Door lock motor, glass hatch
opener, BODY ECU
10 PSB 30 A PSB ECU
11 TI & TE 15 A Tilt and telescopic steering
12 FOG FR 15 A Front fog lights
13 OBD 7.5 A DLC 3
14 A/C 7.5 A Air conditioning system
15 AM1 7.5 A Starting system
16 DOOR RL 25 A Rear power window (left)
17 ECU-IG NO.1 10 A
Shift lock ECU, VSC ECU, steering
sensor, yaw rate sensor, sequential
switch, auto wiper ECU, back up
relay, outside rear view mirror
heater, tilt & telescopic steering,
PSB ECU, DSS#1 ECU, front radar
sensor, power steering ECU, AFS
ECU
Fuse Ampere Circuit
672
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
18 IG1 7.5 A
Front turn signal light, rear turn sig-
nal light, side turn signal light,
meter turn signal light, trailer light,
ALT, VSC, C/C switch
19 ECU-IG NO.2 10 A
Rear window defogger, seat heater
switch, inverter relay, air condition-
ing system, EC mirror, BODY ECU,
power heater switch, navigation
system, DSS#2 ECU, moon roof
ECU, meter switch, parking assist
sensor, accessory meter, folding
seat ECU, O/H IG, deicer, AFS
ECU, D-module, rain sensor, air
suspension, P/SEAT IND
20 S/HTR FR 20 A Seat heater
21 P/SEAT FR 30 A Front power seat (right)
22 DOOR P 30 A
Front power window (passenger’s
side)
23 DOOR 10 A Power window
24 DOOR D 25 A Front power window (driver’s side)
25 DOOR RR 25 A Rear power window (right)
26 S/ROOF 25 A Moon roof
27 WIP 30 A Windshield wipers and washer
28 WASHER 20 A
Windshield wipers and washer,
rear window wipers and washer
Fuse Ampere Circuit
673
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
29 COOLING 10 A Cool box
30 IGN 10 A
EFI ECU, C/OPN RLY, VSC ECU,
air bag ECU, smart entry & start
system, steering lock ECU, CAN
gateway ECU
31 GAUGE 7.5 A Meter
32 PANEL 7.5 A
Switch illumination, glove box light,
navigation system, audio system,
air conditioning system, outside
rear view mirror switch, folding seat
switch, multi-information display, P/
SEAT IND, SHIFT, COOL BOX
33 TAIL 10 A
Front position lights, tail lights,
license plate lights, EFI ECU, rear
fog lights, towing, front fog lights
Fuse Ampere Circuit
674
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
After a fuse is replaced
If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb
may need replacement. (P. 675)
If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
If there is an overload in a circuit
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
CAUTION
To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or
injury.
Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any
other object in place of a fuse.
Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
Do not modify the fuses or the fuse boxes.
NOTICE
Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional, as soon as possible.
675
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs yourself. The difficulty level of
replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb
replacement seems difficult to perform, contact any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional.
For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
Preparing for light bulb replacement
Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (P. 843)
Removing the engine compartment covers
P. 626
Front bulb locations
Headlight low beam
(halogen bulb)
Front fog light
(if equipped)
Headlight high beam
Front position light
Front turn signal light
676
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Rear bulb locations
Vehicles with under floor mounted spare tire and without
spare tire
Vehicles with back door mounted spare tire
Rear fog light
Rear turn signal light
Back-up light
License plate light
Rear fog light
Rear turn signal light
Back-up light
License plate light
677
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Replacing light bulbs
Headlight low beams (vehicles with halogen bulbs)
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Unplug the connector while
pushing the lock release.
Replace the light bulb, and install
the bulb base.
Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb
with the mounting, and insert.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
678
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Turn and secure the bulb base.
Shake the bulb base gently to
check that it is not loose, turn the
headlights on once and visually
confirm that no light is leaking
through the mounting.
Headlight high beams
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Unplug the connector while
pushing the lock release.
Replace the light bulb, and install
the bulb base.
Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb
with the mounting, and insert.
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
679
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Turn and secure the bulb base.
Shake the bulb base gently to
check that it is not loose, turn the
headlights on once and visually
confirm that no light is leaking
through the mounting.
Front fog lights (if equipped)
Remove the fender liner bolt
and partly remove the fender
liner.
Unplug the connector while
pushing the lock release.
Turn the light bulb counterclock-
wise.
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
680
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Replace the light bulb.
Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb
with the mounting, and insert.
Turn and secure the bulb base.
Install the bulb base.
Shake the bulb base gently to
check that it is not loose, turn the
fog lights on once and visually
confirm that no light is leaking
through the mounting.
When installing the cover, conduct in reverse.
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
STEP
1
681
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Front position lights
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
The shape of the bulb base dif-
fers slightly on the let and right
sides.
Remove the light bulb.
STEP
1
STEP
2
682
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Front turn signal lights
Remove the fender liner bolts.
Remove the fender liner.
STEP
1
STEP
2
683
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
STEP
3
STEP
4
684
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Rear turn signal lights and back-up lights
Open the back door.
Left-hand side:
Remove the bolts and lamp
assembly.
Right-hand side:
Remove the bolts.
Close the back door half way
and remove the lamp assembly.
STEP
1
685
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Unplug the connector while
pushing the lock release.
Turn the bulb bases counter-
clockwise.
Rear turn signal light
Back-up light
Remove the light bulb.
Rear turn signal light
Back-up light
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
686
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Rear fog lights (if equipped)
Remove the under cover bolts
and pull down the under cover.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
687
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
License plate lights
Vehicles with under floor mounted spare tire and without spare
tire
Remove the screws.
Remove the lens and the license
plate light unit.
Remove the light bulb.
STEP
1
STEP
2
688
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Vehicles with back door mounted spare tire
Remove the screws.
Remove the lens and the licence
plate light unit.
Remove the light bulb.
Lights other than the above
If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional.
Headlight low beams (high-intensity discharge bulbs)
Side turn signal lights
High mounted stoplight
Stop/tail lights
STEP
1
STEP
2
689
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
High-intensity discharge (HID) headlights
If voltage to the high-intensity discharge bulbs is insufficient, the light may
not come on, or may go out temporarily. The high-intensity discharge bulbs
will come on when normal power is restored.
LED light bulbs
The side turn signal lights, tail/stop lights and high mounted stoplight
consists of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle
to any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional to have the light replaced.
Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional, for more information in the following situations.
Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does
not indicate a malfunction.
Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.
Water has built up inside the headlight.
690
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Replacing light bulbs
Turn off the headlights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately
after turning off the headlights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the
bulb by the plastic or metal portion.
If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack.
Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so
may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This
may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
High-intensity discharge (HID) headlights
Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional before replacing high-intensity discharge head-
lights (including light bulbs).
Do not touch the high-intensity discharge headlight’s high voltage socket
when the headlights are turned on.
An extremely high voltage of 20000 V will be discharged and could result
in death or serious injury by electric shock.
Do not attempt to repair or disassemble light bulbs, connectors, electric
circuits or component parts.
Doing so may result in death or serious injury due to electric shock.
To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
Check the wattage of the bulb before installing to prevent heat damage.
5
When trouble arises
691
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers.......... 692
If your vehicle needs
to be towed..................... 694
If you think something is
wrong.............................. 701
Fuel pump shut off
system (gasoline
engine only).................... 702
5-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds............................ 703
If a warning message
is displayed..................... 718
If you have a flat tire
(vehicles with a standard
spare tire) ....................... 743
If you have a flat tire
(vehicles with an
emergency tire
puncture repair kit).......... 765
If the engine will
not start........................... 786
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P ............ 789
If you lose your
keys/wireless remote
control transmitter........... 790
If the electronic key does
not operate properly ....... 791
If the vehicle battery is
discharged ...................... 795
If your vehicle
overheats........................ 803
If you run out of fuel and
the engine stalls
(diesel engine only) ........ 806
If the vehicle becomes
stuck ............................... 807
If your vehicle has
to be stopped in an
emergency...................... 809
692
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is
involved in an accident.
Type A
Press the switch to flash all
the turn signal lights. To turn
them off, push the switch once
again.
Type B
Press the switch to flash all
the turn signal lights. To turn
them off, push the switch once
again.
5
693
5-1. Essential information
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the emergency flashers on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
Type C
Press the switch to flash all
the turn signal lights. To turn
them off, push the switch once
again.
694
5-1. Essential information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
If your vehicle needs to be towed
Before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional, before towing.
The engine is running but the vehicle will not move.
The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional, such as or a commercial towing service,
using a lift-type truck or a flat bed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/pro-
vincial and local laws.
5
695
5-1. Essential information
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Emergency towing
If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency
towing hooks. This should only attempted on hard surfaced roads for
short distances at low speeds.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The
vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in
good condition.
For vehicles with an automatic transmission, only the front towing
hooks may be used.
Towing hook (front)
Towing hook (rear)
696
5-1. Essential information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling type truck
to prevent body damage.
Towing with a wheel lift-type truck
From the front
Use a towing dolly under the rear
wheels.
From the rear
Use a towing dolly under the
front wheels.
5
697
5-1. Essential information
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Using a flat bed truck
If your Toyota is transported by a
flat bed truck, it should be tied
down at the locations shown in
the illustration.
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45.
Do not overly tighten the tie
downs or the vehicle may be
damaged.
ITY51C022
698
5-1. Essential information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Before emergency towing
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
Release the parking brake.
Put the four-wheel drive control switch in H4F. (The center differen-
tial is unlocked.)
Shift the shift lever in N (automatic transmission) or neutral (manual
transmission).
Put the engine switch in the “ACC” (engine off) or “ON” position
(engine running).
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch must be in the ACCESSORY
mode (engine off) or IGNITION ON mode (engine running).
Put the four-wheel drive control switch in H4. (The center differen-
tial is unlocked.)
Put the vehicle height in the N mode and press height control switch
to turn off the rear height control air suspension. (if equipped)
Shift the shift lever in N (automatic transmission) or neutral (manual
transmission).
Release the parking brake.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
5
699
5-1. Essential information
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Caution while towing
Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive
stress on the emergency towing hook and the cables or chains. Always be
cautious of the surroundings and other vehicles while towing.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system:
Do not turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off.
Doing so will lock the steering wheel and prevent operation, possibly caus-
ing an accident and resulting in death or serious injury.
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering
will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.
Before emergency towing (vehicles with rear height control air suspen-
sion)
When your vehicle is towed, put the vehicle height in the “N” mode and push
the height control off button to turn off the rear height control suspension
system.
Otherwise, the vehicle height may be changed in the automatic leveling
function, resulting in an unexpected accident. For details, refer to the “Off-
road driving Owner’s manual”.
700
5-1. Essential information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
NOTICE
To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission and transfer
when towing using a wheel-lift type truck
Never tow this vehicle with any of the wheels in contact with the ground.
To avoid serious damage to your vehicle (vehicles with an automatic
transmission)
To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type
truck
When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at
the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the
vehicle could be damaged while being towed.
To prevent body damage when towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission and transfer in
emergency towing (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Never tow a vehicle from the rear with four wheels on the ground. This may
cause serious damage to the transmission.
Do not use the rear emergency towing
hook.
5
701
5-1. Essential information
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably
needs adjustment or repair. Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional, as
soon as possible.
Visible symptoms
Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points
higher than normal
Audible symptoms
Changes in exhaust sound
Excessive tire squeal when cornering
Strange noises related to the suspension system
Pinging or other noises related to the engine
Operational symptoms
Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly
Appreciable loss of power
Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost
touches the floor
702
5-1. Essential information
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Fuel pump shut off system (gasoline engine only)
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is
activated.
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system
Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
Restart the engine.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode
or turn it off.
Restart the engine.
NOTICE
Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been
damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or when
an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system
stops the supply fuel to the engine.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
5
703
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle
may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake sys-
tem. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:
A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven at a speed of approximately 5 km/h
(3 mph) or more.
Warning light Warning light/Details
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)
*
Low brake fluid
Malfunction in the brake system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not
released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully
released the system is operating normally.
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights
comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes
off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.
However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional.
704
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to the vehi-
cle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional.
Have the vehicle inspected immediately.
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to
the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional, immedi-
ately.
Warning light Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.
Low engine oil pressure warning light (vehicles with
non-optitron type meters)
Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low
5
705
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Warning light Warning light/Details
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
The emission control system;
The electronic engine control system;
The electronic throttle control system; or
The electronic automatic transmission control system.
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
The SRS airbag system; or
The seat belt pretensioner system.
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
The ABS; or
The brake assist system
Power steering system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the power steering system
(Flashes)
Pre-crash safety system warning light (vehicles with
optitron type meters)
*
1
Indicates a malfunction in the pre-crash safety system.
The warning light will operate as follows, even when the
system is not malfunctioning:
The light will flash quickly when the system is operating.
(P. 380)
The light will turn on when the pre-crash braking is dis-
abled. (P. 381)
The light will turn on when the system cannot temporarily
be used. (P. 727)
706
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Slip indicator light
Indicates a malfunction in:
Vehicle Stability Control;
Active TRC
*
1,2
;
The indicator will blink when the system listed above or
below is operational. (P. 374)
Down Hill assist Control
*
1,2
;
Hill-start Assist Control
*
1,2
; or
Crawl Control
*
1,2
.
Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light
(vehicles with an automatic transmission) (vehicles
with non-optitron type meters)
• Indicates that the automatic transmission fluid temperature
is too high if the light comes on.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place, shift the shift lever to P
and wait until the light goes off. If the light goes off, you
may start the vehicle again.
Indicates a malfunction in the automatic transmission sys-
tem if the light flashes.
KDSS warning light
*
1
Indicates a malfunction in KDSS
Timing belt replacement warning light (vehicles with
non-optitron type meters)
*
3
Indicates that the timing belt should be replaced.
Fuel filter warning light (vehicles with non-optitron type
meters)
*
3
(warning buzzer)*
1
Indicates that the amount of accumulated water in the fuel
filter has reached the specified level
Warning light Warning light/Details
5
707
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
*
1
: If equipped
*
2
: Refer to the “Off-road Driving Owner’s Manual”
*
3
: 1KD-FTV models (if equipped)
*
4
: The buzzer will sound at the same time the warning light flashes.
Fuel system warning light (vehicles with non-optitron
type meters)
*
3
(warning buzzer)*
1,4
Indicates:
The amount of accumulated water in the fuel filter has
reached the specified level if the light flashes.
Malfunction in the fuel system if the light comes on.
DPF system warning light (vehicles with non-optitron
type meters)
*
1
Indicates:
The amount of accumulated deposit in the DPF catalytic
converter has reached the specified level if the light comes
on.
Regenerate the filter. (P. 716)
Malfunction in the Diesel Particulate Filter system if the
light flashes.
Warning light Warning light/Details
708
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning light goes off.
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
Open door warning light
(warning buzzer)
*
1
Indicates that a door or
glass hatch is not fully
closed.
Check that all doors or glass
hatch are closed.
Low fuel level warning
light
Refuel the vehicle.
Vehicles without sub fuel
tank:
Indicates that remaining
fuel is about 13.0 L (3.4
gal., 2.8 Imp.gal.) or less if
the light comes on.
Vehicles with sub fuel
tank
*
2
:
Indicates that remaining
fuel is about 22.0 L (5.8
gal., 4.8 Imp.gal.) or less if
the light comes on.
1KD-FTV models with sub
fuel tank
*
2
only:
Indicates that remaining
fuel is about 22.0 L (5.8
gal., 4.8 Imp.gal.) or less if
the light flashes.
5
709
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Drivers seat belt
reminder light
(warning buzzer)
*
3
Warns the driver to fasten
his/her seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
(On the center
panel)
Front passengers seat
belt reminder light
(warning buzzer)
*
3
Warns the front passen-
ger to fasten his/her seat
belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
Master warning light
(vehicles with an optitron
type meters)
A buzzer sounds and the
warning light comes on or
flashes to indicate that the
master warning system
has detected a malfunc-
tion.
P. 718
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
710
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Low engine oil level warn-
ing light (vehicles with
non-optitron type
meters)
*
2
Indicates that engine oil
level is low
Check the level of engine oil
and add more oil if neces-
sary.
(Flashes)
Engine oil change
reminder light (vehicles
with non-optitron type
meters) (diesel engine)
Indicates that the engine
oil is scheduled to be
changed
Flashes approximately
25000 km (15000 miles)
after the engine oil is
changed (the indicator will
not work properly unless
the oil maintenance data
has been reset)
Check the engine oil and
change if necessary. After
changing the engine oil, the
oil change system should
be reset. (P. 630)
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
5
711
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
*
1
:Open door warning buzzer:
The open door warning buzzer sounds to alert one or more of the doors is
not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 5 km/h [3 mph]).
*
2
:If equipped
*
3
:Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminders:
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts reminder sounds to alert the
driver and front passenger that his/her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer
sounds for 30 seconds after the vehicle has reached a speed of at least 20
km/h (12 mph). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound
in a different tone for 90 more seconds.
(Remains on)
Engine oil change
reminder light (vehicles
with non-optitron type
meters) (diesel engine)
Indicates that the engine
oil should be changed
Comes on approximately
30000 km (20000 miles)
after the engine oil has
been changed (and the oil
maintenance data has
been reset)
Have the engine oil and oil
filter checked and/or
changed by any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and
equipped professional. After
changing the engine oil, the
oil change system should
be reset. (P. 630)
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
712
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Follow the correction procedures. (Smart entry & start system
warning light and buzzer) (vehicles with non-optitron type meters)
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning light turns off.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior Warning light Details
Correction
procedure
Contin-
uous
Contin-
uous
Indicates that the
driver’s door was
opened and closed
while the electronic
key was not in the
vehicle, the shift lever
was not in P (auto-
matic transmission) or
N (manual transmis-
sion) and the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
was not turned off.
Shift the
shift lever to
P.
Bring the
electronic
key back
into the
vehicle.
5
713
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Sounds
once
3 times
Indicates that the
driver’s door has been
opened or closed with
the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch in any
mode other than OFF,
the shift lever was in P
(automatic transmis-
sion) or N (manual
transmission) and the
electronic key outside
of the detection area.
Turn the
“ENGINE
START
STOP”
switch off.
Bring the
electronic
key back
into the
vehicle.
Sounds
once
Sounds
once
for 5
seconds
(Comes on
for about 60
seconds.)
Indicates that the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch in any
mode other than OFF,
the shift lever was in P
(vehicles with an auto-
matic transmission),
the electronic key out-
side of the detection
area and attempt to
lock the vehicle with
smart entry & start sys-
tem.
Turn the
“ENGINE
START
STOP”
switch off.
Bring the
electronic
key back
into the
vehicle.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior Warning light Details
Correction
procedure
714
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Sounds
once
Sounds
3 times
Indicates that a door
other than the driver’s
door has been opened
or closed with the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch in any
mode other than OFF,
the shift lever was in P
(automatic transmis-
sion) or N (manual
transmission) and the
electronic key outside
of the detection area.
Turn the
“ENGINE
START
STOP”
switch off.
Bring the
electronic
key back
into the
vehicle.
Sounds
once
Indicates the elec-
tronic key is not pres-
ent when attempting to
start the engine.
Confirm the
location of
the elec-
tronic key
Interior
buzzer
Exterior Warning light Details
Correction
procedure
5
715
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
For some models, the malfunction indicator lamp will come on if the fuel tank
becomes completely empty. If the fuel tank is empty, refuel the vehicle
immediately. The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after several trips.
If the malfunction indicator lamp does not go off, contact any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional.
If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light or the center differen-
tial lock indicator light blinks
Take the specified steps. (Refer to the “Off-road Driving Owner’s Manual”)
Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder
If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger
detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash, even if a passen-
ger is not sitting in the seat.
If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passen-
ger, and the warning light may not operate properly.
Engine oil change reminder light (diesel engine only)
Replace the engine oil and oil filter when the engine oil change reminder
light does not come on even if 24 months have passed or you have driven
over 30000 km (18000 miles) after the engine oil was changed.
There is a possibility that the engine oil change reminder light has been illu-
minated when you have driven less than 30000 km (18000 miles) based on
a usage or driving condition.
716
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
If the DPF system warning light comes on
The deposit collected in the filter needs to be regenerated.
To regenerate the filter, the following driving methods are recommended
*:
By driving continuously (for example, at around 60 km/h [36 mph] for
approximately 20 minutes).
By avoiding short trips, or by driving continuously (leaving the engine
running for long periods of time).
The DPF warning light will extinguish when regeneration is complete. How-
ever, if this driving cannot be carried out, or if the light does not extinguish
even after driving, have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional imme-
diately.
For details of the DPF system, refer to P. 389.
*: When driving, pay sufficient attention to weather, road conditions, terrain
and traffic conditions, and drive according to traffic laws.
Customization
The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled.
(Customizable features P. 849)
5
717
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional. The vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the
ABS system may fail, which could cause an accident resulting in death or
serious injury.
When the power steering system warning light comes on
The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.
If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold
firmly and operate using more force than usual.
NOTICE
If the fuel filter warning light comes on
Never drive the vehicle with the warning light on. Continued driving with
water accumulated in the fuel filter will damage the fuel injection pump.
718
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
If a warning message is displayed
: If equipped
For vehicles with optitron type meters: The multi-information display
shows warnings of system malfunctions, incorrectly performed
operations, or shows messages that indicate a need for mainte-
nance.
If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and
perform the following actions:
Master warning light
The master warning light also
comes on or flashes in order to
indicate that a message is cur-
rently being displayed on the
multi-information display.
Multi-information display
If any of the warning lights comes on again after the following
actions have been performed, contact any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional.
5
719
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Stop the vehicle immediately.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-infor-
mation display. The following warning indicates the possibility of dam-
age to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the
vehicle in a safe place and contact any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
Have the vehicle inspected immediately.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-infor-
mation display. Failure to investigate the cause of the following warn-
ings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly
cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional immediately.
Warning message Details
Indicates abnormal engine oil pressure
The warning light may come on if the engine oil
pressure is too low.
720
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Warning message Details
(If equipped)
Indicates that the automatic transmission fluid
temperature is too high
Stop the vehicle in a safe place, shift the shift
lever to P and wait until the light goes off. If the
light goes off, you may start the vehicle again.
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the automatic
transmission system
Indicates a malfunction in the steering lock
system
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the rear height con-
trol air suspension system
5
721
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the pre-crash safety
system
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the parking assist-
sensor
The malfunctioning sensor is shown flashing on
the display.
(Flashes)
or
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the radar cruise con-
trol system
Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate
the system, and then press the button again to
reactivate the system.
Warning message Details
722
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the clutch switch
system
(Diesel engine)
Indicates a malfunction in the fuel system
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the Diesel Particu-
late Filter system
Warning message Details
5
723
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Follow the correction procedures.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-infor-
mation display. After taking the specified steps to correct the sus-
pected problem, check that the warning message goes off.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
5-door
models
/
3-door
models
Indicates that one or
more of the doors is
not fully closed
The system also indi-
cates which doors are
not fully closed.
If the vehicle reaches
a speed of 5 km/h (3
mph), flashes
and a buzzer sounds
to indicate that the
door(s) are not yet fully
closed.
Make sure that all the
doors are closed.
724
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
(If equipped)
Indicates that the
glass hatch is not fully
closed
If the vehicle reaches
a speed of 5 km/h (3
mph), flashes
and a buzzer sounds
to indicate that the
glass hatch is not yet
fully closed.
Close the glass hatch.
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Indicates that the
moon roof is not fully
closed (with the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch off, and
the drivers door
open)
Close the moon roof.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
5
725
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Indicates that the
parking brake is still
engaged
If the vehicle reaches
a speed of 5 km/h (3
mph), flashes
and a buzzer sounds
to indicate that the
parking brake is still
engaged.
Release the parking
brake.
Indicates that engine
oil level is low
Check the level of
engine oil, and add if
necessary.
This message may
appear if the vehicle is
stopped on a slope.
Move the vehicle to a
level surface and
check to see if the
message disappears.
(Diesel engine)
Indicates that the
amount of accumu-
lated water in the fuel
filter has reached the
specified level
Drain the water from the
fuel filter. (P. 643)
Warning message Details Correction procedure
726
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
(Diesel engine)
Indicates that the
engine oil is sched-
uled to be changed
Check the engine oil
and change if neces-
sary. After changing the
engine oil, the oil
change system should
be reset. (P. 630)
Comes on approxi-
mately 25000 km
(15000 miles) after the
engine oil is changed.
(The indicator will not
work properly unless
the oil maintenance
data has been reset.)
(Diesel engine)
Indicates that the
engine oil and oil fil-
ter should be changed
Have the engine oil and
oil filter checked and/or
changed by any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped
professional. After
changing the engine oil,
the oil change system
should be reset.
(P. 630)
Warning message Details Correction procedure
5
727
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
(Diesel engine)
Indicates that the tim-
ing belt is scheduled
to be changed.
Have the timing belt
checked and/or
changed by any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped
professional.
(If equipped)
Indicates that the pre-
crash safety system is
not currently func-
tional
Clean the grill and the
sensor if they are dirty.
In case of overheating,
the system will become
functional once the sys-
tem cools down.
(If equipped)
Indicates that parking
assist-sensor is dirty
or covered with ice
A buzzer also sounds.
Clean the sensor.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
728
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Indicates that the
radar cruise control
sensor is dirty or cov-
ered with ice
A buzzer also sounds.
Clean the grill and the
sensor if they are dirty.
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Indicates that the
radar cruise control
system is unable to
judge vehicle-to-vehi-
cle distance
A buzzer also sounds.
If the windshield wipers
are on, turn them off or
set them to a mode
other than “AUTO” or
high speed wiper opera-
tion.
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Indicates that your
vehicle is nearing the
vehicle ahead (in
radar cruise mode)
A buzzer also sounds.
Slow the vehicle by
applying the brakes.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
5
729
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
*: 1KD-FTV models with sub fuel tank only
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Indicates that there is
a high possibility of a
frontal collision, or
that the pre-crash
braking function is
operating
A buzzer also sounds.
Slow the vehicle by
applying the brakes.
(Flashes)
(Diesel engine)
*
Indicates that remain-
ing fuel is approxi-
mately 22.0 L (5.8 gal.,
4.8 Imp.gal.) or less
A buzzer also sounds.
Refuel the vehicle.
(If equipped)
Indicates the amount
of accumulated
deposit in the DPF cat-
alytic converter has
reached the specified
level
Regenerate the filter.
(P. 741)
Warning message Details Correction procedure
730
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Have the malfunction repaired immediately.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning message and light go off.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details
Correction
procedure
Sounds
once
(Flashes)
The electronic key
is not detected
when an attempt is
made to start the
engine.
Confirm the
location of
the elec-
tronic key.
5
731
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Sounds
once
Sounds
3 times
(Flashes)
The electronic key
was carried out-
side the vehicle
and a door other
than the driver’s
door was opened
and closed while
the “ENGINE
START STOP”
switch was in a
mode other than
off.
Bring the
electronic
key back
into the
vehicle.
The driver’s door
was opened and
closed while the
electronic key was
not in the vehicle,
the shift lever was
in P (automatic
transmission) or N
(manual transmis-
sion) and the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch was
not turned off.
Turn the
“ENGINE
START
STOP”
switch off
or bring the
electronic
key back
into the
vehicle.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details
Correction
procedure
732
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Sounds
once
Sounds
once
for 5
seconds
(Displayed alternately)
(Flashes)
An attempt was
made to exit the
vehicle with the
electronic key and
lock the doors
without first turn-
ing the “ENGINE
START STOP”
switch off.
Turn the
“ENGINE
START
STOP”
switch off
and lock
the doors
again.
Sounds
once
(Flashes)
An attempt was
made to start the
engine without the
electronic key
being present, or
the electronic key
was not function-
ing normally.
An attempt was
made to drive
when the regular
key was not inside
the vehicle.
Confirm
that the
electronic
key is
inside the
vehicle.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details
Correction
procedure
5
733
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Contin-
uous
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
The driver’s door
was opened when
the shift lever was
not in P and the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch was
not turned off.
Shift the
shift lever
to P.
Contin-
uous
Contin-
uous
(Displayed alternately)
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
The driver’s door
was opened and
closed while the
electronic key was
not in the vehicle,
the shift lever was
not in P and the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch was
not turned off.
Shift the
shift lever
to P.
Bring the
electronic
key back
into the
vehicle.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details
Correction
procedure
734
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Sounds
once
Sounds
once
for 5
seconds
(Flashes)
An attempt was
made to lock the
doors using the
smart entry & start
system while the
electronic key was
still inside the vehi-
cle.
Retrieve
the elec-
tronic key
from the
vehicle and
lock the
doors
again.
An attempt was
made to lock either
front door by open-
ing a door and put-
ting the inside lock
button into the lock
position, then clos-
ing the door by
pulling on the out-
side door handle
with the electronic
key still inside the
vehicle.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details
Correction
procedure
5
735
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Sounds
once
(automatic transmission)
or
(manual transmission)
(Flashes)
When the doors
were unlocked with
the mechanical
key and then the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch was
pressed, the elec-
tronic key could
not be detected in
the vehicle.
The electronic key
could not be
detected in the
vehicle even after
the “ENGINE
START STOP”
switch was
pressed two con-
secutive times.
Touch the
electronic
key to the
“ENGINE
START
STOP”
switch
while
depressing
the brake
pedal
(automatic
transmis-
sion)
or clutch
pedal
(manual
transmis-
sion).
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details
Correction
procedure
736
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Sounds
once
(Flashes)
An attempt was
made to start the
engine with the
shift lever in an
incorrect position.
Shift the
shift lever
to P and
start the
engine.
Sounds
once
(Flashes)
An attempt was
made to turn the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch off
when the shift
lever was not in P.
To turn off
the engine,
first shift
the shift
lever to P
and then
turn the
“ENGINE
START
STOP”
switch off.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details
Correction
procedure
5
737
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)

Power was turned
off due to the auto-
matic power off
function.
Next time
when start-
ing the
engine,
increase
the engine
speed
slightly and
maintain
that level
for approxi-
mately 5
minutes to
recharge
the battery.
Sounds
once
The electronic key
has a low battery.
(The message will
be shown for about
15 seconds.)
Replace
the elec-
tronic key
battery.
(P. 656)
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details
Correction
procedure
738
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Sounds
once
(automatic transmission)
or
(manual transmission)
(Flashes)
The driver’s door
was opened and
closed with the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
turned off and then
the “ENGINE
START STOP”
switch was put in
ACCESSORY
mode twice without
the engine being
started.
Press the
“ENGINE
START
STOP”
switch
while
depressing
the brake
pedal
(automatic
transmis-
sion)
or clutch
pedal
(manual
transmis-
sion).
During an engine
starting procedure
in the event that
the electronic key
was not function-
ing properly
(P. 791), the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch was
touched with the
electronic key.
Press the
“ENGINE
START
STOP”
switch
within 10
seconds of
the buzzer
sounding.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details
Correction
procedure
5
739
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Sounds
once
(Flashes)
The steering lock
could not be
released within 3
seconds of the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
being pressed.
Press the
“ENGINE
START
STOP”
switch
while
depressing
the brake
pedal and
moving the
steering
wheel left
and right.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details
Correction
procedure
740
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Other messages
If the following message is displayed, take appropriate action and
confirm that the message has disappeared.
(Refer to the “Off-road Driving Owner’s Manual”)
Message Correction procedure
(If equipped)
Select the four-wheel driving position switch in
L4 and shift the shift lever to D or R.
(If equipped)
Confirm the operating conditions.
5
741
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Warning light display in radar cruise mode (if equipped)
In the following cases, the warning light may not be displayed even if vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance decreases:
When your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are traveling at the same
speed or the vehicle ahead is traveling more quickly than your vehicle
When the vehicle ahead is traveling at a very low speed
Immediately after cruise control speed is set
At the instant the accelerator pedal is depressed
After changing the engine oil (Diesel engine)
Make sure to reset the oil maintenance data. (P. 630)
If the message “DPF FULL SEE OWNER’S MANUAL” appears on the
display
The deposit collected in the filter needs to be regenerated.
To regenerate the filter, the following driving methods are recommended
*:
By driving continuously (for example, at around 60 km/h [36 mph] for
approximately 20 minutes).
By avoiding short trips, or by driving continuously (leaving the engine
running for long periods of time).
The warning message will disappear when regeneration is complete. How-
ever, if this driving cannot be carried out, or if the message does not disap-
pear even after driving, have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional imme-
diately.
For details of the DPF system, refer to P. 389.
*: When driving, pay sufficient attention to weather, road conditions, terrain
and traffic conditions, and drive according to traffic laws.
742
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
NOTICE
While the engine oil level warning is displayed
Continued engine operation with low engine oil will damage the engine.
Engine oil maintenance message (diesel engine)
The warning message is based on the projected driving range after engine
oil maintenance message is reset.
The system does not monitor the purity of the engine oil.
5
743
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
If you have a flat tire (vehicles with a standard spare tire)
: If equipped
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.
Before jacking up the vehicle
Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
Set the parking brake.
Shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or R (manual
transmission).
Turn off the rear height control air suspension (if equipped).
(Refer to the “Off-road Driving Owner’s Manual”)
Stop the engine.
Turn on the emergency flashers. (P. 692)
744
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
Vehicles with under floor mounted spare tire
Jack
Tool box
Spare tire
5
745
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Vehicles with back door mounted spare tire
Spare tire
Jack
Tool box
Jack
5-door models
3-door models
746
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Taking out the jack
5-door models
Remove the cover.
Unhook the rubber band and
take out the jack.
For loosening
For tightening
STEP
1
STEP
2
5
747
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
3-door models
Remove the cover.
Unhook the rubber band and
take out the jack.
For loosening
For tightening
STEP
1
STEP
2
748
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Taking out the tool box
Open the cover.
Take out the tool box.
STEP
1
STEP
2
5
749
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Taking out the spare tire
Vehicles with back door mounted spare tire
Remove the bolt cover
Bolt cover
Remove the bolt which fixes the
spare wheel cover.
Disengage the craws and
remove the spare wheel cover.
ITN52M007
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
750
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Unlock the spare tire lock sys-
tem.
Insert the key into the cylinder.
Remove the key and the cylin-
der.
Turn the hold-down nuts counter-
clockwise with the wheel nut
wrench and remove them.
STEP
4
STEP
5
5
751
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Vehicles with under floor mounted spare tire
Assembling the jack handle.
Remove the jack handle extension bar from the tool box and
assemble by following these steps.
Loosen the bolt and the screw
using either the jack handle
end or a screwdriver.
Assemble the jack handle
extension bar and the jack
handle and tighten the bolt
and the screw.
Check that the bolt and screw are
firmly tightened.
Remove the cover.
STEP
1
STEP
2
752
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Insert the jack handle extension
into the lowering screw.
Lower
Raise
Place a rag under the jack handle
extension to protect the back
door.
Lower the spare tire completely
to the ground.
Pull out the spare tire and
remove the holding bracket.
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
5
753
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Replacing a flat tire
Chock the tires.
STEP
1
STEP
1
Flat tire Wheel chock positions
Front
Left-hand side Behind the rear right-hand side tire
Right-hand side Behind the rear left-hand side tire
Rear
Left-hand side In front of the front right-hand side tire
Right-hand side In front of the front left-hand side tire
754
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Pry off the wheel ornament,
using the beveled end of the
wheel ornament remover as
shown.
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts
(one turn).
STEP
2
STEP
3
5
755
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Assembling the jack handle.
Remove the jack handle, jack handle extension bar and jack
handle bar from the tool box and assemble by following these
steps.
Loosen the bolt and the screw
using either the jack handle
end or a screwdriver.
Assemble the jack handle
extension bar and the jack
handle bar and tighten the
bolts.
Check that the bolts are firmly
tightened.
Assemble the jack handle
extension bar and the jack
handle and tighten the screw.
Check that the screw is firmly
tightened.
STEP
4
756
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Position the jack at the jack
points as shown.
Front - Under the chassis frame
side rail
Rear - Under the rear axle hous-
ing
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
Remove all the wheel nuts and
the tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
STEP
5
STEP
6
STEP
7
5
757
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Installing the spare tire
Remove any dirt or foreign mat-
ter from the wheel contact sur-
face.
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is in
motion, and the tire to come off.
Install the spare tire and loosely
tighten each nut by hand to
approximately the same amount.
Turn the nut washers until they
come into contact with the disc
wheel.
Lower the vehicle.
STEP
1
Washer
STEP
2
Disc wheel
STEP
3
758
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Firmly tighten each nut two or
three times in the order shown in
the illustration.
Tightening torque:
112 N•m (11.4 kgf•m, 83 ft•lbf)
Reinstall the wheel ornament.
Stow the flat tire, tools and jack securely, and replace all cov-
ers.
Stowing the flat/spare tire, jack and tools
Vehicles with back door mounted spare tire
Install the tire and loosely tighten
each nut by hand to approxi-
mately the same amount.
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
STEP
1
Spare tire
lock nut
5
759
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Firmly tighten each nut two or
three times in the order shown in
the illustration.
Tightening torque:
60 N•m (6.0 kgf•m, 44 ft•lbf)
Tighten the spare tire lock nut
first.
Lock the spare tire lock system
Spare tire lock nut.
Insert the key and cylinder.
Remove the key while holding
the cylinder in place.
Check that the cylinder is locked
securely.
Install the spare wheel cover in
the reverse order of removal.
Tightening torque:
14 N•m (1.4 kgf•m, 10 ft•lbf)
Stow the tools and jack securely, and replace all covers.
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
760
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Vehicles with under floor mounted spare tire
Lay down the tire with the outer
side facing up, and install the
holding bracket.
Insert the holding bracket tab into
one of the holes in the wheel.
Raise the tire.
Vehicles with kinetic dynamic suspension: Pull the tire
towards the rear of the vehicle when raising. After raising,
visually check that the tire is not interfering with suspension
components.
Stow the tools and jack securely, and replace all covers.
STEP
1
Vehicles with spare tire lock system (vehicles with back door mounted
spare tire)
Use the spare tire lock nut only for the spare tire carrier.
STEP
2
STEP
3
5
761
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Certification for the jack
762
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Using the tire jack
Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the
jack, leading to death or serious injury.
Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or install-
ing and removing tire chains.
Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replac-
ing tires on this vehicle.
Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.
Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by
the jack.
Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.
Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.
When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace
the tire.
Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
Vehicles with rear height control air suspension: Be sure to turn off the
height control and stop the engine.
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working
on or near the vehicle will be injured.
5
763
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Using the jack handle
Tighten all the jack handle bolts securely using a Phillips-head screwdriver,
to prevent the extension parts from coming apart unexpectedly.
Replacing a flat tire
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious
injury:
Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately
after the vehicle has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the
brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or
other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.
Vehicles with under floor mounted spare tire: Lower the spare tire com-
pletely to the ground before removing it from under the vehicle.
Do not try to remove the wheel ornament by hand. Take due care in han-
dling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.
Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 112 N•m (11.4
kgf•m, 83 ft•lbf) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
Failure to follow these precautions could cause the nuts to loosen and the
wheel may fall off, which could lead to an accident causing death or seri-
ous injury.
Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the
wheel while the vehicle is moving.
When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically
designed for that wheel.
764
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Replacing a flat tire
If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or
bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional.
Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and
the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.
When installing the wheel nuts
Be sure to install the wheel nuts with the tapered end facing inward.
(P. 653)
After using the tools and jack
Before driving, make sure all the tools and jack are securely in place in their
storage location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision
or sudden braking.
NOTICE
Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire.
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the
wheel beyond repair.
When stowing the flat tire (vehicles with under floor mounted spare
tire)
Ensure that there is no object caught between the tire and the vehicle under-
body.
When assembling the jack handle extension
Tighten all the joints securely. Otherwise the extension may come off and it
may damage the paint or vehicle body.
5
765
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
If you have a flat tire (vehicles with an emergency tire puncture repair kit)
: If equipped
Your vehicle is equipped with an emergency tire puncture repair kit.
A puncture caused by a nail or screw passing through the tire tread
can be repaired temporarily with the emergency tire puncture repair
kit.
Before repairing the vehicle
Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.
Set the parking brake.
Shift the lever to P (automatic transmission) or N (manual
transmission).
Turn off the rear height control air suspension (if equipped).
(Refer to the “Off-road Driving Owner’s Manual”)
Stop the engine.
Turn on the emergency flashers. (P. 692)
766
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Location of the emergency tire puncture repair kit, jack and
tools
5-door models
*: Use of the jack (P. 756)
Tool box
Emergency tire
puncture repair kit
Jack
*
5
767
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
3-door models
*: Use of the jack (P. 756)
Tool box
Emergency tire
puncture repair kit
Jack
*
768
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Emergency tire puncture repair kit components
Insertion key
Power plug
Hose
Stickers
Air release cap
Compressor
switch
Air pressure gaugeBottle
5
769
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Taking out the emergency tire puncture repair kit
5-door models
Open the console box.
Take out the emergency tire
puncture repair kit.
STEP
1
STEP
2
770
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
3-door models
Remove the cover.
Take out the emergency tire
puncture repair kit.
STEP
1
STEP
2
5
771
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Before performing emergency repair
Check the degree of the tire damage.
A tire should only be repaired
with the emergency tire puncture
repair kit if the damage is caused
by a nail or screw passing
through the tire tread.
• Do not remove the nail or
screw from the tire. Removing
the object may widen the
opening and disenable emer-
gency repair with the kit.
To avoid sealant leakage,
move the vehicle until the area
of the puncture, if known, is
positioned at the top of the
tire.
772
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Emergency repair method
Pull the insertion key out of the
kit.
Place the kit with the bottom fac-
ing upward.
Peel off the label, and push in the
insertion key until a click is heard.
Return the kit to an upright posi-
tion and make sure that the com-
pressor switch is off.
Use the kit with the top facing
upward.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
5
773
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Connect the power plug to the power outlet socket. (P. 586)
Front
Open the cover and connect the
power plug.
Rear
Luggage compartment (DC12 V)
STEP
4
774
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Remove the valve cap from the
valve of the punctured tire.
Remove the air release cap from
the hose.
Connect the hose to the valve.
Screw the end of the hose clock-
wise as far as possible.
STEP
5
STEP
6
STEP
7
5
775
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Check the specified tire inflation pressure.
The label is placed as shown in the illustration.
Left-hand drive vehicles
Right-hand drive vehicles
STEP
8
776
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Start the engine.
To inject the sealant and inflate
the tire, turn the compressor
switch on.
Use the kit with the top facing
upward.
STEP
9
STEP
10
5
777
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Inflate the tire until the recom-
mended pressure is reached.
The sealant will be injected
and the pressure will spike to
300 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm
2
or bar,
44 psi) or 400 kPa (4.0 kgf/
cm
2
or bar, 58 psi), then grad-
ually decrease.
The air pressure gauge will
display the actual tire inflation
pressure about 1 minute after
the switch is turned on.
Turn the compressor switch
off and then check the tire
inflation pressure. Being care-
ful not to over inflate, check
and repeat the inflation proce-
dure until the recommended
tire inflation pressure is
reached.
STEP
11
778
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
If the needle of the air pres-
sure gauge reaches the red
zone (450 kPa [4.5 kgf/cm
2
or
bar, 65 psi] or more), there
may be a malfunction in the
tire or in the kit itself. Stop
operation immediately.
If the tire inflation pressure is
still lower than the recom-
mended level after inflation for
10 minutes with the switch on,
the tire is too damaged to be
repaired. Turn the compressor
switch off and contact any
authorized Toyota dealer, tire
dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped
professional.
If the tire inflation pressure
exceeds the recommended
level, let out some air to adjust
the tire inflation pressure.
(P. 783)
5
779
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Disconnect the hose from the valve on the tire and then pull
out the power plug from the power outlet socket.
To spread the liquid sealant evenly within the tire, immediately
drive for about 5 km (3 miles).
After driving for about 5 km (3
miles), stop your vehicle in a
safe place on a hard, flat surface
and reconnect the compressor.
STEP
12
STEP
13
STEP
14
780
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Turn the compressor switch on
and wait for several seconds,
then turn it off. Check the tire
inflation pressure.
If the tire inflation pressure is
below 130 kPa (1.3 kgf/cm
2
or
bar, 19 psi): The puncture can-
not be repaired. Contact any
authorized Toyota dealer, tire
dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped
professional.
If the tire inflation pressure is
between 130 kPa (1.3 kgf/cm
2
or bar, 19 psi) and a point
below the recommended level:
The tire can be repaired. Pro-
ceed to .
If the tire inflation pressure is
at the recommended level:
Proceed to .
Turn the compressor switch on to inflate the tire until the rec-
ommended tire inflation pressure is reached. Drive for about 5
km (3 miles) and then perform .
STEP
15
STEP
16
STEP
17
STEP
16
STEP
14
5
781
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Store the kit and then attach the
2 stickers as shown.
Taking precautions to avoid sud-
den braking and sharp turns,
drive carefully at under 80 km/h
(50 mph) to the nearest autho-
rized Toyota dealer, tire dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional for tire
repair or replacement.
STEP
17
In the following cases, the tire cannot be repaired with the emergency
tire puncture repair kit. Contact any authorized Toyota dealer, tire
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
When the tire is damaged due to driving without sufficient air pressure
When the tire lost air pressure due to a crack or damage in the tire side-
wall
When the tire is visibly separated from the wheel
When the cut or damage to the tread is 4 mm (0.16 in.) long or more
When the wheel is damaged
When two or more tires have been punctured
When there is more than one hole or cut in the damaged tire
782
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Emergency tire puncture repair kit
The sealant has a limited lifespan. The expiry date is marked on the bot-
tle. The sealant should be replaced before the expiry date. Contact any
authorized Toyota dealer, tire dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional for replacement.
The sealant stored in the emergency tire puncture repair kit can be used
only once to temporarily repair a single tire. If the sealant in the bottle and
other parts of the kit have been used and need to be replaced, contact
any authorized Toyota dealer, tire dealer or repairer, or another duly qual-
ified and equipped professional.
The sealant can be used when the outside temperature is from -30
C
(-22
F) to 60 C (140 F).
The kit is exclusively designed for size and type of tires originally
installed on your vehicle. Do not use it for tires that a different size than
the original ones, or for any other purposes.
If the sealant gets on your clothes, it may stain.
If the sealant adheres to a wheel or the surface of the vehicle body, the
stain may not be removable if it is not cleaned at once. Immediately wipe
away the sealant with a wet cloth.
During operation of the kit, a loud operation noise is produced. This does
not indicate a malfunction.
5
783
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
If the tire is inflated to more than the recommended level
Disconnect the hose from the valve.
Disconnect the hose from the valve, remove the air release cap
from the hose and then reconnect the hose.
Turn the compressor switch on and wait for several seconds, then
turn it off. Check that the air pressure indicator shows the recom-
mended level. (
P. 840)
If the air pressure is lower than the recommended level, turn the
compressor switch on again and repeat the inflation procedure until
the recommended pressure is reached.
CAUTION
Precautions for use of the sealant
Ingesting the sealant is hazardous to your health. If you ingest sealant,
consume as much water as possible, then immediately consult a doctor.
If sealant gets in eyes or adheres to skin, immediately wash it off with
water. If discomfort persists, consult a doctor.
STEP
1
Install the air release cap to the end of the
hose and push the protrusion on the air
release cap into the valve to let some air
out.
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
784
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When fixing the flat tire
Stop your vehicle in a safe and flat area.
Connect the valve and hose securely with the tire installed on the vehicle.
If the hose is not properly connected to the valve, air leakage may occur or
sealant may be sprayed out.
If the hose comes off the valve while inflating the tire, there is a risk that
the hose will move abruptly due to air pressure.
After inflation of the tire has completed, the sealant may splatter when the
hose is disconnected or some air is let out of the tire.
Keep back from the tire while it is being repaired, as there is a chance of it
bursting while the repair operation is being performed. If you notice any
cracks or deformation of the tire, turn off the compressor switch and stop
the repair operation immediately.
The kit may overheat if operated for a long period of time. Do not operate
the compressor continuously for more than 20 minutes.
Parts of the kit become hot during operation. Be careful handling the kit
during and after operation.
Do not attach the vehicle speed warning sticker to an area other than the
one indicated. If the sticker is attached to an area where an SRS airbag is
located, such as the pad of the steering wheel, it may prevent the SRS air
bag from operating properly.
Driving to spread the liquid sealant evenly
Drive the vehicle carefully at a low speed. Be especially careful when turn-
ing and cornering.
If the vehicle does not drive straight or you feel a pull through the steering
wheel, stop the vehicle and check the following:
Tire condition. The tire may have separated from the wheel.
Tire inflation pressure. If tire inflation pressure is 130 kPa (1.3 kgf/cm
2
or bar, 19 psi) or below, this may indicate severe tire damage.
5
785
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
NOTICE
Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the
wheel beyond repair.
When performing an emergency repair
Perform the emergency repair without removing the nail or screw that has
punctured the tread of the tire. If the object that has punctured the tire is
removed, repair by the emergency tire puncture repair kit may not be pos-
sible.
The kit is not waterproof. Make sure that the kit is not exposed to water,
such as when it is being used in the rain.
Do not put the kit directly onto dusty ground such as sand at the side of the
road. If the kit vacuums up dust etc., a malfunction may occur.
Use the kit with the top facing upward. The kit cannot work properly if it is
laid on its side.
Handling the emergency tire puncture repair kit
The compressor power source should be 12 V DC suitable for vehicle use.
Do not connect the compressor to any other source.
If gasoline splatters on the kit, the kit may deteriorate. Take care not to
allow gasoline to contact it.
Store the kit in its assigned place out of reach of children.
Do not disassemble or modify the kit. Do not subject parts such as the air
pressure indicator to impacts. This may cause a malfunction.
786
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
If the engine will not start
If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures
are being followed (P. 239, P. 235), consider each of the following
points:
The engine will not start even when the starter motor oper-
ates normally.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Gasoline engine: Refuel the vehicle.
Diesel engine: (P. 806)
The engine may be flooded. (gasoline engine)
Try to restart the engine again following correct starting proce-
dures. (P. 239)
There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(P. 152)
The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and
headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at
a low volume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
The battery may be discharged. (P. 795)
The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
5
787
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
The starter motor does not turn over (vehicles with a smart
entry & start system).
The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an
electrical problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. How-
ever, an interim measure is available to start the engine.
(P. 788)
The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and
headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
The battery may be discharged. (P. 795)
There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.
Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional, if the problem cannot be
repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.
788
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Emergency start function (vehicles with a smart entry & start
system)
When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as
an interim measure to start the engine if the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is functioning normally.
Set the parking brake.
Put the shift lever in P (automatic transmission) or N (manual
transmission).
Set the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to the ACCESSORY
mode.
Push and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for about
15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal (automatic
transmission) or brake and clutch pedal (manual transmis-
sion) firmly.
Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system
may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duty qualified and equipped pro-
fessional.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
5
789
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
: If equipped
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal,
there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to pre-
vent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional, immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to
ensure that the shift lever can be shifted:
Set the parking brake.
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: Turn the
engine switch to the “ACC” position.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system: Turn the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode.
Depress the brake pedal.
Press the shift lock override
button.
The shift lever can be shifted
while the button is pressed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
790
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
If you lose your keys/wireless remote control transmitter
Keys
New genuine keys can be made by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional. For vehicles with the smart entry & start system, bring the
other key and the key number stamped on the key number plate.
For vehicles without the smart entry & start system, bring a mas-
ter key and the key number stamped on the key number plate.
Wireless remote control transmitter (if equipped)
New genuine wireless remote control transmitter can be pur-
chased and programmed by any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional. If a
wireless remote control transmitter has been lost, bring the other
wireless remote control transmitter when going to pick up the
new transmitter.
5
791
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
If the electronic key does not operate properly
Locking and unlocking the doors and key linked functions
Use the mechanical key (P. 3 6 )
in order to perform the following
operations:
An alarm will sound if the alarm is
set. (P. 160)
Locks all doors
Closes the windows/moon
roof
* (turn and hold)
Unlocks all doors
Opens the windows/moon
roof
* (turn and hold)
*: If equipped
: If equipped
For vehicles with a smart entry & start system: If communication
between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted (P. 51) or the
electronic key cannot be used because the battery is depleted, the
smart entry & start system and wireless remote control cannot be
used. In such cases, the doors can be opened or the engine can be
started by following the procedure below.
792
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Starting the engine
Automatic transmission
Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal.
Touch the Toyota emblem side of
the electronic key to the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch.
If any of the doors is opened or
closed while the key is being
touched to the switch, an alarm
will sound to indicate that the start
function cannot detect the key.
Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch within 10 seconds
of the buzzer sounding, keeping the brake pedal depressed.
In the event that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch still cannot be
operated, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
5
793
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Manual transmission
Shift the shift lever to N and depress the clutch pedal.
Touch the Toyota emblem side of
the electronic key to the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch.
If any of the doors is opened or
closed while the key is being
touched to the switch, an alarm
will sound to indicate that the start
function cannot detect the key.
Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch within 10 seconds
of the buzzer sounding, keeping the clutch pedal depressed.
In the event that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch still cannot be
operated, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
794
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Stopping the engine
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Shift the shift lever to P and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as
you normally do when stopping the engine.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
Shift the shift lever to N and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as
you normally do when stopping the engine.
Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the
electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted.
(P. 658)
Alarm
Using the mechanical key to lock the doors will not set the alarm system.
If a door is unlocked using the mechanical key when the alarm system is set,
the alarm may be triggered. (P. 160)
Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
Within 10 seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal and
press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch.
The engine does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch
is pressed. (P. 243)
Vehicles with a manual transmission
Within 10 seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the clutch pedal and
press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch.
The engine does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch
is pressed. (P. 243)
5
795
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
If the vehicle battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehi-
cle’s battery is discharged.
You can call any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehi-
cle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Toyota following
the steps below.
Open the hood. (P. 622)
Remove the engine cover:
Vehicles with 1GR-FE engine
Lift the edge of the cover to
fixed pins, and then pull the
cover towards you to remove.
STEP
1
796
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Vehicles with 1KD-FTV engine*
1
Remove the bolts.
Raise the front of the engine
cover and then pull the cover
to detach it from the bracket
on the rear bar as shown in
the illustration.
Connect the jumper cables according to the following pro-
cedures:
ITN52M135
ITN52M136
STEP
2
5
797
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
2TR-FE engine
1GR-FE engine
798
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
1KD-FTV engine
Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle
Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in
the illustration.
5
799
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5
minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.
Vehicles with a smart entry & start system only: Open and
close any of the doors of your vehicle with the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch off.
Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start
the engine of your vehicle by turning the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart
entry & start system) or turning the engine switch to the
“ON” position (vehicles without a smart entry & start sys-
tem).
Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper
cables in the exact reverse order in which they were con-
nected.
Vehicles with 1GR-FE engine and 1KD FTV engines
*
1
: To
install the engine cover, conduct the removal procedure in
reverse. After installing, check that the fixed pins are
inserted securely.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional, as soon as possible.
*
1
: 1KD-FTV models (KDJ150R-GKFEYW, KDJ150R-GKAEYW,
KDJ150L-GKFEYW, KDJ150L-GKAEYW, KDJ155R-GJFEYW,
KDJ155R-GJAEYW, KDJ155L-GJFEYW and KDJ155L-GJAEYW
models
*
2
except for Russia, Ukraine, Serbia, Montenegro, Macedonia
and Croatia)
*
2
: The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label. (P. 815)
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
STEP
7
800
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Starting the engine when the battery is discharged (vehicles with an
automatic transmission)
The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
To prevent battery discharge
Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off.
Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is run-
ning at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.
Charging the battery
The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the
vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of cer-
tain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may
discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges
automatically during driving.)
Make sure that the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing
the battery. The key may be locked in the vehicle if the alarm is activated.
(P. 160)
CAUTION
Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flam-
mable gas that may be emitted from the battery:
Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it
is not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.
Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact
with each other.
Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near
the battery.
5
801
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while
related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following pre-
cautions when handling the battery:
When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care
not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing
or the vehicle body.
Do not lean over the battery.
In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes,
immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention
can be received.
Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and
other battery-related parts.
Do not allow children near the battery.
To prevent damaging the vehicle (vehicles with a manual transmission)
Do not pull- or push-start the vehicle, become the catalytic converter may
overheat and become a fire hazard.
802
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
NOTICE
When handling jumper cables
When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entan-
gled in the cooling fans or belt.
To prevent damage to the engine cover
When removing the cover, make sure that you pull the cover towards you
after lifting the front edge to remove the fixed pins.
When installing the cover, do not force the cover or subject it to strong
shocks.
5
803
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
If your vehicle overheats
The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating.
The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a
loss of power is experienced.
Steam is coming from under the hood.
Follow the correction procedure as described below.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air condi-
tioning system, and then stop the engine.
If you see steam:
Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides.
If you do not see steam:
Carefully lift the hood.
After the engine has cooled
down sufficiently, inspect the
hoses and radiator core (radi-
ator) for any leaks.
Radiator
Cooling fan
If a large amount of coolant
leaks, immediately contact any
authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly quali-
fied and equipped profes-
sional.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
804
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
The coolant level is satisfac-
tory if it is between the “FULL”
or “F” and “LOW” or “L” lines
on the reservoir. (P. 632)
Reservoir
“FULL” or “F”
“LOW” or “L”
Radiator cap (if equipped)
Add coolant if necessary.
(P. 626)
Water can be used in an emer-
gency if coolant is unavailable.
Start the engine and turn the air conditioning system on to
check that the radiator cooling fan operates and to check
for coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses.
The fan operates when the air conditioning system is turned on
immediately after a cold start. Confirm that the fan is operating by
checking the fan sound and air flow. If it is difficult to check these,
turn the air conditioning system on and off repeatedly.
(The fan may not operate in freezing temperatures.)
If the fan is not operating:
Stop the engine immediately and contact any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
If the fan is operating:
Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
STEP
7
5
805
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of
your vehicle
If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until
the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, caus-
ing serious injury such as burns.
Keep hands and clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) away from
the fan and others belts. Failure to do so may cause the hands or clothing
to be caught, resulting in serious injury.
Do not loosen the radiator cap, or the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine and radiator are hot.
Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam
released under pressure.
NOTICE
When adding engine coolant
Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.
When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too
quickly can cause damage to the engine.
To prevent damage to the cooling system
Observe the following precautions:
Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust
etc.).
Do not use commercially available coolant additives.
806
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
If you run out of fuel and the engine stalls (diesel engine only)
NOTICE
When restarting the engine
Do not crank the engine before refueling and operating the priming pump.
This may damage the engine and fuel system.
Do not crank the engine for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may
overheat the starter and wiring system.
If you run out of fuel and the engine stalls:
Refuel your vehicle.
To bleed the fuel system,
operate the priming pump until
you feel more resistance.
Start the engine. (P. 239)
If the engine does not start after the above steps have been per-
formed, wait for 10 seconds and try step 2 and 3 again. If the
engine still does not start, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or
repair, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
After starting the engine, depress the accelerator pedal lightly until
the engine runs smoothly.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
5
807
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle
becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow:
Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and put the shift
lever in P (automatic transmission) or N (manual transmis-
sion).
Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire.
Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide
traction under the tires.
Restart the engine.
Shift the shift lever to the D or R position (automatic trans-
mission) or 1 or R position (manual transmission), and
carefully apply the accelerator to free the vehicle.
Turn off TRC and VSC if these functions are hampering
your attempts to free the vehicle. (P. 375)
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
808
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the sur-
rounding area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The
vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free.
Use extreme caution.
When shifting the shift lever
For vehicles with an automatic transmission, be careful not to shift the shift
lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may
cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
Avoid spinning the wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more
than necessary.
If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed,
the vehicle may require towing to be freed.
5
809
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the
vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following pro-
cedure:
Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly
depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the
effort required to slow the vehicle.
Shift the shift lever to N.
If the shift lever is shifted to N
After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the
road.
Stop the engine.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N
Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce
vehicle speed as much as possible.
Vehicles without a smart entry
& start system: Stop the
engine by turning the engine
switch to “ACC”.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
3
STEP
4
810
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
If the engine has to be turned off while driving
Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the
brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn.
Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine.
Vehicles without a smart entry & start system: Never attempt to remove
the key, as doing so will lock the steering wheel.
To stop the engine, press and
hold the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch for 2 consecu-
tive seconds or more, or press
it briefly 3 times or more in
succession.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
Press and hold for 2 seconds or more,
or press briefly 3 times or more
STEP
5
6
Vehicle specifications
811
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.).......... 812
Fuel information ................ 844
6-2. Customization
Customizable features ...... 849
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize ............... 862
812
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weights
Overall length
5-door models
4760 mm (187.4 in.)
*
1,2
4820 mm (189.8 in.)*
1,3
4930 mm (194.1 in.)*
2,4
3-door models
4315 mm (169.9 in.)
*
1
4485 mm (176.6 in.)*
4
Overall width 1885 mm (74.2 in.)
Overall height*
5
5-door models
1835 mm (72.2 in.)
*
6,8
1845 mm (72.6 in.)*
7,8
1880 mm (74.0 in.)*
6,9
1890 mm (74.4 in.)*
7,9
3-door models
1835 mm (72.2 in.)
*
8
1880 mm (74.0 in.)*
9
Wheelbase
5-door models 2790 mm (109.8 in.)
3-door models 2455 mm (96.7 in.)
Tread
Front
1585 mm (62.4 in.)
*
10
1605 mm (63.2 in.)*
11
Rear
1585 mm (62.4 in.)
*
10
1605 mm (63.2 in.)*
11
813
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Gross vehicle
mass
5-door
mod-
els
1GR-
FE
engine
7-seat models
2900 kg (6393 lb.)
5-seat models
2900 kg (6393 lb.)
2-seat models
2830 kg (6239 lb.)
2TR-
FE
engine
2850 kg (6283 lb.)
1KD-
FTV
engine
Vehicle category M1
*
13
2990 kg (6592 lb.)
Vehicle category N1
*
13
5-seat models
2980 kg (6571 lb.)
2-seat models
2890 kg (6371 lb.)
3-door models 2600 kg (5732 lb.)
Maximum
permissible axle
capacity
Front 1450 kg (3197 lb.)
Rear 1800 kg (3968 lb.)
Drawbar load
120 kg (265 lb.)
*
14
60 kg (132 lb.)*
15
Towing capacity
With brake
3000 kg (6614 lb.)
*
14
1500 kg (3307 lb.)*
15
Without brake 750 kg (1653 lb.)
814
6-1. Specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
*
1
: Vehicles without back door mounted spare tire
*
2
: Vehicles without bumper guard
*
3
: Vehicles with bumper guard
*
4
: Vehicles with back door mounted spare tire
*
5
: Unladen vehicles
*
6
: Vehicles with rear height control air suspension
*
7
: Vehicles without rear height control air suspension
*
8
: Vehicles without roof rail
*
9
: Vehicles with roof rail
*
10
:P265/65R17, 265/65R17, P265/60R18 or 265/60R18 tires
*
11
: P245/70R17 or 245/70R17 tires
*
12
:The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label. (P. 815)
*
13
:To distinguish the vehicle category, ask any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
*
14
:GRJ150L-GKAEKW, KDJ150R-GKFEYW, KDJ150R-GKAEYW,
KDJ150L-GKFEYW, KDJ150L-GKAEYW, KDJ155R-GJFEYW,
KDJ155R-GJAEYW, KDJ155L-GJFEYW and
KDJ155L-GJAEYW models
*
12
*
15
:TRJ150L-GKMEK, TRJ150L-GKPEK, GRJ150L-GKAEK,
KDJ150L-GKFEY and KDJ150L-GKAEY models
*
12
815
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Vehicle identification
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your
vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Toyota. It is
used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the
front right frame.
On some models, this number is
also stamped on the top left of
the instrument panel.
This number is also on the man-
ufacturer’s label on the left-hand
side center pillar.
816
6-1. Specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.
1GR-FE engine
2TR-FE engine
1KD-FTV engine
817
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Engine
Gasoline engine
Diesel engine
Model 1GR-FE 2TR-FE
Type
6-cylinder V type,
4-cycle, gasoline
4-cylinder in line,
4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke
94.0 95.0 mm
(3.70 3.74 in.)
95.0 95.0 mm
(3.74 3.74 in.)
Displacement 3956 cm
3
(241.4 cu.in.) 2694 cm
3
(164.4 cu.in.)
Valve clearance
(engine cold)
Automatic adjustment
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
Model 1KD-FTV
Type
4-cylinder in line, 4-cycle,
diesel (with turbocharger)
Bore and stroke 96.0 103.0 mm (3.78 4.06 in.)
Displacement 2982 cm
3
(182.0 cu.in.)
Valve clearance
(engine cold)
Intake: 0.20 0.30 mm (0.008 0.012 in.)
Exhaust: 0.35 0.45 mm (0.014 0.018 in.)
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
818
6-1. Specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Fuel
Gasoline engine
Diesel engine
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only
Research octane
number
1GR-FE engine
95 or higher
2TR-FE engine
91 or higher
Fuel tank
capacity
(Reference)
Vehicles with
sub fuel tank
system
150 L (39.6 gal., 33.0 Imp.gal.)
Vehicles without
sub fuel tank
system
87 L (23.0 gal., 19.1 Imp.gal.)
Fuel type Diesel fuel only
Cetane number 48 or higher
Fuel tank
capacity
(Reference)
Vehicles with
sub fuel tank
system
150 L (39.6 gal., 33.0 Imp.gal.)
Vehicles without
sub fuel tank
system
87 L (23.0 gal., 19.1 Imp.gal.)
819
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Lubrication system
1GR-FE engine
Engine oil selection (GRJ150L-GKAEKW models
*)
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Toyota rec-
ommends the use of approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil”. Another
motor oil of matching quality can also be used.
Oil grade:
0W-20, 5W-20, 5W-30 and 10W-30:
API grade SL “Energy-Conserving”, SM “Energy-Conserving”, SN
“Resource-Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil
15W-40 and 20W-50:
API grade SL, SM or SN multigrade engine oil
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill 
reference)
With filter
Without filter
6.1 L (6.4 qt., 5.4 Imp.qt.)
5.7 L (6.0 qt., 5.0 Imp.qt.)
820
6-1. Specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Recommended viscosity (SAE):
SAE 0W-20 is filled into your
Toyota vehicle at manufacturing,
and the best choice for good fuel
economy and good starting in
cold weather.
If SAE 0W-20 oil is not available,
SAE 5W-30 oil may be used.
However, it should be replaced
with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil
change.
If you use SAE 10W-30 or a
higher viscosity engine oil in
extremely low temperatures, the
engine may become difficult to
start, so SAE 5W-30 or lower vis-
cosity engine oil is recom-
mended.
The 0W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the
oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow
for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating
temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehi-
cle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
Temperature range anticipated before
next oil change.
Preferred
821
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
How to read oil container labels:
Either or both API registered marks are added to some oil containers
to help you select the oil you should use.
API Service Symbol
Top portion: The oil quality desig-
nation by API (American Petro-
leum Institute) (SN)
Center portion: The SAE viscosity
grade (SAE 0W-20)
Lower portion: “Resource-Con-
serving” means that the oil has
fuel saving and environmental
protection capabilities.
ILSAC Certification Mark
The ILSAC (International Lubri-
cant Standardization and
Approval Committee) Certification
Mark is displayed on the front of
the container.
822
6-1. Specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Engine oil selection (GRJ150L-GKAEK models
*)
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use
Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy
the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade:
5W-30 and 10W-30:
API grade SL “Energy-Conserving”, SM “Energy-Conserving”, SN
“Resource-Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil
15W-40 and 20W-50:
API grade SL, SM or SN multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity (SAE):
If you use SAE 10W-30 or a
higher viscosity engine oil in
extremely low temperatures, the
engine may become difficult to
start, so SAE 5W-30 engine oil is
recommended.
The 10W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of
the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W
allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
The 30 in 10W-30 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating
temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehi-
cle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
Temperature range anticipated before
next oil change.
823
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
How to read oil container labels:
Either or both API registered marks are added to some oil containers
to help you select the oil you should use.
API Service Symbol
Top portion: The oil quality desig-
nation by API (American Petro-
leum Institute) (SN)
Center portion: The SAE viscosity
grade (SAE 10W-30)
Lower portion: “Resource-Con-
serving” means that the oil has
fuel saving and environmental
protection capabilities.
ILSAC Certification Mark
The ILSAC (International Lubri-
cant Standardization and
Approval Committee) Certification
Mark is displayed on the front of
the container.
824
6-1. Specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
2TR-FE engine
Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use
Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy
the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade:
0W-20, 5W-20, 5W-30 and 10W-30:
API grade SL “Energy-Conserving”, SM “Energy-Conserving”, SN
“Resource-Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil
15W-40 and 20W-50:
API grade SL, SM or SN multigrade engine oil
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill
reference)
With filter
Without filter
5.7 L (6.0 qt., 5.0 Imp.qt.)
5.0 L (5.3 qt., 4.4 Imp.qt.)
825
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Recommended viscosity (SAE):
If you use SAE 10W-30 or a
higher viscosity engine oil in
extremely low temperatures, the
engine may become difficult to
start, so SAE 5W-30 or lower vis-
cosity engine oil is recom-
mended.
The 0W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the
oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow
for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating
temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehi-
cle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
Temperature range anticipated before
next oil change.
826
6-1. Specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
How to read oil container labels:
Either or both API registered marks are added to some oil containers
to help you select the oil you should use.
API Service Symbol
Top portion: The oil quality desig-
nation by API (American Petro-
leum Institute) (SN)
Center portion: The SAE viscosity
grade (SAE 0W-20)
Lower portion: “Resource-Con-
serving” means that the oil has
fuel saving and environmental
protection capabilities.
ILSAC Certification Mark
The ILSAC (International Lubri-
cant Standardization and
Approval Committee) Certification
Mark is displayed on the front of
the container.
827
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
1KD-FTV engine
Engine oil selection (KDJ150R-GKFEYW, KDJ150R-GKAEYW,
KDJ150L-GKFEYW, KDJ150L-GKAEYW, KDJ155R-GJFEYW,
KDJ155R-GJAEYW, KDJ155L-GJFEYW and KDJ155L-
GJAEYW models
* except for Russia, Ukraine, Serbia, Monte-
negro, Macedonia and Croatia)
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Toyota rec-
ommends the use of approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil”. Another
motor oil of matching quality can also be used.
Oil grade: ACEA C2
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill 
reference)
With filter
Without filter
7.0 L (7.4 qt., 6.2 Imp.qt.)
6.7 L (7.1 qt., 5.9 Imp.qt.)
NOTICE
Using engine oil other than ACEA C2 may damage the catalytic converter.
828
6-1. Specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Recommended viscosity (SAE):
SAE 0W-30 is filled into your
Toyota vehicle at manufacturing,
and the best choice for good fuel
economy and good starting in
cold weather.
The 0W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the
oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow
for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
The 30 in 0W-30 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating
temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehi-
cle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
Temperature range anticipated before
next oil change.
Preferred
829
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Engine oil selection (Vehicles for Russia, Ukraine, Serbia,
Montenegro, Macedonia and Croatia or KDJ150L-GKFEY and
KDJ150L-GKAEY models
*)
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use
Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy
the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: G-DLD-1, API CF-4, CF or ACEA B1
Recommended viscosity (SAE):
SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.
If you use SAE 10W-30 or a
higher viscosity engine oil in
extremely low temperatures, the
engine may become difficult to
start, so SAE 5W-30 engine oil is
recommended.
The 5W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the
oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow
for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating
temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehi-
cle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
Temperature range anticipated before
next oil change.
Preferred
830
6-1. Specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
DLD logo mark:
The Global DLD-1 logo mark,
attached on some oil containers
to help in selecting the oil you
should use, indicates that the oil
meets the guidelines recom-
mended by the following associ-
ations:
ACEA (Association des Con-
structeurs Europeens d’Auto-
mobiles)
AAM (Alliance of Automobile
Manufacturers)
EMA (Engine Manufacturers
Association)
JAMA (Japan Automobile
Manufacturers Association)
*: The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label. (P. 815)
831
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Cooling system
Capacity
(Refer-
ence)
1GR-FE
engine
With ATF
warmer
With rear heater
12.8 L (13.5 qt., 11.3 Imp.qt.)
Without rear heater
11.0 L (11.6 qt., 9.7 Imp.qt.)
Without ATF
warmer
With rear heater
12.3 L (13.0 qt., 10.8 Imp.qt.)
Without rear heater
10.5 L (11.1 qt., 9.2 Imp.qt.)
2TR-FE
engine
With automatic
transmission
With rear heater
9.9 L (10.5 qt., 8.7 Imp.qt.)
Without rear heater
8.1 L (8.6 qt., 7.1 Imp.qt.)
With manual
transmission
With rear heater
10.1 L (10.7 qt., 8.9 Imp.qt.)
Without rear heater
8.3 L (8.8 qt., 7.3 Imp.qt.)
1KD-FTV
engine
With automatic
transmission
With rear heater
14.9 L (15.7 qt., 13.1 Imp.qt.)
Without rear heater
13.1 L (13.8 qt., 11.5 Imp.qt.)
With manual
transmission
With rear heater
15.0 L (15.9 qt., 13.2 Imp.qt.)
Without rear heater
13.2 L (13.9 qt., 11.6 Imp.qt.)
832
6-1. Specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Coolant type
Use either of the following.
“Toyota Super Long Life Cool-
ant”
A similar high-quality ethylene
glycol-based non-silicate, non-
amine, non-nitrite, and non-
borate coolant with long-life
hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
833
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Ignition system (gasoline engine only)
Electrical system
Spark plug
Make DENSO SK20HR11
Gap 1.1 mm (0.043 in.)
NOTICE
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.
Battery
Specific gravity reading at
20 C (68 F):
1.250 1.290 Fully charged
1.160 1.200 Half charged
1.060 1.100 Discharged
Charging rates
Quick charge
Slow charge
15 A max.
5 A max.
834
6-1. Specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Front differential
*: Your Toyota vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the
factory.
Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent
of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional for further details.
Rear differential
*: Your Toyota vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the
factory.
Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent
of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional for further details.
Oil capacity 1.40 L (1.48 qt., 1.23 Imp.qt.)
Oil type and
viscosity
*
Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil LT
75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent
Oil
capacity
5-door
models
With rear
differential lock
system
2.65 L (2.80 qt., 2.33 Imp.qt.)
Without rear
differential lock
system
2.70 L (2.85 qt., 2.38 Imp.qt.)
3-door models 2.20 L (2.32 qt., 1.94 Imp.qt.)
Oil type and viscosity*
Toyota Genuine Differential
Gear Oil LT 75W-85 GL-5 or
equivalent
835
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Automatic transmission
*: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity.
If replacement is necessary, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
Fluid
capacity
*
1GR-FE engine 10.9 L (11.5 qt., 9.6 Imp.qt.)
2TR-FE engine 9.9 L (10.5 qt., 8.7 Imp.qt.)
1KD-FTV engine 10.6 L (11.2 qt., 9.3 Imp.qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS
NOTICE
Transmission fluid type
Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause
deterioration in shift quality, locking up of the transmission accompanied by
vibration and, ultimately, damage to the vehicle’s transmission.
836
6-1. Specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Manual transmission
5-speed models
6-speed models
Gear oil capacity 2.2 L (2.3 qt., 1.9 Imp.qt.)
Gear oil type Gear oil API GL-4 or GL-5
Recommended gear oil
viscosity
SAE 75W-90
Gear oil capacity 2.1 L (2.2 qt., 1.8 Imp.qt.)
Gear oil type
Toyota Genuine Transfer Gear oil LF or
equivalent
Recommended gear oil
viscosity
SAE 75W
NOTICE
Manual transmission gear oil (6-speed models)
Using a manual transmission gear oil other than “TOYOTA Genuine Transfer
Gear oil LF SAE 75W” may cause occurrences of gear noise or other types
of deterioration.
837
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Clutch
Transfer
*: Your Toyota vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Transfer Gear oil LF” at the
factory. Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Transfer Gear oil LF” or an
equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please con-
tact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional for further details.
Clutch pedal free play 5 15 mm (0.2 0.6 in.)
Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
Oil capacity 1.4 L (1.5 qt., 1.2 Imp.qt.)
Oil type*
Toyota Genuine Transfer Gear oil LF or
equivalent
Recommended oil viscosity SAE 75W
838
6-1. Specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Brakes
*
1
: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 490 N (50 kgf,
110 lbf) while the engine is running
*
2
: Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 200 N (20.4 kgf,
45.0 lbf)
Pedal
clear-
ance
*
1
1GR-FE
and
1KD-
FTV
engines
Left-
hand
drive
With automatic transmission
101 mm (4.0 in.) Min.
With manual transmission
94 mm (3.7 in.) Min.
Right-
hand
drive
101 mm (4.0 in.) Min.
2TR-FE engine
With automatic transmission
105 mm (4.1 in.) Min.
With manual transmission
102 mm (4.0 in.) Min.
Pedal free play 1 6 mm (0.04 0.24 in.)
Parking brake lever travel*
2
5 7 clicks
Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
839
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Chassis lubrication
Steering
Propeller
shafts
Spider Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2
Slide yoke
Molybdenum-disulfide lithium base chas-
sis grease, NLGI No.2 or lithium base
chassis grease, NLGI No.2
Free play Less than 30 mm (1.18 in.)
Power steering fluid type
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON
®
II
or III
840
6-1. Specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Tires and wheels
17-inch tires (type A)
17-inch tires (type B)
*: Standard inflation for all loads including full rated loads
Tire size P245/70R17 108S, 245/70R17 110S
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front wheel kPa
(kgf/cm
2
or bar, psi)
Rear wheel kPa
(kgf/cm
2
or bar, psi)
220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32)
Wheel size 17 6 1/2J
Wheel nut torque 112 N•m (11.4 kgf•m, 83 ft•lbf)
Tire size 245/70R17 110S
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front wheel kPa
(kgf/cm
2
or bar, psi)
Rear wheel kPa
(kgf/cm
2
or bar, psi)
200 (2.0, 29)
200 (2.0, 29)
220 (2.2, 32)
*
Wheel size 17 6 1/2J
Wheel nut torque 112 N•m (11.4 kgf•m, 83 ft•lbf)
841
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
17-inch tires (type C)
17-inch tires (type D)
Tire size P265/65R17 110S, 265/65R17 112S
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front wheel kPa
(kgf/cm
2
or bar, psi)
Rear wheel kPa
(kgf/cm
2
or bar, psi)
220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32)
Wheel size 17 7 1/2J
Wheel nut torque 112 N•m (11.4 kgf•m, 83 ft•lbf)
Tire size 265/65R17 112S
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front wheel kPa
(kgf/cm
2
or bar, psi)
Rear wheel kPa
(kgf/cm
2
or bar, psi)
200 (2.0, 29) 200 (2.0, 29)
Wheel size 17 7 1/2J
Wheel nut torque 112 N•m (11.4 kgf•m, 83 ft•lbf)
842
6-1. Specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
18-inch tires (type A)
18-inch tires (type B)
*: Standard inflation for all loads including full rated loads
Tire size P265/60R18 109H, 265/60R18 110H
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front wheel kPa
(kgf/cm
2
or bar, psi)
Rear wheel kPa
(kgf/cm
2
or bar, psi)
220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32)
Wheel size 18 7 1/2J
Wheel nut torque 112 N•m (11.4 kgf•m, 83 ft•lbf)
Tire size 265/60R18 110H
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front wheel kPa
(kgf/cm
2
or bar, psi)
Rear wheel kPa
(kgf/cm
2
or bar, psi)
200 (2.0, 29)
200 (2.0, 29)
220 (2.2, 32)
*
Wheel size 18 7 1/2J
Wheel nut torque 112 N•m (11.4 kgf•m, 83 ft•lbf)
843
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Light bulbs
A: D4S discharge bulbs B: H11 halogen bulbs
C: HB3 halogen bulbs D: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
E: Wedge base bulbs (clear) F: Double end bulbs
*: If equipped
Light bulbs W Type
Exterior
Headlights
Low beam (discharge bulbs
*)
Low beam (halogen bulbs
*)
High beam
35
55
60
A
B
C
Front turn signal lights 21 D
Front position lights 5 E
Front fog lights
* 55 B
Rear turn signal lights 21 D
Back-up lights 16 E
Rear fog lights
* 21 E
License plate lights 5 E
Running board lights
* 5E
Interior
Personal/interior lights
Front
Rear (without personal lights)
*
Rear (with personal lights)*
5
8
5
E
F
E
Vanity lights 8 E
Door courtesy lights 5 E
844
6-1. Specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Fuel information
1GR-FE engine
EU area:
Your vehicle must use only
unleaded gasoline conforming to
European standard EN228.
For optimum engine perfor-
mance, select unleaded gaso-
line with a Research Octane
Number of 95 or higher.
If this premium type cannot be
obtained, you can temporarily
use unleaded gasoline with a
Research Octane Number as low
as 91.
Except EU area:
Your vehicle must use only
unleaded gasoline.
For optimum engine perfor-
mance, select unleaded gaso-
line with a Research Octane
Number of 95 or higher.
If this premium type cannot be
obtained, you can temporarily
use unleaded gasoline with a
Research Octane Number as low
as 91.
845
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
2TR-FE engine
EU area:
Your vehicle must use only
unleaded gasoline conforming to
European standard EN228.
For optimum engine perfor-
mance, select unleaded gaso-
line with a Research Octane
Number of 91 or higher.
Except EU area:
Your vehicle must use only
unleaded gasoline.
For optimum engine perfor-
mance, select unleaded gaso-
line with a Research Octane
Number of 91 or higher.
846
6-1. Specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
*
1
: Vehicles for Russia, Ukraine, Serbia, Montenegro, Macedonia and Cro-
atia or KDJ150L-GKFEY and KDJ150L-GKAEY models
*
3
*
2
: KDJ150R-GKFEYW, KDJ150R-GKAEYW, KDJ150L-GKFEYW,
KDJ150L-GKAEYW, KDJ155R-GJFEYW, KDJ155R-GJAEYW,
KDJ155L-GJFEYW and KDJ155L-GJAEYW models
*
3
except for
Russia, Ukraine, Serbia, Montenegro, Macedonia and Croatia
*
3
: The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label. (P. 815)
1KD-FTV engine
Your vehicle must use only diesel
fuel conforming to European
standard EN590.
Without DPF catalytic converter
*
1
Your vehicle must use only diesel
fuel that contains 350 ppm or
less of sulfur and has a cetane
number of 48 or higher.
With DPF catalytic converter
*
2
Your vehicle must use only diesel
fuel that contains 50 ppm or less
of sulfur and has a cetane num-
ber of 48 or higher.
847
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that
only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
If you plan to drive in foreign countries
Low sulphur diesel fuel may not be available, so please check the availability
with your distributor.
If your engine knocks
Consult any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly quali-
fied and equipped professional.
You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while acceler-
ating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
NOTICE
Notice on fuel quality
Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be
damaged.
Gasoline engine: Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline will cause the three-way catalytic converter to lose its
effectiveness and the emission control system to function improperly.
Gasoline engine (EU area): Bioethanol fuel sold under names such as
“E50” or “E85” and fuel containing a large amount of ethanol should not be
used. The use of these fuels will damage the vehicle’s fuel system. In case
of any doubt, ask any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional.
848
6-1. Specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
NOTICE
Gasoline engine (except EU area): Bioethanol fuel sold under names such
as “E50” or “E85” and fuel containing a large amount of ethanol should not
be used. Your vehicle can use gasoline mixed with 10 % max ethanol. The
use of fuel with more than 10 % ethanol content (E10) will damage the
vehicle’s fuel system. You must ensure that refueling is carried out only
from a source where fuel specification and quality can be guaranteed. In
case of any doubt, ask any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional.
1KD-FTV engine: FAME (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) fuel sold under names
such as “B30” or “B100” and fuel containing a large amount of FAME
should not be used. Your vehicle can use diesel mixed with 5 % max bio-
diesel FAME (B5). The use of fuel with more than 5 % FAME content (B5)
will damage the vehicle’s fuel system. You must ensure that refueling is
carried out only from a source where fuel specification and quality can be
guaranteed. In case of any doubt, ask any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
1KD-FTV engine (without DPF catalytic converter
*
1
):
Do not use a fuel that contains more than 350 ppm of sulfur.
Use of such a high sulfur fuel may damage the engine.
1KD-FTV engine (with DPF catalytic converter
*
2
):
Do not use a fuel that contains more than 50 ppm of sulfur.
Use of such a high sulfur fuel may damage the engine.
*
1
: Vehicles for Russia, Ukraine, Serbia, Montenegro, Macedonia and Croa-
tia or KDJ150L-GKFEY and KDJ150L-GKAEY models
*
3
*
2
: KDJ150R-GKFEYW, KDJ150R-GKAEYW, KDJ150L-GKFEYW,
KDJ150L-GKAEYW, KDJ155R-GJFEYW, KDJ155R-GJAEYW,
KDJ155L-GJFEYW and KDJ155L-GJAEYW models
*
3
except for Russia,
Ukraine, Serbia, Montenegro, Macedonia and Croatia
*
3
: The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label. (P. 815)
849
6
Vehicle specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
6-2. Customization
Customizable features
Customizing vehicle features
It is possible to customize certain vehicle features using the menu
switch and the “ENTER” switch.
When customizing vehicle features, ensure that the vehicle is parked
in a safe place with the shift lever in P (automatic transmission) or N
(manual transmission) and the parking brake set.
Press and hold the menu switch
to display customization mode.
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be per-
sonalized to suit your preferences. Programing of these preferences
can be performed by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional.
It is also possible to customize certain vehicle features yourself
using the menu switch and the “ENTER” switch.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other
functions being customized. Contact any authorized Toyota dealer
or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional for
further details.
STEP
1
850
6-2. Customization
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Press the “ENTER” switch
upwards or downwards to
select the item to be custom-
ized.
Press the “ENTER” switch to
confirm.
Press the “ENTER” switch
upwards or downwards to
select the desired setting for
the item being customized.
Press the “ENTER” switch to
confirm.
When customization is completed, press the menu switch to clear the
customization screen.
Customizable features
Settings that can be changed using the menu switch and the
“ENTER” switch
Settings that can be changed by any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional
Definition of symbols: O = Available, – =Not available
STEP
2
STEP
3
851
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Item Function
Default
setting
Customized
setting
Door lock
(P. 74, 791)
Unlocking
using a key
All doors
unlocked in
one step
Driver’s door
unlocked in
one step, all
doors
unlocked in
two steps
–O
Speed-detect-
ing automatic
door lock func-
tion
*
1, 2
On Off O O
Shifting gears
to position
other than P
locks all
doors
*
1
Off On O O
Shifting gears
to P unlocks all
doors
*
1
Off On O O
Opening
driver’s door
unlocks all
doors
*
1, 2
Off On O O
852
6-2. Customization
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Smart entry &
start system
and wireless
remote control
(
P. 39, 66)
Operation sig-
nal (buzzer)
*
3
7
Off
OO
1 to 6
Operation sig-
nal
(Emergency
flashers)
On Off O O
Time elapsed
before the
automatic door
lock function is
activated if a
door is not
opened after
being
unlocked
30 seconds
60 seconds
–O
120 seconds
Open door
warning func-
tion (When
locking the
vehicle)
*
3
On Off O
Glass hatch
opening oper-
ation
*
3
Push and hold
(Short)
Push twice
–O
One short
push
Push and hold
(Long)
Off
Item Function
Default
setting
Customized
setting
853
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Smart entry &
start system
(
P. 39)
Smart door
unlocking
*
4
All the doors Driver’s door O O
Smart entry &
start system
*
4
On Off O O
Wireless
remote control
(
P. 66)
Unlocking
operation
All doors
unlocked in
one step
Driver’s door
unlocked in
one step, all
doors
unlocked in
two steps
OO
Automatic light
control system
(
P. 300)
Time elapsed
before the
headlights turn
off
*
3
30 seconds
Off
OO
60 seconds
90 seconds
Light sensor
sensitivity
*
3
Standard -2 to 2 O O
Time elapsed
before head-
lights automat-
ically turn on
*
3
Standard Long O*
7
Item Function
Default
setting
Customized
setting
854
6-2. Customization
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Illumination
(
P. 557)
Time elapsed
before the
interior lights
turn off
15 seconds
Off
OO
7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Time elapsed
before the
exterior lights
turn off
15 seconds
Off
OO
7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Sensitivity of
the ambient
light sensor
used for dim-
ming the meter
lights etc.
*
3
Standard -2 to 2 O
Sensitivity of
the ambient
light sensor
used for
brightening the
meter lights
etc.
*
3
Standard -2 to 2 O
Item Function
Default
setting
Customized
setting
855
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Illumination
(
P. 557)
Operation after
the engine
switch is
turned to the
“LOCK” posi-
tion (without a
smart entry &
start system)
or the
“ENGINE
START STOP”
switch is
turned to OFF
(with a smart
entry & start
system)
On Off O
Operation
when the
doors are
unlocked with
the smart entry
& start system
or wireless
remote control
On Off O
Item Function
Default
setting
Customized
setting
856
6-2. Customization
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Illumination
(
P. 557)
Operation
when you
approach the
vehicle with
the electronic
key on your
person
*
4
On Off O
Footwell light-
ing
On Off O
Item Function
Default
setting
Customized
setting
857
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Running board
lights
(P. 557)
Running board
lights
*
3
On Off O
Operation
when you
approach the
vehicle with
the electronic
key on your
person
*
3
On Off O
Operation
when the
doors are
unlocked with
the smart entry
& start system
or wireless
remote con-
trol
*
3
On Off O
Operation
when the
doors are
unlocked with
the power door
lock switch
*
3
On Off O
Operation
when the door
is opened
*
3
On Off O
Item Function
Default
setting
Customized
setting
858
6-2. Customization
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Front auto-
matic air con-
ditioning
system
Switching
between out-
side air and
recirculated air
mode linked to
automatic
mode button
operation
*
3
Auto Manual O
A/C automatic
mode button
operation
*
3
Auto Manual O
Seat belt
reminder
buzzer
(
P. 709)
Speed-linked
seat belt
reminder func-
tion
*
3
On Off O
Eco Driving
Indicator Light
(
P. 276, 282,
292)
Activating Eco
Driving Indica-
tor Light
*
5
On Off O
Item Function
Default
setting
Customized
setting
859
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
*
1
: GRJ150L-GKAEKW, KDJ150R-GKAEYW, KDJ150L-GKAEYW,
KDJ155R-GJAEYW and KDJ155L-GJAEYW models
*
8
*
2
: KDJ150R-GKFEYW, KDJ150L-GKFEYW, KDJ155R-GJFEYW and
KDJ155L-GJFEYW models
*
8
*
3
: If equipped.
*
4
: Vehicles with a smart entry & start system only.
*
5
: For vehicles with non-optitron type multi-information display, the setting can
be changed by operating the multi-information display. (P. 276)
*
6
: This function cannot be customized unless power window operation using
the wireless remote control is enabled.
*
7
: TRJ150L-GKMEK, TRJ150L-GKPEK, GRJ150L-GKAEK, KDJ150L-GKFEY
and KDJ150L-GKAEY models (The model code is indicated on the manufac-
turer’s label)
*
8
: The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label. (P. 815)
Power
windows
(P. 137)
Door key
linked opera-
tion
Off On O
Wireless
remote control
linked opera-
tion
Off On O
Moon roof
(
P. 141)
Door key
linked
operation
*
3
Off On O
Wireless
remote control
linked opera-
tion
*
3, 6
Off On O
Toyota
parking
assist-sensor
(
P. 345)
Buzzer
volume
*
3
3 1 to 5 O
Item Function
Default
setting
Customized
setting
860
6-2. Customization
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Multi-information display (P. 276, 282, 292)
Settings that can be changed using the menu switch and the
“ENTER” switch.
Available units
Type A
km & l (km/l), km & l (l/100 km), miles &
Imp.gal. and miles & U.S. gal.
Type B
km & l (l/100 km) and miles & Imp.gal.
Available languages (accessory meters and optitron type meters)
Type A
English (UK), French, German, Spanish,
Italian, Taiwanese and Russian
Type B
English (UK), English (U.S.A.), French,
Spanish and Chinese
In the following situations, customize mode will automatically be
turned off.
A warning message appears after the customize mode screen is dis-
played.
The engine switch is turned to the “LOCK” position (without a smart entry
& start system) or the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to OFF
(with a smart entry & start system).
The vehicle begins to move while the customize mode screen is dis-
played.
861
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
CAUTION
Cautions during customization
As the engine needs to be running during customization, ensure that the
vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such
as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may
collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health haz-
ard.
NOTICE
During customization
To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while cus-
tomizing features.
862
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize
*: If equipped
Item When to initialize Reference
Engine oil mainte-
nance data
*
After changing engine oil P. 630
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation
in cases such as after the battery is reconnected, or maintenance is
performed on the vehicle.
Index
863
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Abbreviation list ...................... 864
Alphabetical index................... 865
What to do if... ......................... 875
For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the
“Navigation System Owners Manual” for information
regarding the equipment listed below.
Navigation system
Air conditioning
Hands-free system (for cellular phone)
Toyota parking assist monitor
Rear view monitor system
Rear seat entertainment system
Audio/video system
Toyota parking assist-sensor
Wide view front & side monitor
For details of information about off-road driving tech-
niques and off-road assistance functions, refer to the
“Off-road Driving Owner’s Manual”.
864
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Abbreviation list
Abbreviation/Acronym list
ABBREVIATIONS MEANING
ABS Anti-lock Brake System
ACC Accessory
AFS Adaptive Front-lighting System
AI-SHIFT Artificial Intelligence Shift control
ALR Automatic Locking Retractor
AVS Adaptive Variable Suspension System
CRS Child Restraint System
DAC Downhill Assist Control
DISP Display
DPF Diesel Particulate Filter
ELR Emergency Locking Retractor
GVM Gross Vehicle Mass
KDSS Kinetic Dynamic Suspension System
LED Light Emitting Diode
PCS Pre-Crash Safety
SRS Supplemental Restraint System
TRC Traction Control
VIN Vehicle Identification Number
VSC Vehicle Stability Control
865
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Alphabetical index
Alphabetical index
A/C.....................................418, 425
ABS ........................................... 373
Active head restraint ........... 94, 96
Active traction control
*
1
......... 373
Adaptive Front-lighting
System.................................... 307
Adaptive Variable
Suspension System
*
1
AFS............................................307
Air conditioning filter ..............654
Airbags
Airbag manual on-off
system ................................213
Airbag operating
conditions ........................... 174
Airbag precautions for
your child ............................ 179
Airbag warning light .............. 705
General airbag precautions...179
Locations of airbags..............170
Modification and disposal of
airbags................................184
Proper driving posture...168, 179
Side and curtain
shield airbags operating
conditions ........................... 174
Side and curtain shield
airbags precautions ............179
SRS airbags..........................170
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter.............. 654
Front automatic
air conditioning system ....... 425
Front manual
air conditioning system ....... 418
Rear automatic
air conditioning system ....... 438
Rear manual
air conditioning system ....... 435
Alarm ........................................ 160
Antenna .................................... 457
Anti-lock brake system .......... 373
Armrest..................................... 593
Assist grips .............................. 595
Ashtray ..................................... 584
Audio system
Antenna ................................ 457
Audio input............................ 499
AUX adapter ......................... 499
CD player/changer................ 458
iPod....................................... 477
MP3/WMA disc ..................... 468
Optimal use........................... 496
Portable music player ........... 499
Radio .................................... 453
Steering wheel audio
switch ................................. 501
Type...................................... 449
USB memory ........................ 486
Automatic air conditioning
system
Air conditioning filter ............. 654
Front automatic
air conditioning system....... 425
Rear automatic
air conditioning system....... 438
Automatic headlight leveling
system.................................... 311
Automatic light control
system.................................... 300
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission......... 249
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P ..................... 789
S mode ................................. 254
AUX adapter............................. 499
Auxiliary box .................... 573, 600
Auxiliary tray............................ 601
AVS
*
1
A
*
1
: Refer to the “Off-road Driving Owner’s Manual”.
866
Alphabetical index
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Back door
Back door................................81
Back door child-protector
lock .......................................83
Wireless remote control ..........66
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs.............675
Wattage.................................843
Battery
Checking ...............................636
If the vehicle has discharged
battery.................................795
Preparing and checking
before winter.......................396
Bluetooth
®
Audio.....................................504
Mobile phone ........................ 523
Bottle holders/
door pockets..........................567
Brake
Fluid ...................................... 838
Parking brake........................ 264
Brake assist..............................373
Brightness control
Instrument panel light
control.................................268
Lounge illumination
control.................................560
Care
Exterior..................................606
Interior................................... 610
Seat belts .............................. 611
Card holder...............................564
Cargo capacity .........................392
Cargo hooks.............................598
CD changer...............................458
CD player .................................. 458
Center differential lock
*
1
Chains....................................... 396
Child restraint system
Baby seats, definition............ 185
Baby seats, installation ......... 197
Child seats, definition............ 185
Child seats, installation ......... 197
Installing CRS with ISOFIX
rigid anchor......................... 204
Installing CRS with seat
belts.................................... 199
Installing CRS with top
straps.................................. 206
Junior seats, definition.......... 185
Junior seats, installation ....... 197
Child safety
Airbag precautions................ 179
Back door precautions............ 84
Battery precautions....... 636, 801
Child restraint system ........... 185
Child-protectors ................ 76, 83
Glass hatch precaution........... 84
How your child should wear
the seat belt........................ 126
Installing child restraints ....... 197
Moon roof precautions.......... 145
Power window lock switch .... 137
Power window precautions... 140
Removed key battery
precautions......................... 660
Seat belt precautions............127
Seat heater
precautions......................... 592
Child-protectors................... 76, 83
Cleaning
Exterior ................................. 606
Interior................................... 610
Seat belts.............................. 611
Clock......................................... 581
Coat hooks ............................... 594
Condenser................................ 635
B
C
867
Alphabetical index
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Console box .............................565
Cool box ...................................576
Cooling system
Engine overheating ...............803
Crawl Control
*
1
Cruise control
Cruise control........................324
Dynamic radar
cruise control ......................328
Cup holder................................ 569
Curtain shield airbags .............170
Customizable features ............849
DAC
*
1
Daytime running light
system .................................... 308
Deck rail.................................... 598
Defogger
Rear window .........................444
Side mirrors...........................444
Dimension ................................812
Display
Dynamic radar cruise
control.................................328
Multi-information
display ................ 276, 282, 292
Trip information.....276, 282, 292
Toyota parking
assist-sensor ...................... 345
Warning message ................. 718
Do-it-yourself maintenance ....617
Door courtesy lights
Door courtesy lights .............. 557
Wattage.................................843
Doors
Back door................................81
Back door child-protector
lock .......................................83
Door glasses .........................137
Door lock..................... 39, 66, 74
Double locking system.......... 158
Rear door child-protector
lock ....................................... 76
Side doors............................... 74
Side mirrors .......................... 134
Double locking system ........... 158
Downhill Assist Control System
*
1
DPF
Diesel Particulate Filter
system ................................ 389
Warning light......................... 703
Warning message................. 718
Driver’s seat belt reminder
light......................................... 709
Driving
Correct posture ..................... 168
Off-road precautions
*
1
Procedures ........................... 218
Winter driving tips ................. 396
Driving position memory ........ 115
Dynamic radar cruise
control .................................... 328
Electronic key
If the electronic key does not
operate properly ................. 791
Emergency brake signal ......... 374
Emergency, in case of
If the electronic key does not
operate properly ................. 791
If the engine will not start...... 786
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P ..................... 789
If the vehicle has discharged
battery ................................ 795
If the warning buzzer
sounds................................ 703
D
E
*
1
: Refer to the “Off-road Driving Owner’s Manual”.
868
Alphabetical index
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
If the warning light turns on... 703
If the warning message is
displayed ............................718
If you have a flat tire .....743, 765
If you lose your keys ............. 790
If you think something is
wrong..................................701
If you run out of fuel and
the engine stalls..................806
If your vehicle becomes
stuck ...................................807
If your vehicle has to be stopped
in an emergency .................809
If your vehicle needs to be
towed .................................. 694
If your vehicle overheats.......803
Emergency flashers
Switch ................................... 692
Engine
Compartment ........................ 623
Engine switch................ 235, 239
Hood .....................................622
How to start the
engine......................... 235, 239
Identification number............. 815
If the engine will not start ......786
If you run out of fuel and
the engine stalls..................806
Ignition switch ............... 235, 239
Overheating .......................... 803
Engine compartment cover .... 626
Engine coolant
Capacity ................................831
Checking ...............................632
Preparing and checking
before winter.......................396
Engine coolant temperature
gauge...................................... 266
Engine immobilizer system ....152
Engine oil
Capacity................................ 819
Checking............................... 627
Preparing and checking
before winter....................... 396
Engine switch .................. 235, 239
Engine switch light.................. 557
Floor mat .................................. 596
Fluid
Brake .................................... 838
Power steering...................... 839
Washer ................................. 641
Fog lights
Replacing light bulbs..... 679, 686
Switch ................................... 312
Wattage ................................ 843
Foot well lights ........................ 557
Four-wheel drive system
*
1
Front fog lights
Replacing light bulbs............. 679
Switch ................................... 312
Wattage ................................ 843
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light ........................ 709
Front position lights
Replacing light bulbs............. 681
Switch ................................... 300
Wattage ................................ 843
Front seats
Adjustment.............................. 93
Driving position memory ....... 115
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs............. 682
Switch ................................... 263
Wattage ................................ 843
Fuel
Capacity................................ 818
Fuel gauge............................ 266
Fuel pump shut off system.... 702
F
869
Alphabetical index
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Gas station information.........880
If you run out of fuel and
the engine stalls..................806
Information ............................844
Refueling...............................146
Type ...................................... 844
Fuel door ..................................146
Fuel filler door.......................... 146
Fuel pump shut off system..... 702
Fuses ........................................661
Gas station information ..........880
Gauges...................................... 266
Glass hatch ................................88
Glove box .................................563
Glove box light......................... 563
Hands-free system
(for mobile phone)................. 523
Head restraints
Adjusting ..............................119
Headlight cleaner..................... 322
Headlights
Adaptive front lighting
system ................................307
Discharge headlights
precautions ......................... 690
Replacing light bulbs.....677, 678
Switch ................................... 300
Wattage.................................843
Heaters
Seat heaters..........................590
Side mirror ............................ 444
Hill-start assist control
*
1
........ 374
Hood.......................................... 622
Hooks
Cargo ....................................598
Cargo net .............................. 600
Coat ......................................594
Identification
Engine................................... 815
Vehicle .................................. 815
Ignition switch ................. 235, 239
Ignition switch light................. 557
Illuminated entry system ........ 561
Inside door handle light .......... 557
Indicator lights......................... 270
Inside rear view mirror ............ 132
Instrument panel light
control .................................... 268
Intercooler ................................ 635
Intrusion sensor ...................... 162
Jack
Vehicle-equipped jack... 743, 765
Jack handle...................... 743, 765
KDSS
*
1
..................................... 374
Keyless entry ............................. 66
Keys
Electronic key ......................... 34
Engine switch................ 235, 239
If you lose your keys ............. 790
If your electronic key does
not operate properly ........... 791
Key number ............................ 34
Keyless entry .......................... 66
Keys........................................ 34
Mechanical key....................... 36
Wireless remote control key ... 66
Kinetic dynamic suspension
system
*
1
................................ 374
Knee airbags ............................ 170
G
H
I
J
K
*
1
: Refer to the “Off-road Driving Owner’s Manual”.
870
Alphabetical index
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
License plate lights
Replacing light bulbs.............687
Wattage.................................843
Light bulbs
Replacing .............................. 675
Wattage.................................843
Lights
Door courtesy lights .............. 557
Engine switch light ................557
Fog light switch .....................312
Headlights switch ..................300
Inside door handle lights.......557
Interior light list......................557
Personal/interior light
switch.................................. 559
Replacing light bulbs.............675
Running board lights.............557
Shift lever light ...................... 557
Turn signal lever ...................263
Vanity lights...........................580
Wattage.................................843
Luggage cover ......................... 602
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance... 617
Maintenance data ................. 812
Maintenance requirements ...613
Manual headlight leveling
dial .......................................... 301
Manual transmission ............... 258
Meter
Instrument panel light
control.................................268
Meters ................................... 266
Mirrors
Conversation mirror .............. 585
Inside rear view mirror ..........132
Side mirror heater ................. 444
Side mirrors...........................134
Vanity mirrors........................ 580
Moon roof ................................. 141
MP3 disc ................................... 468
Multi-information
display.................... 276, 282, 292
Multi-terrain ABS
*
1
Multi-terrain Monitor*
1
Multi-terrain Select*
1
Odometer.................................. 266
Off road precautions
*
1
Oil
Engine oil .............................. 627
Opener
Back door................................ 81
Fuel filler door ....................... 146
Hood ..................................... 622
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjusting and folding ............ 134
Driving position memory ....... 115
Outside temperature
display.................................... 582
Overhead console ................... 573
Overheating, Engine................ 803
Parking brake........................... 264
PCS ........................................... 380
Personal/interior lights
Personal/interior lights .......... 557
Switch ................................... 559
Wattage ................................ 843
Pollen removal mode .............. 433
Power heater ............................ 443
Power outlet............................. 586
Power steering
Fluid ...................................... 839
Power windows........................ 137
Pre-Crash Safety system ........ 380
L
M
O
P
871
Alphabetical index
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Radiator .................................... 635
Radio......................................... 453
RDS ........................................... 455
Rear air conditioning system
Automatic air conditioning
system ................................438
Manual air conditioning
system ................................435
Rear fog lights
Replacing light bulbs.............686
Switch ................................... 313
Wattage.................................843
Rear view monitor system ......356
Rear differential lock system
*
1
Rear height control air
suspension
*
1
Rear seat
Adjustment .............................. 97
Folding down the second
seatbacks ................... 102, 103
Folding down the third
seats ........................... 106, 109
Tumbling seats......................100
Rear seat entertainment system
*
2
Rear step bumper ......................83
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs.............684
Wattage.................................843
Rear window defogger ............ 444
Rear window wiper .................. 320
Replacing
Key battery............................ 656
Fuses ....................................661
Light bulbs............................. 675
Tires ...................................... 743
Roof luggage carrier................ 392
Seat belts
Adjusting the seat belt .......... 123
Automatic Locking
Retractor............................. 125
Child restraint system
installation .......................... 197
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belts ...................... 611
Emergency Locking
Retractor............................. 125
How to wear your seat belt ... 122
How your child should wear
the seat belt........................ 126
Pre-crash seat belts.............. 124
Pregnant women, proper seat
belt use............................... 125
Reminder light....................... 709
Seat belt pretensioners......... 124
Seat heaters ............................. 590
Seats
Adjustment............................ 115
Adjustment
precautions........................... 96
Child seats/child restraint
system installation .............. 197
Cleaning................................ 610
Driver’s seat position
memory .............................. 115
Front seat adjustment ............. 93
Head restraint ....................... 119
Properly sitting in the seat .... 168
Rear seat adjustment.............. 97
Seat heaters ......................... 590
Service reminder
indicators .............................. 270
R
S
*
1
: Refer to the “Off-road Driving Owner’s Manual”.
*
2
: Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
872
Alphabetical index
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Shift lever
Automatic transmission......... 249
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from “P” ..............789
Manual transmission.............258
Shift lever light......................... 557
Shift lock system ..................... 789
Side airbags ............................. 170
Side mirror
Adjusting and folding............. 134
Mirror position memory ......... 115
Side turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs.............688
Smart entry & start system
Antenna location .....................43
Entry function ..........................39
Starting the engine................239
Spare tire
Inflation pressure .................. 840
Storage location....................743
Spark plug ................................ 833
Specifications ..........................812
Speedometer ............................ 266
Steering
Column lock release .....237, 246
Fluid ...................................... 839
Steering wheel
Adjustment ............................129
Audio switches ...................... 501
Steering wheel position
memory...............................115
Stop lights
Replacing light bulbs.............688
Storage compartment..............598
Storage feature ........................562
Storage precautions ................ 393
Stuck
If your vehicle becomes
stuck ...................................807
Sun visors ................................579
Sunshade
Roof ...................................... 142
Switch
Airbag manual on-off
system ................................ 213
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch ................................. 239
Engine switch................ 235, 243
Fog light switch ..................... 312
Ignition switch ............... 235, 243
Light switches ....................... 300
Power door lock switch ........... 74
Power window switch............ 137
Rear window wiper and
washer switch..................... 320
Window lock switch............... 137
Wipers and washer
switch ......................... 314, 320
Tachometer .............................. 266
Tail lights
Replacing light bulbs............. 688
Switch ................................... 300
Talk switch
*
2
........................... 533
Telephone switch
*
2
................. 533
Theft deterrent system
Alarm .................................... 160
Double locking system.......... 158
Engine immobilizer system... 152
Intrusion sensor .................... 162
Tilt sensor ............................. 162
Tilt sensor ................................ 162
Tire inflation pressure............. 649
Tires
Chains................................... 396
Checking............................... 645
If you have a flat tire ..... 743, 765
Inflation pressure .................. 649
Replacing...................... 743, 765
Rotating tires......................... 645
T
873
Alphabetical index
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Size ....................................... 840
Snow tires .............................396
Spare tire .............................. 743
Tools .................................743, 765
Towing
Emergency towing ................ 694
Trailer towing ........................ 400
Toyota parking
assist-sensor .........................345
Traction control .......................373
Trailer towing ...........................400
TRC ...........................................373
Trip information
display .................... 276, 282, 292
Trip meter .................................266
Valet key ..................................... 34
Vanity lights
Vanity lights...........................580
Wattage.................................843
Vanity mirrors .......................... 580
Vehicle identification
number ................................... 815
Vehicle stability control ..........373
VSC ...........................................373
Warning buzzers
Brake system ................703, 725
Driver’s seat belt reminder....709
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder ............................. 709
Fuel filter ....................... 706, 729
Glass hatch ........................... 724
Open door ..................... 708, 723
Radar cruise control.............. 727
Third power seat ................... 109
Toyota parking
assist-sensor ...................... 728
Warning lights
Automatic transmission fluid
temperature ........................ 706
Anti-lock brake system.......... 705
Brake system ........................ 703
Charging system................... 704
Driver’s seat belt reminder.... 709
Engine oil change
reminder ............................. 710
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder ............................. 709
Fuel filter ............................... 706
KDSS .................................... 706
Low engine oil level .............. 710
Low engine oil pressure........ 704
Low fuel level ........................ 708
Malfunction indicator lamp.... 705
Master warning light.............. 709
Open door............................. 708
Power steering system ......... 705
Pre-crash safety system ....... 705
Seat belt reminder light......... 708
Slip indicator light.................. 706
Smart entry & start system ... 712
SRS airbags.......................... 705
Timing belt replacement ....... 706
Warning messages
Automatic transmission fluid
temperature ........................ 720
Brake system ........................ 725
Clutch switch system ............ 722
Crawl control......................... 740
Engine oil maintenance ........ 726
Engine oil level...................... 725
Engine oil pressure............... 719
Four-wheel drive system....... 740
Fuel filter ............................... 725
Glass hatch........................... 724
Low fuel level ........................ 729
V
W
*
2
: Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
874
Alphabetical index
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Moon roof..............................724
Open door .............................723
Pre-crash brake ....................729
Pre-crash safety
system ........................721, 727
Radar cruise control
system ........................721, 728
Rear height control air
suspension system.............720
Smart entry & start system....730
Steering lock system............. 720
Timing belt replacement........727
Toyota parking assist....721, 727
Warning reflector holder ......... 599
Washer
Checking ...............................641
Preparing and checking
before winter.......................396
Switch ...........................314, 320
Washing and waxing ...............606
Weight....................................... 812
Wheels ...................................... 652
Wide view front &
side monitor........................... 361
Window glasses ......................137
Window lock switch.................137
Windows
Power windows.....................137
Rear window defogger..........444
Washer.......................... 314, 320
Windshield wiper de-icer ........447
Windshield wipers ................... 314
Wireless remote control key
Locking/Unlocking................... 66
Replacing the battery ............ 656
Wireless remote control key....66
WMA disc.................................. 468
875
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
What to do if...
What to do if...
A tire punctures
P. 743,
765
If you have a flat tire
The engine does not start
P. 786
If the engine will not start
P. 806
If you run out of fuel and the engine stalls
P. 152
Engine immobilizer system
P. 795
If the vehicle battery is discharged
The shift lever cannot be
moved out
P. 789
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from “P”
The engine coolant temperature
gauge enters the red zone
Steam can be seen coming
from under the hood
P. 803
If your vehicle overheats
The key is lost
P. 790
If you lose your keys/wireless
remote control transmitter
The battery runs out
P. 795
If the vehicle battery is discharged
The doors cannot be locked
P. 7 4
Side doors
P. 8 1
Back door
The horn begins to sound
P. 160
Alarm
The vehicle is stuck in
mud or sand
P. 807
If the vehicle becomes stuck
876
What to do if...
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
The warning light or indicator
light comes on
P. 703
If a warning light turns on
Instrument cluster
Non-Optitron type meters
Optitron type meters
877
What to do if...
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Center panel
878
What to do if...
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
Warning lights
P. 7 0 3 P. 706
P. 7 0 4 P. 707
P. 7 0 4 P. 707
P. 7 0 5 P. 708
P. 7 0 5 P. 708
P. 7 0 5 P. 709
P. 7 0 5 P. 709
P. 7 0 5 P. 709
P. 7 0 6 P. 710
P. 7 0 6 P. 710
P. 7 0 6 P. 712
P. 7 0 6
Brake system warning
light
Fuel filter warning light
Charging system
warning light
Fuel system warning
light
Low engine oil pressure
warning light
DPF system warning
light
Malfunction indicator
lamp
Open door warning light
SRS warning light
Low fuel level warning
light
ABS warning light
Driver’s seat belt
reminder light
Power steering system
warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
Pre-crash safety system
warning light
Master warning light
Slip indicator light
Low engine oil level
warning light
Engine oil change
reminder light
KDSS warning light
Timing belt replacement
warning light
Automatic transmission
fluid temperature warning
light
Smart entry & start
system warning light
The warning message is
displayed
P. 718
If a warning message is displayed
879
What to do if...
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
880
L/C150_OM_OM60J78E_(EE)
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Fuel filler door
P. 146
Auxiliary catch lever
P. 622
Tire inflation pressure
P. 840
Fuel filler door opener
P. 146
Hood lock release lever
P. 622
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
Vehicles with
sub fuel tank
system
150 L (39.6 gal., 33.0 Imp.gal.)
Vehicles with-
out sub fuel tank
system
87 L (23.0 gal., 19.1 Imp.gal.)
Fuel type P. 148, 818
Cold tire inflation pressure P. 840
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill
reference)
P. 819
Engine oil type P. 819
6

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Toyota Land Cruiser 150 - 2012 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Toyota Land Cruiser 150 - 2012 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 43,27 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info